SlideShare a Scribd company logo
WiMAX network optimization 
WiMAX Network Optimizing Technique 
Date Author Remarks 
2008.5 WiMAX P&O Team Chines Version 
2009.8 WiMAX P&O Team English Version 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播
WiMAX network optimization 
Contents 
Section1 Wireless Network Planning and Optimization Process ....................................... 1 
1.1 Basic Process Introduction .................................................................................................................. 1 
1.2 Requirement Analysis.......................................................................................................................... 4 
1.3 Spectrum Scan ..................................................................................................................................... 5 
1.3.1 Scanning overview................................................................................................................... 5 
1.3.2 Scanning test type and test tools............................................................................................... 5 
1.3.2.1 Test type..................................................................................................................... 5 
1.3.2.2 Test tools.................................................................................................................... 5 
1.3.2.3 Spectrum analyzer parameters setting........................................................................ 5 
1.3.3 Test procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6 
1.3.3.1 Drive test procedure ................................................................................................... 6 
1.3.3.2 Fixed location test procedure ..................................................................................... 6 
1.3.4 Analysis of test data ................................................................................................................. 6 
1.3.4.1 Analysis of drive test data .......................................................................................... 6 
1.3.4.2 Analysis of fixed location test data ............................................................................ 7 
1.3.5 Analysis of interference in service areas .................................................................................. 8 
1.3.5.1 The influence of external interference ....................................................................... 8 
1.3.5.2 The influence of external interference on coverage ................................................... 9 
1.3.5.3 According to the result of frequency scanning export conclusions and scanning 
report.................................................................................................................................... 10 
1.3.6 System OMC uplink spectrum scanning instruction .............................................................. 10 
1.3.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................. 10 
1.3.6.2 Uplink spectrum scanning function ............................................................................................. 10 
1.4 Single Station Test............................................................................................................................. 20 
1.4.1 Single station test scope and objective ................................................................................... 20 
1.4.2 Single station test verification requirement ............................................................................ 20 
1.4.2.1 Single site verification RNP..................................................................................... 20 
1.4.2.2 Coverage area verification ....................................................................................... 20 
1.4.2.3 Coverage area KPI target ......................................................................................... 20 
1.4.3 Single station test verification contents .................................................................................. 21 
1.4.3.1 Single site information verification.......................................................................... 21 
1.4.3.2 Functional test verification....................................................................................... 21 
1.4.3.3 Drive test result ........................................................................................................ 21 
1.4.4 Coverage test verification contents ........................................................................................ 22 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - i -
WiMAX network optimization 
1.4.4.1 Configuration information ....................................................................................... 22 
1.4.4.2 Coverage polygon .................................................................................................... 22 
1.4.4.3 Coverage street information..................................................................................... 22 
1.4.5 Single station and coverage test verification report................................................................ 22 
1.5 Calibration Test ................................................................................................................................. 23 
1.6 Network Evaluation before Optimization.......................................................................................... 24 
1.7 BS Cluster Optimization.................................................................................................................... 26 
1.8 Whole Network Optimization and Network Evaluation.................................................................... 27 
1.9 Project Acceptance Test and Report Hand in .................................................................................... 28 
Section2 Network Planning Issue ...................................................................................... 29 
2.1 Optimization Test Tool Introduction ................................................................................................. 29 
2.1.1 Optimization test tool CNT introduction................................................................................ 29 
2.1.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 29 
2.1.1.2 The use of ZXPOS CNT1........................................................................................ 29 
2.1.1.2.1 Test process .................................................................................................... 29 
2.1.1.2.2 Hardware detection and configuration ........................................................... 30 
2.1.1.2.3 Hardware configuration interface introduced................................................. 31 
2.1.1.2.4 Hardware configuration interface introduced................................................. 33 
2.1.1.3 Work interface ......................................................................................................... 33 
2.1.1.4 Window interface..................................................................................................... 35 
2.1.1.4.1 Title bar .......................................................................................................... 35 
2.1.1.4.2 Menu bar ........................................................................................................ 35 
2.1.1.4.3 Status bar........................................................................................................ 35 
2.1.1.5 Toolbar..................................................................................................................... 36 
2.1.1.6 Replay toolbar .......................................................................................................... 37 
2.1.1.7 Right key menu toolbar............................................................................................ 38 
2.1.1.8 Menu and function analysis ..................................................................................... 39 
2.1.1.9 Explorer window...................................................................................................... 40 
2.1.1.9.1 Device Config ................................................................................................ 41 
2.1.1.9.2 Windows......................................................................................................... 41 
2.1.1.10 Refresh rate to adjust the window style and the curve........................................... 42 
2.1.1.10.1 Adjust wireless parameters window refresh rate chart................................. 42 
2.1.1.10.2 Style curve adjustment ................................................................................. 42 
2.1.1.11 Test software projects ............................................................................................ 43 
2.1.1.12 Export of test data .................................................................................................. 44 
2.1.1.12.1 Export pages................................................................................................. 44 
2.1.1.13 Subsection of test data ......................................................................................... 45 
2.1.1.14 Route map............................................................................................................. 46 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - ii -
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.1.14.1 Toolbar introduction ..................................................................................... 47 
2.1.1.14.2 Control Layer ............................................................................................... 49 
2.1.1.14.3 Theme setting ............................................................................................... 50 
2.1.1.14.4 Map parameters setting ................................................................................ 51 
2.1.1.14.5 Custom label settings ................................................................................... 53 
2.1.1.14.6 Marker parameters........................................................................................ 53 
2.1.1.14.7 Find the base station..................................................................................... 54 
2.1.1.15 Information display and switch .......................................................................... 55 
2.1.1.15.1 Values (WiMAX) ......................................................................................... 56 
2.1.1.15.2 Information................................................................................................... 56 
2.1.1.15.3 Legend.......................................................................................................... 56 
2.1.1.16 Drive test map ...................................................................................................... 57 
2.1.1.17 Data test ................................................................................................................ 58 
2.1.1.17.1 Plans setting page automatic test plan.......................................................... 58 
2.1.1.17.2 Message Test page news shows.................................................................... 60 
2.1.1.17.3 Throughput shows the throughput of the page ............................................. 62 
2.1.1.17.4 Statistics show page ..................................................................................... 63 
2.1.1.18 Data Monitor .......................................................................................................... 64 
2.1.1.19 WiMAX Logon Tool ............................................................................................. 65 
2.1.1.20 WiMAX Logon Tool ............................................................................................. 65 
2.1.1.21 WiMAX Communication Info ............................................................................... 66 
2.1.1.22 WiMAX Air Interface Message ............................................................................. 67 
2.1.1.23 WiMAX Modulation Statistics .............................................................................. 68 
2.1.1.24 WiMAX Date Throughput ..................................................................................... 68 
2.1.2 Optimization analysis tool CNA introduction........................................................................ 69 
2.1.2.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................. 69 
2.1.2.2 Terms, definitions and abbreviations ....................................................................... 70 
2.1.2.3 Comprehensive description...................................................................................... 70 
2.1.2.3.1 Background .................................................................................................... 70 
2.1.2.3.2 Product Overview........................................................................................... 70 
2.1.2.4 Specific functions description.................................................................................. 70 
2.1.2.4.1 Basic function analysis................................................................................... 70 
2.1.2.4.2 Segment'RSSI and Segment'CINR functions ................................................. 71 
2.1.2.4.3 Call event analysis and delay statistics........................................................... 72 
2.1.2.4.4 Analysis of handover events........................................................................... 72 
2.1.2.4.5 Interference Analysis...................................................................................... 72 
2.1.2.4.6 Analysis of dropped calls ............................................................................... 72 
2.1.2.4.7 Calls, handover of the incident shows the geographical ................................ 73 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - iii -
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.2.4.8 Jitter Analysis of packet loss rate ................................................................... 73 
2.1.2.4.9 Table part of the meaning of Item Value ........................................................ 74 
2.2 Optimize Test .................................................................................................................................... 76 
2.2.1 Test Content ........................................................................................................................... 76 
2.2.1.1 Cover Test................................................................................................................ 76 
2.2.1.2 Throughout Test....................................................................................................... 76 
2.2.1.3 Cut-over Test ........................................................................................................... 76 
2.2.1.4 Calling Test.............................................................................................................. 77 
2.2.1.5 Operation Test.......................................................................................................... 77 
2.2.1.6 Handoff .................................................................................................................... 77 
2.2.1.7 Lose Words Rate...................................................................................................... 77 
2.2.2 Testing Method ...................................................................................................................... 78 
2.2.2.1 DT Testing ............................................................................................................... 78 
2.2.2.2 CQT Testing............................................................................................................. 78 
2.3 RF Optimizing Subject ...................................................................................................................... 79 
2.3.1 RF Optimizing Goal ............................................................................................................... 79 
2.3.2 Antenna Optimization ............................................................................................................ 79 
2.3.3 Calibration Power Optimizing................................................................................................ 79 
2.3.4 Interference’s Searching and Frequency Scanning................................................................. 79 
2.4 Access and Paging............................................................................................................................. 80 
2.4.1 Basic connection flow............................................................................................................ 80 
2.4.1.1 Connection flow chart.............................................................................................. 80 
2.4.1.2 Small area option and downlink synchronization .................................................... 80 
2.4.1.2.1 OMC parameters chart below ........................................................................ 81 
2.4.1.2.2 Physicalal Layer Parameter OMC Configuration........................................... 82 
2.4.1.3 Ranging.................................................................................................................... 82 
2.4.1.3.1 Ranging parameters........................................................................................ 82 
2.4.1.3.2 Ranging OMC parameter configuration......................................................... 83 
2.4.1.4 SBC negotiation ability............................................................................................ 84 
2.4.1.4.1 SBC parameters.............................................................................................. 84 
2.4.1.4.2 SBC OMC parameters configuration ............................................................. 85 
2.4.1.5 Coding and authorization......................................................................................... 87 
2.4.1.5.1 OMC parameters configuration...................................................................... 87 
2.4.1.6 REG ability negotiation ........................................................................................... 88 
2.4.1.7 Service flow setup.................................................................................................... 88 
2.4.1.8 Obtaining IP ............................................................................................................. 89 
2.4.2 Idle Idle model and paging flow............................................................................................. 89 
2.4.2.1 The function of idle model....................................................................................... 89 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - iv -
WiMAX network optimization 
2.4.2.2 Paging chart ............................................................................................................. 90 
2.4.2.3 Entering idle flow chart............................................................................................ 90 
2.4.2.4 Location update........................................................................................................ 91 
2.4.2.5 Paging flow.............................................................................................................. 92 
2.4.2.6 Exit idel state flow ................................................................................................... 92 
2.4.2.6.1 OMC parameters configuration...................................................................... 93 
2.5 Handover Technology ....................................................................................................................... 94 
2.5.1 Handover types....................................................................................................................... 94 
2.5.1.1 Hard Handover (HHO)............................................................................................. 94 
2.5.1.2 Fast BS Switching (FBSS)....................................................................................... 94 
2.5.1.3 Macro Diversity Handover(MDHO) .................................................................. 94 
2.5.2 HHO workflow....................................................................................................................... 94 
2.5.3 The related parameters configure of HO................................................................................ 95 
2.5.3.1 HO configure page ................................................................................................... 96 
2.5.3.2 HO parameter instruction......................................................................................... 96 
2.5.3.3 Neighbor configure page.......................................................................................... 97 
2.5.3.4 Neighbor parameters explan .................................................................................... 98 
2.5.3.5 Trigger configure ..................................................................................................... 99 
2.5.3.6 Trigger parameter instruction................................................................................... 99 
2.6 Power Control optimization............................................................................................................. 100 
2.6.1 PC and AMC principle ......................................................................................................... 100 
2.6.1.1 The purpose of PC.................................................................................................. 100 
2.6.1.2 The principles of PC .............................................................................................. 100 
2.6.1.3 Power Control Classification ................................................................................. 100 
2.6.1.4 AMC ...................................................................................................................... 101 
2.6.1.5 PC and AMC arithmetic......................................................................................... 104 
2.6.2 Power Control and AMC configure ..................................................................................... 104 
2.6.2.1 DL Burst Profile configure .................................................................................... 104 
2.6.2.2 DL Burst Profile parameters instruction ................................................................ 104 
2.6.2.3 UL Burst Profile configure .................................................................................... 105 
2.6.2.4 UL Burst Profile parameter instruction.................................................................. 106 
2.6.2.5 AMC configure ...................................................................................................... 107 
2.6.2.6 AMC frequent parameters instructions .................................................................. 108 
2.6.2.7 PC configure parameters ........................................................................................ 112 
2.6.2.8 PC parameters explanation..................................................................................... 115 
2.7 Admission and congestion control................................................................................................... 125 
2.7.1 QOS of the air-interface resource of WiMAX ..................................................................... 125 
2.7.1.1 Air-interface resource ............................................................................................ 125 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - v -
WiMAX network optimization 
2.7.1.2 Flux of subscribers’ service-flow........................................................................... 125 
2.7.1.3 Types of service-flow............................................................................................. 125 
2.7.1.4 Admission and congestion control ......................................................................... 127 
2.7.2 Admission Control ............................................................................................................... 127 
2.7.2.1 Basic principle ....................................................................................................... 127 
2.7.2.2 Realization method ................................................................................................ 127 
2.7.2.3 The application scene of admission control ........................................................... 127 
2.7.2.4 Serveral terms considering by admission control .................................................. 128 
2.7.2.5 Admission control parameters explanation ............................................................ 128 
2.7.2.6 Admission configure page ..................................................................................... 130 
2.7.3 Congestion control ............................................................................................................... 130 
2.7.3.1 Basic principle ....................................................................................................... 130 
2.7.3.2 Realized mode........................................................................................................ 130 
2.7.3.3 The scene of congestion control............................................................................. 131 
2.7.3.4 Congestion control parameter ................................................................................ 132 
2.7.3.5 Congestion control configure page ........................................................................ 133 
Section3 WiMAX Terminal Introduction ....................................................................... 134 
3.1 Summary of frequent terminal sort summary.................................................................................. 134 
3.1.1 Sort according to the shape and interface............................................................................. 134 
3.1.2 Sort according to the chip vendor......................................................................................... 135 
3.2 Detail configuration instruction of frequent terminal ...................................................................... 135 
3.2.1 USI CPE terminal................................................................................................................. 136 
3.2.1.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction..................................................... 136 
3.2.1.2 Use command......................................................................................................... 139 
3.2.2 ZTE terminal (base on Beceem chip) ................................................................................... 139 
3.2.2.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction..................................................... 139 
3.2.2.2 TTIS authentication configuration ......................................................................... 144 
3.2.3 GCT terminal........................................................................................................................ 148 
3.2.3.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction..................................................... 148 
3.2.3.2 Common command instruction.............................................................................. 149 
3.2.3.2.1 Set frequency................................................................................................ 149 
3.2.3.2.2 Print packet command.................................................................................. 149 
3.2.3.2.3 Dump command........................................................................................... 150 
3.2.3.2.4 Configuration command............................................................................... 151 
Section4 WiMAX Network KPI Introduction ................................................................ 153 
4.1 WiMAX network performance KPI introduction............................................................................ 153 
4.1.1 KPI concept .......................................................................................................................... 153 
4.1.2 WiMAX KPI introduce ........................................................................................................ 153 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - vi -
WiMAX network optimization 
4.1.2.1 Coverage KPI......................................................................................................... 153 
4.1.2.1.1 DL/UL RSSI................................................................................................. 153 
4.1.2.1.2 DL/UL CINR................................................................................................ 153 
4.1.2.1.2 DL/UL Tx Power.......................................................................................... 154 
4.1.2.2 System Performance KPI....................................................................................... 154 
4.1.2.2.1 Initial Access ................................................................................................ 154 
4.1.2.2.2 Service Flow Setup ...................................................................................... 155 
4.1.2.2.3 System Connection Drop Rate ..................................................................... 157 
4.1.2.2.4 Hard Handover ............................................................................................. 157 
4.1.2.2.5 Delay............................................................................................................ 161 
4.1.2.2.6 Jitter.............................................................................................................. 162 
4.1.2.2.7 Packet Loss................................................................................................... 163 
4.1.2.3 KPI recommend value............................................................................................ 163 
4.2 KPI statistic tool CNO2 introduction .............................................................................................. 164 
4.2.1 Introduction of CNO2 .......................................................................................................... 164 
4.2.2 Benefit of using CNO2......................................................................................................... 164 
4.2.3 Data Characteristic of CNO2................................................................................................ 164 
4.2.4 Advantage of CNO2............................................................................................................. 165 
4.2.5 Main Operation Statistic steps of CNO2 for WiMAX......................................................... 165 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - vii -
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure Content 
Figure 1 Network Optimizing Flow............................................................................................................. 2 
Figure 2 Structure of Network Optimizing Project...................................................................................... 3 
Figure 3 The influence of interference on coverage .................................................................................... 9 
Figure 4 The opening of the spectrum scanning method ........................................................................... 12 
Figure 5 Opening of the methods of scanning the spectrum...................................................................... 12 
Figure 6 Spectrum scanning parameters set............................................................................................... 13 
Figure 7 Opening of the base-band interference analysis method ............................................................. 14 
Figure 8 Opening of base-band interference analysis method ................................................................... 14 
Figure 9 Analysis of base-band interference parameters ........................................................................... 15 
Figure 10 Spectrum scan result.................................................................................................................. 16 
Figure 11 The curve plot of spectrums scanning ....................................................................................... 17 
Figure 12 Base-band interference analysis reported result ........................................................................ 18 
Figure 13 Brief Flow for Network Evaluation........................................................................................... 24 
Figure 14 Hardware configuration windows.............................................................................................. 31 
Figure 15 Advanced configuration window............................................................................................... 32 
Figure 16 Suspension of the dialog box testing equipment ....................................................................... 33 
Figure 17 The main operation interface..................................................................................................... 34 
Figure 18 Main interface title bar .............................................................................................................. 35 
Figure 19 Main interface menu bar............................................................................................................ 35 
Figure 20 Main interface status bar............................................................................................................ 35 
Figure 21 Main interface toolbar ............................................................................................................... 36 
Figure 22 Replay toolbar............................................................................................................................ 37 
Figure 23 Set replay position ..................................................................................................................... 38 
Figure 24 Set replay position ..................................................................................................................... 38 
Figure 25 Device Config page ................................................................................................................... 41 
Figure 26 Window management page........................................................................................................ 41 
Figure 27 Wireless Parameters window menu chart .................................................................................. 42 
Figure 28 Chart Option dialog box ............................................................................................................ 43 
Figure 29 Export Manager—Export page.................................................................................................. 44 
Figure 30 Export Manager—LogMask page ............................................................................................. 45 
Figure 31 Geographical display windows.................................................................................................. 47 
Figure 32 Route Map window toolbar ....................................................................................................... 47 
Figure 33 Control layer dialog box ............................................................................................................ 49 
Figure 34 Themes Settings dialog box....................................................................................................... 50 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - viii 
-
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 35 Themes setting dialog box――SetSymbol................................................................................ 51 
Figure 36 Themes setting dialog box――Auto Generate Values .............................................................. 51 
Figure 37 Map parameters setting.............................................................................................................. 52 
Figure 38 Custom label settings................................................................................................................. 53 
Figure 39 Marking Options settings window............................................................................................. 54 
Figure 40 Find cell windows...................................................................................................................... 55 
Figure 41 Information display.................................................................................................................... 55 
Figure 42 Information display――Values (WiMAX) ............................................................................... 56 
Figure 43 Information display――Information......................................................................................... 56 
Figure 44 Information display――Legend................................................................................................ 57 
Figure 45 Drive test map............................................................................................................................ 57 
Figure 46 Data Test windows - Test Plan Settings page ............................................................................ 58 
Figure 47 Data Test window - Test page news........................................................................................... 61 
Figure 48 Data Test window-data throughput of the page....................................................................... 62 
Figure 49 Data Test window-statistic page.............................................................................................. 63 
Figure 50 Data Monitor windows .............................................................................................................. 64 
Figure 51 WiMAX system landing interface ............................................................................................. 65 
Figure 52 WiMAX basic information ........................................................................................................ 66 
Figure 53 WiMAX basic information ........................................................................................................ 67 
Figure 54 WiMAX air interface message................................................................................................... 68 
Figure 55 WiMAX various adjustments of the data encoding................................................................... 68 
Figure 56 WiMAXView window-data throughput page ......................................................................... 69 
Figure 57 Connection flow chart ............................................................................................................... 80 
Figure 58 Physicalal Layer Parameter OMC Configurations .................................................................... 82 
Figure 59 Ranging OMC parameter configurations................................................................................... 84 
Figure 60 SBC parameters configuration-1 ............................................................................................... 86 
Figure 61 SBC parameters configuration-2 ............................................................................................... 87 
Figure 62 Parameters configuration of Coding and authorization ............................................................. 88 
Figure 63 Chart of service flow setup ........................................................................................................ 89 
Figure 64 Paging chart ............................................................................................................................... 90 
Figure 65 Entering idle flow chart ............................................................................................................. 91 
Figure 66 Location update flow chart ........................................................................................................ 91 
Figure 67 Paging flow chart....................................................................................................................... 92 
Figure 68 Exit Idle flow chart .................................................................................................................... 93 
Figure 69 Pagegroup OMC parameters configuration ............................................................................... 93 
Figure 70 Workflow chart of HHO............................................................................................................ 95 
Figure 71 HO page configure..................................................................................................................... 96 
Figure 72 OMC Neighbor configure.......................................................................................................... 98 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - ix -
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 73 OMC Trigger configure ............................................................................................................. 99 
Figure 74 OMC DL Burst Profile configure ............................................................................................ 104 
Figure 75 OMC UL Burst Profile configure ............................................................................................ 106 
Figure 76 AMC configure 1..................................................................................................................... 107 
Figure 77 AMC configure 2..................................................................................................................... 108 
Figure 78 DL AMC enable....................................................................................................................... 108 
Figure 79 DL FEC.................................................................................................................................... 109 
Figure 80 UL AMC enables ..................................................................................................................... 109 
Figure 81 UL FEC.....................................................................................................................................110 
Figure 82 DL AMC method ......................................................................................................................110 
Figure 83 UL AMC methods.....................................................................................................................110 
Figure 84 AMC parameter ........................................................................................................................111 
Figure 85 PC configure page 1 .................................................................................................................113 
Figure 86 PC configure page2 ..................................................................................................................113 
Figure 87 PC configure page3 ..................................................................................................................114 
Figure 88 PC configure page4 ..................................................................................................................114 
Figure 89 PC configure page5 ..................................................................................................................115 
Figure 90 DL PC enables ..........................................................................................................................115 
Figure 91 Boosting....................................................................................................................................116 
Figure 92 PC paramters ............................................................................................................................116 
Figure 93 UL PC enables ..........................................................................................................................117 
Figure 94 UL CINR average1 ...................................................................................................................117 
Figure 95 UL CINR average 2 ..................................................................................................................118 
Figure 96 UL power adjust .......................................................................................................................118 
Figure 97 UL PC enables ..........................................................................................................................118 
Figure 98 UL PC methods.........................................................................................................................119 
Figure 99 UL PC message........................................................................................................................ 120 
Figure 100 Drop off ................................................................................................................................. 120 
Figure 101 Drop off 2 .............................................................................................................................. 120 
Figure 102 PC adjustment........................................................................................................................ 122 
Figure 103 Subchannel limit .................................................................................................................... 123 
Figure 104 Subchannel limit 2 ................................................................................................................. 123 
Figure 105 DL-MAP................................................................................................................................ 124 
Figure 106 Admission configure page ..................................................................................................... 130 
Figure 107 Congestion control configure ................................................................................................ 133 
Figure 108 Indoor CPE............................................................................................................................ 134 
Figure 109 USB Card............................................................................................................................... 134 
Figure 110 Express CPE .......................................................................................................................... 135 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - x -
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 111 Outdoor CPE.......................................................................................................................... 135 
Figure 112 USI CPE IE Configure Page .................................................................................................. 136 
Figure 113 USI CPE Physical layer parameters configuration ................................................................ 137 
Figure 114 USI CPE authtication IE configurations ................................................................................ 138 
Figure 115 USI software upgrade ............................................................................................................ 139 
Figure 116 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 1............................................................................. 140 
Figure 117 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 2............................................................................. 140 
Figure 118 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 3............................................................................. 141 
Figure 119 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 4............................................................................. 142 
Figure 120 ZTE Beeccem chip parameter A............................................................................................ 143 
Figure 121 ZTE Beeccem chip parameter B............................................................................................ 143 
Figure 122 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 1 ............................................................... 145 
Figure 123 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 2 ............................................................... 146 
Figure 124 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 3 ............................................................... 147 
Figure 125 ZTE Beeccem Chip authentication configuration 4............................................................... 148 
Figure 126 GCT Card Configure page..................................................................................................... 149 
Figure 127 Initial access flow.................................................................................................................. 155 
Figure 128 Service setup flow ................................................................................................................. 156 
Figure 129 System connection drop flow ................................................................................................ 157 
Figure 130 Hard handover flow............................................................................................................... 159 
Figure 131 Hard handover duration flow................................................................................................. 161 
Figure 132 Land interface........................................................................................................................ 166 
Figure 133 Template management interface ............................................................................................ 166 
Figure 134 Create indexes template......................................................................................................... 167 
Figure 135 Analysis tool interface ........................................................................................................... 167 
Figure 136 Choose statistic indexes interface.......................................................................................... 168 
Figure 137 Statistic result interface.......................................................................................................... 168 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - xi -
WiMAX network optimization 
TABLE CONTENT 
Table 1 Information of Interference in DT................................................................................................. 7 
Table 2 Noise Floor List of XX Site .......................................................................................................... 7 
Table 3 Main Interference List in Each Frequency Band at Site 1............................................................. 8 
Table 4 Running the ZXPOS CNT1......................................................................................................... 34 
Table 5 State of the status icon function .................................................................................................. 36 
Table 6 Note the toolbar button................................................................................................................ 36 
Table 7 Toolbar help replay function ....................................................................................................... 37 
Table 8 The main interface toolbar .......................................................................................................... 39 
Table 9 Toolbar button functions instructions.......................................................................................... 47 
Table 10 WiMAX basic information.......................................................................................................... 67 
Table 11 Specific abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 70 
Table 12 OMC Physicalal Layer Parameter............................................................................................... 81 
Table 13 Ranging parameter introduction.................................................................................................. 83 
Table 14 SBC parameters introduction ...................................................................................................... 85 
Table 15 UL FEC ..................................................................................................................................... 102 
Table 16 DL FEC ..................................................................................................................................... 102 
Table 17 DIUC recommended value........................................................................................................ 105 
Table 18 UIUC recommended configure ................................................................................................. 106 
Table 19 Table of admission control parameter explanation.................................................................... 128 
Table 20 Congestion control parameters explanation .............................................................................. 132 
Table 21 KPI reference value................................................................................................................... 163 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - xii -
WiMAX network optimization 
Section1 Wireless Network Planning and 
Optimization Process 
& Knowledge 
l Basic process introduction ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 
l Requirement analysis -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level1 
l Spectrum scan----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level1 
l Single station test -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 
l Calibration test ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 
l Network evaluation before optimization ----------------------------------------------------------------Level1 
l BS cluster optimization ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level2 
l Whole network optimization and network evaluation ------------------------------------------------ Level2 
l Project acceptance test and report hand in --------------------------------------------------------------Level2 
1.1 Basic Process Introduction 
Network optimizing is a significant point during the wireless network constructing, the function of 
wireless network always varies while the network is developing, subscriber amount is increasing and 
subscriber distribution altered. Therefore, network optimization is to guarantee the network function will 
satisfy the subscribers all the time. 
The complete flow of wireless network optimization is shown as figure 1.The unnecessary stages in 
this flow will be cancelled according to the client’s requirement and project situation in actual network 
optimizing projects. For the optimization of the third party, stages should be selected base on the contract of 
network optimization. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 1 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 1 Network Optimizing Flow 
The wireless propogation environment should be ensured firlstly in the process of network optimizing, 
and then the problems in the network should be solved step by step form part to entire (from single BS to 
cluster then to whole network). 
The functions of main stages in network optimization are as below: 
1. Requirements analysis: to understand the working target and obtain useful information. 
2. Spectrum scanning: to ensure the wireless environment (without interference). 
3. Sample station inspection: to ensure a single station works well. 
4. BS cluster optimization: to ensure a part of network area works well. 
5. Entire network optimization: to ensure the whole network works well. 
A network optimizing project may adopt the organization structure as a network programming project, 
which is shown as figure 2. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 2 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 2 Structure of Network Optimizing Project 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 3 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.2 Requirement Analysis 
The purpose of requirement analysis is to obtain the detail requirement of a project, including the 
client’s anticipation about the result optimized, the standard of checking and acceptance. 
According to the normal process, the network is already active at this stage; detail information can be 
collected via communicating with clients. For the network optimization executed by equipment vendor or 
program designed corporation, the relevant information should be collected by internal approach. 
In this stage, some information needs collecting and some content needs confirming, such as to know the 
requirement of coverage and capacity, including the scope of optimizing area, the scope of essential area 
and the wireless environment of optimizing area, especially the information of area that has particular 
requirement about data capacity. These areas should be ensured essentially in an optimization process. 
1. To obtain the information of current network, including the longitude/latitude, station type, 
antenna height, sector orientation, declination angle, antenna model, feeder line length, 
emission power, area wireless parameter programming, etc. 
2. To collect the system parameter configuration, including the basic parameters of physicals 
layout and MAC layout, power control and AMC, handoff parameter, acceptance and 
congestion control parameters, calling group configuration and IP address scheme, etc. 
3. To collect problems of the current network, including client’s complaint and feedback from 
other paths, especially the most urgent problem which client can not suffer should be solved 
essentially. 
4. To confirm the checking standard of each sub-project, the checking standard should be clear 
in the contract of network optimization; if it is not clear, these information should be 
confirmed at the requirement analysis stage; every sub-project in the network optimization 
should have checking standard, otherwise it will be difficult to confirm whether the 
optimizing work achieve the standard. 
5. To confirm the parameter of each project under testing: including the selection standard, 
calling mode requirement, testing period configuration (busy, null, load) of the testing path 
and testing point. 
6. To confirm the division between client and us: confirm what task the client should do and 
what resource the client should provide. 
For item 4, only if the network optimization is at the third party, the last 3items will be confirmed with 
client together. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 4 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.3 Spectrum Scan 
1.3.1 Scanning overview 
Spectrum scanning is to know whether the interference exists in the system spectrum, including 
scanning and interference checking. Generally, the scanning is needed; the interference checking should be 
implemented by the company which has the relevant intelligence. Spectrum scanning is conducted for 
confirming whether there existing interference within the working frequency band and selects proper 
channel number with no or little interference for the current network. In the WiMAX system, the TDD 
mode is adopted by the network, so scanning either uplink or downlink is enough. 
1.3.2 Scanning test type and test tools 
1.3.2.1 Test type 
The spectrum scanning can be classified into two types: drive test and fixed location test. The 
drive test can find possible areas with interference but it cannot identify the accurate locations of 
interference sources. While the spectrum scanning at fixed locations can search out more detailed 
information about interfering frequencies, such as their direction and position, strength, etc. Select 
the test type depending on the actual situation; referring to the Regulations of Frequency Scanning. 
1.3.2.2 Test tools 
1. Spectrum Analyzer 
2. Omni antenna type and antenna gain 
3. Filter loss 
4. LNA gain 
5. Proper RF cable (confirm cable loss) 
6. GPS receiver 
7. PCMCIA card (or Flash memory/Serial cable/Floppy disk) 
8. Laptop 
1.3.2.3 Spectrum analyzer parameters setting 
1. Central frequency 
2. Scanning band span 
3. Scan time span 
4. Resolution Band Width (RBW): 10 kHz (or actual RBW) 
5. Ref level 
6. Attenuation 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 5 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.3.3 Test procedure 
1.3.3.1 Drive test procedure 
1. Determine the test routes. It is required that the test routes passes through the whole coverage 
area as much as possible. 
2. Connect the test devices; set the resolution band width (RBW) as 10 kHz; the band width is 
XX MHz~XX MHz. 
3. Conduct the DT on the designated routes, recording the variation information of the signal 
when passing on different paths. 
4. Analyze the test data. 
1.3.3.2 Fixed location test procedure 
1. Select the test points; 
2. Locate with the GPS, recording the longitude and latitude of test points; 
3. Connect the test devices, and set the test software properly; 
4. Without antenna connection, measure noise floor of the spectrum analyzer. Note that the RBW 
setting during this step should be accorded with that used in the actual frequency scanning process. 
If the noise floor is normal, go on to the next steps; otherwise, check out whether the spectrum 
analyzer can work properly. 
5. Connect antenna, filter, etc., and measure the noise floor of target frequency band, then save 
the result; 
6. Interference test: Measure the interference within target frequency band. Note that reserve the 
test data after the peak value is keeping stable. Repeat such test, until all uplink and downlink 
frequency bands which need to be measured have been tested. Save results. 
7. When the test is finished, output the recorded data or related figure files and complete the test 
report. 
1.3.4 Analysis of test data 
1.3.4.1 Analysis of drive test data 
According to the DT in XX service area, it is found that there exist interference signals within the 
tested frequency bands (including in the uplink and downlink). The detailed information about the 
interference is as follows: 
1. Distribution figure of positions with interference: mark the positions where there exists 
interference in the figure and make a serial number for each position. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 6 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2. Figure of signals received in positions where there exists interference: provide the frequency 
spectrum figure featuring the interfering signal. For each position, present a corresponding 
frequency spectrum figure, which can be named after “Interference at the position X”. 
Data analysis: describe the information of interference in a table like follows. “Position of 
interference” means the geographic position of the interference. If ensure interference occurs in 
several positions, present the position where the interference is the strongest. 
Table 1 Information of Interference in DT 
Position of 
interference 
Center frequency of 
Interference (MHz) 
Interference 
Bandwidth (kHz) 
Peak 
Power 
(dBm) 
Information of 
Interference in 
DT 
1.3.4.2 Analysis of fixed location test data 
1. Figures of frequency spectrum during frequency scanning: the figure of frequency spectrum 
generally contains two parts: the background noise and interfering frequency spectrum of each 
band. Present a figure of interference frequency spectrum for each band; the figure of frequency 
spectrum is also demanded even though no interference exists in the band. 
2. Table of data analysis: background noise measurement means measuring the background noise 
of the frequency scanning apparatus without the built-out antenna. Conduct such measurement at 
all sites, with the main purpose of checking out if the frequency scanning apparatus has set 
properly. If several RBW settings are used during the test, it needs to measure the background 
noise under each RBW setting and list them in the following table. 
Table 2 Noise Floor List of XX Site 
Table Frequency Band (or 
Channel Number) 
Noise Floor without 
Antenna (dBm) 
Noise Floor with 
Antenna (dBm) Remark 
Note: There are only major interference being listed in the above “Interference list”, the interference 
intensity (power) being generally above -105dBm. In terms of the weaker interferences, they can be 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 7 页
WiMAX network optimization 
consulted from the above frequency spectrum figure. This requirement is the same to the following 
test points. 
Table 3 Main Interference List in Each Frequency Band at Site 1 
Central Frequency 
of Interference 
(MHz) 
Interference 
Bandwidth 
(kHz) 
Peak Power 
(dBm) RBW (kHz) 
Equivalent Peak 
Power Relative to 
RBW=10kHz (dBm) 
450.048 20 -70 10 -70 
450.12 40 -84 100 -94 
1.3.5 Analysis of interference in service areas 
According to the test result of DT, present the areas with relatively strong interference and describe the 
interference details; 
According to the test result of the point test, supply the information of the sites with relatively serious 
interference; 
Present the information of the frequency bands within which there is relatively much interference; 
Present the primary analysis about the interfering signals (for example, showing whether the 
interference signal is regular or not), along with the rough range of the interference intensity (power). 
According to the result of frequency scanning, we can get the following conclusions: 
1.3.5.1 The influence of external interference 
If interference exists in radio system, it can influence all performance and the most important 
influence is coverage radius (reverse coverage radius especially). 
Since WIMAX is a spread spectrum communications system, the low power and narrow 
bandwidth interference only influence less WIMAX system, but the high power and wide 
bandwidth interference can interference seriously WIMAX system. There is an example to 
calculate the influence. 
An interference calculation example is given in 2500MHz WIMAX system, because there are 
some PTT systems, radio access system and many illegal users, these high power and wide 
bandwidth interference will influence seriously the 2500MHz WIMAX system if it is set up. 
If the interference with 20KHz bandwidth and average –70dBm spectrum power is spread over 
1.23MHz bandwidth of WIMAX system, then the rise over thermal (ROT) at BTS receiver is 
–70+10log10(20/1230)=-87.89dBm. The thermal noise without interference is –108dBm, so this 
interference makes thermal noise rise 20dB. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 8 页
WiMAX network optimization 
According to Hata formula: 
L ( dB ) = 46.3 + 33.9log fMHz - 13.82log h - a 
( h ) + - 10 10 1 2 (44.9 6.55log h 10 1 ) log 
10 
dkm - 
Cm 
a 
2 
h h 
( ) = 3.2(log 11.75 ) - 
4.97 
2 10 2 
3(In Urban Area) 
= 
Cm 
If BTS antenna height is 30 meters, mobile antenna is 1.5 meters, B is 80 present and frequency 
band is 2500MHz, so above formula can be changed: 
L dB dkm ( ) = 129.82 + 35.22log10 
The BTS sensitivity is invariable value, so the link budget coverage radius should decrease when 
the thermal noise is raised 20dB. According to above formula: 
DL = + d - - d = d 
129.82 35.22log 129.82 35.22log 35.22log ( km 
1 
) 
2 
km km d 
10 1 10 2 10 
km 
DL 
1 = = 
d 
km 
d 
So: 1035.22 3.7 
2 
km 
This means that the coverage radius decrease 1/3.7 times. 
1.3.5.2 The influence of external interference on coverage 
Now give an example, the influence of interference on coverage is as follows: 
relationship between equivalent interference and coverage radius 
100.00% 
90.00% 
80.00% 
70.00% 
60.00% 
50.00% 
40.00% 
30.00% 
20.00% 
10.00% 
0.00% 
-108 -104 -100 -96 -92 -88 
equivalent interference(dBm) 
present of coverage radius and area 
decrease 
radius 
area 
Figure 3 The influence of interference on coverage 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 9 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.3.5.3 According to the result of frequency scanning export 
conclusions and scanning report. 
When finished the scanning test, we need to make conclusions and export scanning report. The 
report format can refer to <WiMAX spectrum scanning report template>. 
1.3.6 System OMC uplink spectrum scanning instruction 
1.3.6.1 Overview 
The guide book is writed for WiMAX wireless network optimization. The WiMAX technology 
has initially with my colleagues in the background, you can directly refer to the instructions of the 
work flow and processing methods. 
The guide book is writed for the guidance of WiMAX wireless interference investigation work 
environment. 
The main method is to clear away the use of system functions to locate and troubleshoot 
interference. It supports the functions of the above version 3.20.02B1 version. 
1.3.6.2 Uplink spectrum scanning function 
1.1 Introduction 
Uplink spectrum scanning includes two functional modules, the spectrum scanning and 
analysis of base-band interference. 
1.1.1 Spectrum Scan 
Spectrum scanning function is defined as a prerequisite for access to non-users, in the specified 
uplink Segment (also designated carrier) on the specified antenna configuration of the entire 
channel bandwidth for the sub-carrier power (average power or peak power) scan, and reported the 
results of scanning to the background, which can be configured in the background shows the whole 
bandwidth of the spectrum (the power of all subcarriers), channel bandwidth and PAPR RSSI, 
similar to the function of spectrum analyzer. 
1.1.2 Analysis of base-band interference 
For broadband interference, RSSI can be observed in general to judge, therefore, interfere with 
the analysis of base-band narrowband interference only. Through the analysis of base-band 
frequency spectrum characteristics of each symbol in order to determine whether there is 
interference. If there is interference, will be the peak position (interference location) average 
(subcarriers), and peak position of the variance, more than the ratio threshold, such as the specific 
results reported to the background. 
1.2 The purposes and the basic principles of base-band interference analysis 
1.2.1The purpose of base-band interference analysis 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 10 页
WiMAX network optimization 
The received signals of WiMAX system, beside we need the terminal signal, may also include 
other source signals, the source of the signal system where if falls on WiMAX channel bandwidth, 
and up to a certain intensity, the interference has become. WiMAX systems will interfere with a 
certain degree of performance degradation, such as access would cause some users uploading and 
downloading speeds drop, performance instability. Serious interference will lead terminal unable to 
access network and so on. Analysis of base-band interference is in accordance with the purpose of 
setting the parameters of the background base-band sampling and analysis, from the surface to 
determine whether there is interference. If there is interference, it will interfere with the analysis of 
the results (such as the interference location) reported to the background, so that we can know 
which band is the existence of interference in the band WiMAX system settings, you can 
circumvent the interference of these frequencies, to improve the WiMAX system performance. 
1.2.2 The principle of base-band interference analysis 
According to base-band received frequency domain data for each sub-carrier power calculation, 
and through 22 sub-carrier power comparison between the subcarriers from the largest power, as 
peak power, and then divided by the peak power of all other sub-carrier average power , the PAPR. 
The use of PAPR calculated with the background set the threshold for comparison, if the reporting 
period exceeds the threshold PAPR specific ratio of the proportion of the background set to 
illustrate the existence of interference, the results will be reported to the background interference. 
1.3 Use instructions 
1.3.1 Start conditions 
WiMAX systems operating normally, the background of the single window alarms (CSIM, 
MPIM, and WBPM) without warning. No user access (a user can start the scan access, but may 
interfere with the baseband business and affect the results of the analysis) 
1.3.2 Start Methods 
1.3.2.1 Spectrum Scan 
Select [View → System Tools → Analysis of RF / Views → System Tools → RF Analysis] 
menu, enter the "spectrum scanning / Spectrum Scan" interface. Please refer to follow Figure 4 
and Figure 5. 
The more detail operation of spectrum scanning, please refer to the document of<WiMAX spectrum 
scanning guidance>. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 11 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 4 The opening of the spectrum scanning method 
Figure 5 Opening of the methods of scanning the spectrum 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 12 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Select [Scan Settings spectrum / Set] or click the icon on the toolbar settings to scan the network 
element / NE setting, and choose to scan the antenna / Select antenna, the type of scan / Scan type 
setting (power scan or peak power scan), the duration of scanning / Report working hours (m), the data 
reported to the cycle / Report period (s) and so on. As follow figure 6. 
Figure 6 Spectrum scanning parameters set 
Choose [to start scanning the spectrum / Start] or click the icon on the toolbar to start scanning. 
1.3.2.2 Analysis of base-band interference 
Select [View → System Tools → Analysis of RF / Views → System Tools → RF Analysis] menu, 
enter the "base-band interference analysis / Interfere Analyse" interface. As follow Figure 7 and Figure 8. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 13 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 7 Opening of the base-band interference analysis method 
Figure 8 Opening of base-band interference analysis method 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 14 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Select [base-band interference analysis set / Set] or click the icon on the toolbar settings to scan the 
network element / NE setting, and choose to scan the antenna / Select antenna, the duration of 
scanning / Report working hours (m), data reported to the cycle / Report period (s) and so on. In the 
"threshold PAPR" / PAPR threshold (dB) text box, enter the PAPR threshold value specific value, unit 
of dB; in the "threshold than the proportion of over peak value" / Overrun PAPR threshold (%) text 
box Enter "Over peak value threshold than the proportion of" the specific value of 0.01 units, enter the 
20 representatives of 20%, as shown in Figure 6. Here, to determine whether to select the threshold of 
interference is crucial. If the selected threshold is too low, more power will be part of the normal data 
ruled Dead; if selected threshold is too high may result in undetected Dead. According to "Simulation 
Analysis of Interference Rejection Report V1.1", a number of interference statistics to determine the 
threshold rate and the miscarriage of justice under the ignore judge rate, and bit error rate value, and 
ultimately set the threshold for interference: QPSK way to determine the interference threshold to 
10.5dB, 16QAM interference approach to determine the threshold 12.5dB, check the nearest whole 
number can be input. Over peak value threshold proportion can input according to requirements. 
Figure 9 Analysis of base-band interference parameters 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 15 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Choose [the beginning of base-band interference analysis / Start] or click the icon on the toolbar to 
start scanning. 
1.3.3 Stop method 
1.3.2.3 Spectrum Scan 
Select [stop spectrum scanning / Stop] or click on the toolbar to stop scanning. To stop the success of 
the interface in the log to stop the success of tips given. To stop the failure of the interface in the log the 
reasons for failure are given prompt. 
1.3.2.4 Analysis of base-band interference 
Select [Analysis of base-band to stop scanning / Stop] or click on the toolbar to stop scanning. To 
stop the success of the interface in the log to stop the success of tips given. To stop the failure of the 
interface in the log the reasons for failure are given prompt. 
Reported the results of 1.3.2.4 
1. Spectrum scanning: 
Open Scan function if successful, will be given in the log to open a successful interface prompts; in 
the "spectrum scanning table," observed reported RSSI, PAPR, such as data, network element every 
cycle, a return to a news report in the spectrum scanning Table interface to add a record, as shown in 
Figure 10. 
Figure 10 Spectrum scan result 
In the "scan curve plot of the spectrum" can be observed that the bandwidth of the spectrum graphics, 
as shown in Figure 11: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 16 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 11 The curve plot of spectrums scanning 
Map abscissa bandwidth on behalf of the band, the representative of power ordinate. 
Clear away function if the failure to open, in the log the reasons for failure are given prompt 
interface. 
2. Baseband interference analysis: 
If you open the base-band interference analysis of the success of the interface is given in the log to 
open a successful tips. If the open fails, the log gives the reasons for failure prompted interface. 
After the success of start, if there is interference (ie, memory cycles calculated in the base-band 
sub-carrier average power ratio PAPR PAPR set the background threshold high, and the proportion above 
the threshold set to meet or exceed the proportion of the background), will be the peak position 
(interference location) average (subcarriers), and peak position of the variance, more than the ratio 
threshold, such as the specific results reported to the background. If every report period returns a 
message, in the spectrum scanning interface will add a record, as shown in Figure 12. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 17 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 12 Base-band interference analysis reported result 
Reported the results of three major parameters: 
1. The peak location (the location of interference) average / Interference Location Average, 2. That is 
the figure reported to the sub-carrier, 3. From No. subcarriers can be provided in accordance with the 
method followed to calculate the frequency bands where interference. 
4. Peak location variance / Interference Location Variance, 5. This parameter can be compared to 
determine whether interference with a fixed location in the same 6. The peak position of the variance is 
zero, at one place, as the Figure peak location variance is zero of 512. 7. That interference in the 512 
fixed on the sub-carrier. The deviation value is more small, 8. Interference occurred in the more fixed 
position, 9. Contrarily. 10. The location of interference 11 not more fixed. 
12. More than the specific ratio of the threshold / Over Threshold Ration, 13. The main report shows 
that in a cycle, 14. PAPR exceeds a set threshold ratio. 
If there is no interference, then there will be no background in data reporting. The definition of 
interference is related to the setting threshold of PAPR and the proportion of the over threshold value. 
Notes: 1. Background PAPR threshold set to 0 when data should be reported, but there is not 
interference. 
2. Detection of interference, the need to constantly adjust the settings background PAPR threshold, so 
that the peak position reported to minimize the variance (preferably 0), this report should be the peak 
position is relatively fixed to the existence of interference the location of the. Bandwidth on the 10M and 
7M, the peak position of 512, corresponding to its center frequency; 5M bandwidth for the peak position 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 18 页
WiMAX network optimization 
of 256, corresponding to its center frequency. 10M, 5M width of each sub-carrier is about 10K, 7M about 
7K, it can interfere with the location value, center frequency, the width of each subcarrier to calculate 
about the existence of band interference, this can also scan curves with the spectrum to see. 
3. To detect the existence of band interference can be by modifying the system to the center frequency 
band to avoid interference. 
1.3.6.3 Other notes 
WiMAX as a result of the current agreements and products are constantly improved, updated 
hardware and software faster than each of the requirements and objectives of the test is not entirely 
consistent. Up-to-date information, therefore, to understand the changes in the parameters, the complete 
network optimization is a necessary condition for network optimization is also a goal. 
The guide book may be the upgrade version of change. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 19 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.4 Single Station Test 
1.4.1 Single station test scope and objective 
This document describes drive test and network statistics acceptance test procedure for Preliminary 
Acceptance (PA), Final Acceptance (FA) & Stability Acceptance (SA) and RF systems performance criteria 
for a WiMAX 802.16e wireless network using hardware and software provided by vendor. 
The purpose of single station testing is to make sure each station works well, to avoid someone affects 
the entire performance. The single test main include two parts: Single site verification test and Coverage 
area verification test. 
1.4.2 Single station test verification requirement 
1.4.2.1 Single site verification RNP 
Singles site verification (SSV) shall be one of requirement for the WiAMX Rollout network to 
achieve service readiness. 
On completion of site installation, the vendor shall perform alarm parameter consistency check 
before site activation. 
The drive test routes shall include serving areas for 3 sectors and to have handover between sectors. 
The drive test measurement shall be conducted on normal working day within 9am to 10 am. 
Vehicle speed should not be more than 70km/h. 
The vendor shall perform single site Verification by having RSSI and CINR Coverage scanning for 
all sector. Single Site Verification report is to be submitted no later more than 2 days after site 
activation. The report shall include but not limited to the following: Site information, Defined 
measurement test routes, Drive test coverage plot, and Drive test measurement logs. 
Coverage scanning includes RSSI and CINR & Tx Power data collection. Basic functionality test 
include: Call setup (VoIP), Packet setup (FTP), Download and upload Throughput (FTP), Intra-site 
handover. 
1.4.2.2 Coverage area verification 
All data shall be collected in mobility condition and test areas within the designed service 
coverage area. The “designed service coverage area” is defined as the coverage polygon. The 
data collected shall be evenly distributed within the designed service coverage area. 
1.4.2.3 Coverage area KPI target 
Data shall be collected under mobility condition and complete agreed drive test route. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 20 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Field measurements by drive tests (air interface measurements) will be carried out to measure and 
validate the coverage of the cluster. Drive tests shall be performed using WiMAX scanner and 
having statistically significant number of data. 
All data collected shall be logged and recorded for post-processing and verification. 
For Single Site Verification(SSV), the KPIs target are: 
At least 90% of the measured downlink RSSI shall be greater or equal to -85dBm. 
At least 90% of the measured downlink CINR shall be greater or equal to 10dB. 
1.4.3 Single station test verification contents 
1.4.3.1 Single site information verification 
Before Single Site Verification test, We must confirm the following site information: 
· Radio Specification: Antenna Azimuth, Mechanical Down Tilt, Antenna 
Type, Antenna Height 
· Cell Configurations: BS_ID, Frequency, Preamble_Index, TxPower 
1.4.3.2 Functional test verification 
Functional test must include the following: 
· Functional Test: Network Access, Ping Test, Throughput Test, Intra-site 
HO, Inter-site HO 
1.4.3.3 Drive test result 
After drive test, we export coverage test plot. 
· Drive test Plot : Drive Test Route, RSSI Coverage Plot, CINR Coverage 
Plot, Tx Power Plot 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 21 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.4.4 Coverage test verification contents 
1.4.4.1 Configuration information 
In first part give planned and optimization configuration information, it must include the 
following site information: 
· Site_ID, Cell_ID, BS_ID, Cluster, Azimuth, M_Tilt, Frequency, 
Premble_Index , TX_Power, Antenna_Height 
1.4.4.2 Coverage polygon 
In this part there should be coverage polygon plot. The RSSI of polygon layer is more than -85 
dBm. The CINR of polygon layer is more than 10 dB. 
1.4.4.3 Coverage street information 
The report should give a table file of coverage street name, and a mapinfo file of coverage 
polygon. 
1.4.5 Single station and coverage test verification report 
When finished the verificatiost test, we need to collect test results and export test verification report. 
The report format can refer to the document of <WiMAX single site verification report template>. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 22 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.5 Calibration Test 
Adjustment test is used for testing the loss in different environment, so that the coverage of other 
environment can be calculated according to the data of the environment that has been tested. 
Adjustment test consists of items below during network optimizing: 
1. Indoor penetrating loss testing 
i. This process is to test the loss between Indoor and outdoor, in order to know the Indoor coverage 
situation according to the drive test. 
ii. Through the concurrent test of two terminals Indoor and outdoor, the Indoor penetrating loss 
can be obtained according to the receiving power of the weo terminals. 
2. Vehicle antenna adjustment test 
i. This process is to test the loss of vehicle antenna; it is used for the tools which need vehicle 
antenna. The test result of inside vehicle can be deduced according to the vehicle antenna testing. 
ii. Put the antenna of testing tool inside or on the top of the vehicle, according to the signal 
strength, the gain between vehicle antenna and inside can be obtained. 
3. MS antenna test 
i. This process is to test the signal difference between the MS antenna and inside vehicle, the 
inside coverage effect can be deduced according to the testing data of MS antenna. 
ii. Connect the MS antenna with the vehicle top and test the receiving power, compare with the 
receiving power of inside vehicle, the antenna gain in normal situation can be obtained. 
4. Test of average penetrating loss in vehicle 
i. Test the signal difference between inside and outside vehicle, calculate the outside 
communicating position according to the inside testing data, such as the coverage effect of 
pedestrian path. 
ii. Put two terminals at normal positions inside and outside the vehicle, test using PING package 
concurrently, and make a record of the receiving power in both circumstances, the penetrating 
loss can be got after comparing. 
All adjustment testing should use multiple test points, the final value should be the mean value. 
When the testing values are being preceded, the coverage effect of different environment can be obtained 
according to the test result inside vehicle. 
If the condition of above equipments (including vehicles) are not in accord, the adjustment testing should 
be added in the CNT1 and get the loss roaming value, to assure the modification of testing tool will not 
affece the accuracy of result. 
If the condition of above equipments (including vehicles) are not in accord, the adjustment testing should 
be added in the CNT1 and get the loss roaming value, to assure the modification of testing tool will not 
affece the accuracy of result. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 23 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.6 Network Evaluation before Optimization 
Before optimization, to estimate the situation of network has effect in two aspects: 1. to compare with the 
network after optimization and know the optimizing effect; 2. to find out the problem in current network, 
this will be the guidance for network optimization in future. 
Tasks in this stage: 
The flow of network estimation is show as figure 13. 
Figure 13 Brief Flow for Network Evaluation 
Tasks in this stage include: 
1. Confirm whether OMC data can be provided, transitted network needs to be coordinated; 
confirm whether the data estimation is needed. 
2. Define the parameters which are confirmed by the contract and client. If no requirement is in 
the contract, the parameters should be defined as universal values or sub-branch company 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 24 页
WiMAX network optimization 
confirmed; the parameters include test path of DT(drive test), test point of CQT(call qualty test), 
test time, calling method; and confirm the test method for data operation, such as FTP or Iperf. 
3. Confirm the estimating project and standard, if this is not provided, it should be given by 
client; if client can not do this, and general standard should be involved for estimation. 
4. Make a plan: including the requirement of time, staff and resource. Time should be 
confirmed by client, DT、CQT and OMC can be operated in parallel or serial according to 
the requirement of resource and time. 
5. Data collection: DT test, CQT test, and OMC data collection should be operated according 
to predefined parameters: 
i. DT test consists of urban DT and main roads DT, record datas DL received, such as RSSI, 
CINR, inverse emission power, connection times, successful connection times, lost 
connection times, DL/UL data rate, handoff times, handoff delay, etc. 
ii. CQT test is operated in dense urban area only, which is to test voice and data. Record datas 
DL received, such as RSSI, CINR, inverse emission power, connection times, successful 
connection times; 
iii. OMC target is the entire network data, which generally includes successful calling rate, lost 
rate, and adjust according to the client’s target. 
6. Data process: obtain the result of estimated project according to the standard and data 
clooected before, such as RSSI coverage, CINR coverage, maximum data rate, DT, CQT and 
OMC should be treated respectively. 
7. Marking: mark DT, CQT and OMC repectively and then get the total mark. 
8. Problem analysis: analyze the problem area according to the estimated result, find out the 
problem, such as handoff causes lost, block induces bad coverage. 
9. Planning suggeation: the suggestion for network construction should be given according to 
the current problems, to solve the network problem is first aim of network problem in this stage. 
Write the report for network estimation, network estimation finish after client confirm. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 25 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.7 BS Cluster Optimization 
The purpose of BS cluster optimization is to locate in sections and solve problems in the network, which 
may have peoblems in network estimation, cluster testing and others. Frequent problems are: low quality 
voice, high lost rate, and calling difficulty, low data rate, calling failure, long setup time and low successful 
handoff rate. 
Tasks of BS cluster optimization are introduced as below: 
For a large network, especially an unfinished projest, or malfunction BS is in a network, it is necessary to 
divide the whole network into small clusters, and optimize one by one. This method decreases the difficulty 
of optimization, which is named as cluster optimization. 
BS cluster optimization includes tasks below: 
1. BS cluster division 
i. The entire network should be divided into clusters before optimization, generally less than 
19 BTS (BS amount in standard network topology), overlap should exist between 
contiguous BSs. 
ii. BS cluster is marked by the standards below: topography business requirement. The areas 
have particularly needs in data or voice should be marked in the same cluster, so problems 
can be solved easier. The areas which have same problems in networks should be marked in 
the same cluster. 
2. BS cluster optimization: 
i. BS clusters can be optimized in serial or parallel according to the resource siyuation and 
time requirement. 
ii. Solve problems in different topics: such as coverage, business, handoff, etc. 
iii. Base on the information about problems of network estimation and cluster test, engineers 
analyze the problems and make the solution. 
iv. After the adjustment is implemented (including the site adjustment and parameter 
adjustment), engineers should test the area where problems exist; if problems have been 
solved, go to next stage, otherwise it should be analyzed again. 
v. After all problems have been solved, engineers should test the entire BS cluster and collect 
information of acceptance checking; it meets the acceptance, go to optimize the next cluster, 
otherwise the affecting elements should be analyzed and optimize furthermore. 
vi. After every BS cluster meets the standard of acceptance checking, go to optimize the entire 
network. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 26 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.8 Whole Network Optimization and Network Evaluation 
After all BS clusters have been optimized, the entire network needs optimizing to solve the problem 
between BS clusters. When the retire network meets the requirement, the network function can be known 
by estimation. 
Tasks in this stage: 
After all BS clusters optimization has been finished, systems in most areas should work well, but in some 
area, especially the clusters overlapped area, problems might exist. These parts should be adjusted 
considering function guide to achieve the final target of network optimization. The working flow is as 
below: 
1. Understand the optimizing purpose which is the target should be achieved. 
2. Confirm the testing route, including all important coverage area. 
3. All around driving test. 
4. Analyze testing data, find out problems in the network and make an adjusting scheme. 
5. Implement the scheme and test to verify. 
6. Analyze the testing data, comfirm whether it achieves the prospective target. If it achieves, 
go to next problem, otherwise optimize further. 
7. If all problems have been solved, go to the network estimation after optimization, test the 
optimized area according to the acceptance checking standard. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 27 页
WiMAX network optimization 
1.9 Project Acceptance Test and Report Hand in 
Project acceptance checking is to test the project according to the contract or agreement. The inspecting 
standard is in the contract or agreement. Tasks in this stage include items as below: 
1. Make a plan, start testing after the person who is charge of this confirms. 
2. Determine the testing route and set the parameters according to the contract or agreement; if no 
regulation is in the contract, we should consult with client; the CQT test is probably needed based 
on the contract. 
3. Test and record the data in background, write <checking testing report> according to the data; if the 
nerwork meets the standard, write <wireless network optimizing report>; if the network not meets 
the standard, check after analyzing and solving problems; client’s staff should participate in the the 
process of testing and analyzing to guarantee the the result and report can be admitted by client. 
4. Report should be handed in to the client after checking, communicate and introduce the process, 
problems, optimizing implements and result, according to the report, <checking and acceptance 
report> and <acceptance and checking report>, client confirm the effect of optimization. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 28 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Section2 Network Planning Issue 
& Knowledge 
l Optimization test tool introduction ----------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 
l Optimization test -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 
l RF optimization subject -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 
l Access and paging ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level1 
l Handover technology --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level2 
l Power control optimization -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level2 
l Receive control and congest control--------------------------------------------------------------------- Level3 
l MIMO technology ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level4 
l HARQ technology ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level4 
l FFR technology -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level3 
2.1 Optimization Test Tool Introduction 
2.1.1 Optimization test tool CNT introduction 
2.1.1.1 Overview 
WiMAX network optimization tests were aimed at knowing the work status of the network through 
signal test. Prepare to optimization and adjusting for the network, Optimization of the current 
equipment is ZXPOS CNT1 software, GPS, GCT card. 
This document will be introduced this system to install and use the CNT. 
2.1.1.2 The use of ZXPOS CNT1 
2.1.1.2.1 Test process 
1. According to the test need to select hardware devices (hardware option for the GPS, GCT card 
terminal). 
2. Received computer equipment (please refer to equipment manuals, equipment, connectivity and 
understanding of the operation parameter configuration). 
3. Running ZXPOS CNT1, testing of the equipment on the computer port. Test software will 
automatically identify the type of equipment and the completion of the configuration parameters 
related to communications (equipment testing method of the parade, please refer to 2.1.1.2.2 of this 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 29 页
WiMAX network optimization 
chapter). 
4. Click on Main Menu [File → Save ...] or click the toolbar to enter the test mode, save the 
test data. At this point test software from a variety of devices to read the test parameters, and save 
documents in the test. If the test does not save data, click the toolbar button , enter the test mode 
LIVE. 
5. Through the main menu on the [WiMAXView], the function of various window open to observe 
the wireless parameters. 
6. The test is completed, click the toolbar , you can stop recording the test data. 
7. Exit the ZXPOS CNT1. 
2.1.1.2.2 Hardware detection and configuration 
Hardware detection and configuration is in the Explorer window of the Device Config page. ZXPOS 
CNT1 hardware detection offers two ways: the attention of the G card WiMAX terminal CNT 
software must be running before the insertion port, otherwise it is impossible to detect. 
1. Manual detection: the need for the user to confirm the device connected to the port, as well as 
types of test equipment. Realizing that the equipment connected to the port, as well as the type of 
device, they can quickly complete the configuration of equipment. 
Steps are as follows: 
i. Click on Device Config page Explorer window, the window shows a tree of all the ports on your 
computer. 
ii. Click on the port connection of the equipment. 
iii. Click the right mouse button, pop-up shortcut menu and select the type of equipment testing: 
GPS device is connected click [Detect GPS]; 
iv. At this time the name of the port in the back, will show the current state of testing. If the 
equipment successfully detected, the port will automatically mount the following device name. If 
testing fails, what ports do not show the back (when the detection fails, the users need to refer to 
equipment manuals, carefully testing equipment, as well as the connecting device parameter 
settings). 
2. Automatic detection: test software to scan all the ports, the port automatically detects the device. 
Scan all the ports, often rather time-consuming. 
3. Steps are as follows: 
i. Click on Device Config page Explorer window, the window shows a tree of all the ports on your 
computer. 
ii. Click the right mouse button, pop-up shortcut menu, click on [Auto Detect All]. 
iii. At this time the name of the port in the back, will show the current state of testing. If the 
equipment successfully detected, the port will automatically mount the following device name. If 
testing fails, what ports do not show the back (when the detection fails, the users need to refer to 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 30 页
WiMAX network optimization 
equipment manuals, carefully testing equipment, as well as the connecting device parameter 
settings). 
4. Intelligent Detection: ZXPOS CNT1 will check and test equipment by previous hardware 
configuration, if the device is detected the same with last time, it will enter automatically the Live 
Testing mode. When the equipment and their connection mode are fixed, it is the fastest check and 
test mode. 
Flexibility uses the three testing methods that can enhance the work efficiency. 
2.1.1.2.3 Hardware configuration interface introduced 
Hardware configuration of the interface is located in the Explorer window Device Config page, 
Figure 14 has been configured for the hardware after the completion of the Device Configure 
window. 
Figure 14 Hardware configuration windows 
1. Build In: 
i Sim Navigator: Simulation of GPS, when the computer does not have a GPS device and any 
connected or not mandatory Indoor Navigator when selected, the system will automatically use the 
simulation of internal GPS, the GPS will automatically generate random GPS positioning information. 
ii Indoor Navigator: If the Indoor test, select this. 
2. COM: hardware serial number is located. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 31 页
WiMAX network optimization 
3. Right Menu: 
i. Detect GPS: detected on the selected serial port GPS; 
ii.Detect Phone: detected on the selected serial port terminal; 
iii.Detect PNScanner: detected on the selected serial port PNScanner; 
iv.Auto Detect Drv: serial port on the selected type of automatic hardware detection; 
v. Auto Detect All: detected in all serial port hardware; 
vi. Smart Detect Dev: according to the previous devices, the intelligent detection; 
vii. Delete Device: delete the selected hardware device; 
viii. Delete All Devices: remove all the hardware serial port; 
viv. Live Rec Mode: access to real-time recording mode, so that the work equipment, and real-time 
data display window (Note: At this time data is not recorded in the document); 
vv. Advanced Config: hardware-driven pop of the Advanced Configuration window shown in Figure 
15; 
Figure 15 Advanced configuration window 
1. Enable Advanced Settings: Advanced Settings parameter functions do not use the default high-level 
parameters; 
2. Phone DM Baud: Baud rate Terminal Diag Mode. If you specify a baud rate, can greatly enhance 
the detection rate of terminal, but the wrong settings, will detect the failure terminal. The default setting 
is Auto Band (Automatic baud rate); 
3. Phone Model: number of terminals of the need to test the use of special software in order to allow 
detection of success-to-end. If you use these terminals, you must use this feature. These terminal: LG 
FWD, LG fixed Desk; HY FWD, HY fixed Taiwan; ZTE PTT, ZTE's PTT terminal; Custom, custom 
high-level features, from technical support staff under the guidance of the use; General Qualcomm, 
Qualcomm general chip terminals, this type by default. 
4. GPS Detect Time: GPS to check the time, units of seconds, default is 5 seconds. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 32 页
WiMAX network optimization 
5. Note: The appropriate use of advanced settings that can effectively reduce the testing time, but 
inappropriate settings, this will result in detection of the failure of equipment, such as the baud rate is 
set wrong. 
6. View Drv Status: See the hardware type of status information. 
2.1.1.2.4 Hardware configuration interface introduced 
If you want the process of testing equipment, suspension equipment testing, you can right-click 
Device Config page will pop up as shown in Figure 16 dialog box. Click <Yes>, the software will 
be the suspension of the testing equipment. 
Figure 16 Suspension of the dialog box testing equipment 
2.1.1.3 Work interface 
The main ZXPOS CNT1 standard WINDOWS interface style, through the main interface can be 
easily out of the window functions. Main interface Main interface to provide the following elements: 
1. Main menu: a variety of functions out of the window; 
2. Article Tools: Quick out of the window function used; 
3. Explorer window: responsible for equipment configuration and window management; 
4. Title bar and status bar: shows the status of software and equipment. 
Click [Start → Programs → ZTE Netscope Solution → ZXPOS CNT1] to start the main 
program ZXPOS CNT1, the operation of the main screen shown in Figure 17. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 33 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 17 The main operation interface 
There is a number of ZXPOS CNT1 state, each state corresponds to a specific function. 
Operation is divided into three categories according to their functions, are as follows: device 
configuration status, test status, replay status. Specific description of a variety of state in Table 4: 
Table 4 Running the ZXPOS CNT1 
Sub-state name Function description 
System Init 
System Init state system is 
activated 
Device Config 
Device Configuration 
Device Config 
Device configuration 
System Close 
System Close the system 
is shut down 
Live Testing 
Live Testing to test the 
state of real-time testing, 
software to read data from 
the device, but does not 
save data 
Logging 
Logging records, and 
software to read data from 
the device and the data 
stored in the APT 
document 
Test status 
Logging Pause 
Logging Pause to suspend 
the data files stored in the 
APT, but the software still 
read data from the device 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 34 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Sub-state name Function description 
Logging Stop 
Logging Stop the closure 
of test files, return to the 
status of Live Testing 
Replay Init 
Replay Init state replay 
replay initialization in 
progress 
Replaying Replaying are replay 
Replay Pause 
Replay Pause replay of 
the suspension 
Replay status 
Replay Stop Replay Stop to stop replay 
2.1.1.4 Window interface 
2.1.1.4.1 Title bar 
Figure 18 Main interface title bar 
Title bar shows the version number ZXPOS CNT1 (see Figure 18). 
2.1.1.4.2 Menu bar 
Figure 19 Main interface menu bar 
1. [File] menu, including documents and procedures on the operation of the option; 
2. [View] menu, including custom testing program, TCP / IP data acquisition, mapping the way 
show the window; 
3. [WiMAXView] menu includes a variety of software pieces of WiMAX wireless parameters of 
the chart; 
4. [Tools] menu include a variety of software parameters setting and commonly used tools; 
5. [Window] menu include the option to operatation for procedures window; 
6. [Help] menu include versions instructions of procedures and help document the options. 
2.1.1.4.3 Status bar 
Figure 20 Main interface status bar 
As shown in Figure 20: 
1. The status bar of the first column shows the time to end the current test, are to be connected to 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 35 页
WiMAX network optimization 
display terminal; 
2. The second column shows the terminal with the current test model; 
3. The third column shows the current status of testing of the GPS; 
4. The fourth column shows the Hint software information; 
5. The fifth column shows the battery power of information: that the use of alternating current blue 
and green that the use of battery; 
6. The sixth column of four icons of the status information display system, as shown in table 5; 
7. Seventh column shows the CPU usage information. 
Table 5 State of the status icon function 
Icon Functional Description 
Equipment operating normally, without any warning 
The existence of alarm. Click on the icon, you can pop-up warning dialog box 
to view specific content Alert 
Process equipment is state of the state or the replay 
Live Testing procedures or in the Logging Pause state, test data is not saved to 
the hard disk 
Logging procedures, and test data saved to the hard disk 
GPS did not lock the satellite 
GPS satellite lock 
Did not collect TCP / IP, PPP data, click on the adjustable DataMonitor 
Acquisition is TCP / IP, PPP data, click on the adjustable DataMonitor 
2.1.1.5 Toolbar 
Figure 21 Main interface toolbar 
Toolbar to place a commonly used shortcut menu button, the button on the toolbar of the function 
refer to Figure21. The right side of the toolbar where shows the status of software running, the 
meaning of running status in Table 6. 
Table 6 Note the toolbar button 
button description of function menu item 
Road test data to open File→Open 
Road test data preservation File→Save 
Rapid deployment (when replay is 
not visible, see Chapter IV) 
Shortcut button for the F2, in the 
device configuration window of the 
shortcut menu, there is also the 
corresponding function. 
Test (when replay is not visible, in the device configuration window 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 36 页
WiMAX network optimization 
button description of function menu item 
that there is no test of red, yellow, 
said Live Testing, green means 
Logging, said purple Logging 
Pause). Tip: When the software 
Live Testing state, and then click 
this button, you can revert to the 
status of device configuration 
shortcut menu, there is also the 
corresponding function. 
Suspension of the test data record 
(save the test data can be seen) 
File→Pause Logging 
To stop recording the test data, 
return to a state of Live Testing 
(save the test data can be seen) 
File→Stop Logging 
Explorer window to show or hide 
Cascade window Window→Cascade 
Horizontal window Window→Tile Horizontally 
Placed vertical window Window→Tile Vertically 
Test data View→Data Test 
Road Mapping View→Route Map 
Basic Information Map WiMAX View→WiMAX Basic Info 
Base station information map 
WiMAX View → WiMAX 
Communication Info 
WiMAX data throughput 
WiMAX View → WiMAX Data 
Throughput 
WiMAX air interface message 
browser 
WiMAX View→WiMAX Air Interface 
Message 
2.1.1.6 Replay toolbar 
If the program in a replay state, the main interface will increase the replay toolbar is as follows: 
Figure 22 Replay toolbar 
Description of the function of the button, please refer to table 7. 
Table 7 Toolbar help replay function 
Button Description of function 
To replay the first file 
Suspend replay 
Mobile players back Article 
To stop replay 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 37 页
WiMAX network optimization 
The beginning of replay 
Article players move 
Document to the end of replay 
Speed up the replay speed manual 
Replay speed of the current paper is the number of times the normal speed, 1x, said normal speed, 
2X speed that is twice the normal, 1/2X that half of normal speed, followed by analogy. 
: Rolling block shows 
the current replay position, at both ends of scroll bar documents show that the test starting time, 
most of the time the right side shows the current replay time point. 
2.1.1.7 Right key menu toolbar 
In replay mode, the menu label to provide replay time, this feature can be precisely set the current 
replay position, and automatically record the location of the recent set of replay. 
Figure 23 Set replay position 
1. Auto Fill: Auto Fill settings are data replay. Article replay when the drag, the program 
automatically to the current replay before the data to fill some time to read and fill. Propose to open 
this function. 
2. Set Replay Positon: set the replay point to the location, see Figure24. 
The lower half of the menu, indicating that the user has recently set the replay position: 
1. C said that this time of CPU time (CPU Time); 
2. S said that the time to end this time (Time Stamp). 
Figure 24 Set replay position 
1. CPU Time said that the time set for the CPU time; 
2. TimeStamp that time set up time for the terminal. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 38 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.1.8 Menu and function analysis 
ZXPOS CNT1 software features a simple menu description. 
Table 8 The main interface toolbar 
menu 
drop-down 
menu options Function 
New File New to open the device 
configuration window 
Open Open to open the road test data 
Save Save to preserve the road test 
data 
Close Close to close the road test or 
the closure of a state document 
Export … Export to the road test data into 
a CSV file Introduction 
Recent APT File a recent road test data list 
Quick Config Rapid deployment of Quick 
Config 
Live Testing Live Testing stagnant document 
Save As Default Project save the current project settings 
to the default settings of the 
project 
Load WinPos From Default 
Project 
Project item from the default 
settings in the location of the 
window loading 
Load Cell Site base station loading 
information file 
Unload Cell Site uninstall the base station 
information file 
Recent Cell Site Files document the most recent list of 
base station information 
Open Project File… Open the project file 
Save Project File Save project files 
Recent Project File project documents have 
recently 
Save Window Position preserve the location of 
documents saved as POS 
Open Win Position Files open the window position 
Recent Win Position Files the location of the recent file 
list 
File 
Close All Windows close all windows (except for 
device drivers window) 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 39 页
WiMAX network optimization 
menu 
drop-down 
menu options Function 
Exit Exit from the main program 
Data Test View Data Test Data Test 
View Data Monitor TCP / IP data collection 
Route Map Road Mapping 
WiMAX 
Logon Tool 
WiMAX network landing 
WiMAX Basic Info 
WiMAX Basic Info display 
RSSI, CINR, TxPower, Per and 
other information 
WiMAX Communication Info base station information 
WiMAX Air Interface Message Air Interface Message 
WiMAX Modulation Statistics modulation coding 
WiMAXView 
WiMAX Date Throughput 
The throughput of uplink and 
downlink 
Replay Bookmark Replay Bookmark 
General Options System Parameters 
System Mode Configuration 
System Mode Configuration 
option settings 
Alarm List Alarm List List 
Device Alarm Configuration 
Parameters alarm system 
hardware configuration 
Measurement Alert 
Configuration 
configuration of alarm 
parameters 
Cellsite Color Settings 
Cellsite Color Settings area 
custom color 
Tools 
Cellsite Information Cellsite Information Browser 
Cascade Cascade window 
Tile Horizontally horizontal window 
Tile Vertically placed vertical window 
Window 
Minimize All minimize all windows 
Content Help Content 
Help 
About … Version Information 
2.1.1.9 Explorer window 
When ZXPOS CNT1 started, Explorer window automatically follow the start, used for equipment 
configuration window management. Explorer window has two TAB pages, which respectively are 
Device Config and Windows Windows. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 40 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.1.9.1 Device Config 
TAB this page as shown in Figure 25, the main equipment used for the configuration. 
Figure 25 Device Config page 
2.1.1.9.2 Windows 
TAB pages of this as follow Figure 26; it is used for window management. 
Figure 26 Window management page 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 41 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Window management page, as well as by the type of equipment, business classification, classify 
various windows. Selection box which in front of window name expresent that it has been opened. 
Users can click the name of the pre-selection window frames, corresponding to open or close the 
window. 
2.1.1.10 Refresh rate to adjust the window style and the curve 
In the main menu of the [View] and [WiMAXView] the most out of wireless parameters in the 
chart window has the following functions: to change the refresh rate window, and modify the style 
curve. These two functions can be right from the window out menu, right menu, as shown in 
Figure 27. 
Figure 27 Wireless Parameters window menu chart 
2.1.1.10.1 Adjust wireless parameters window refresh rate chart 
Test software will be updated from time to time the chart window, the frequency of updates can be 
a window through which the right settings menu. High update frequency, data display will be more 
timely, but a little waste of the computer's CPU resources. Window refresh rate can be based on 
your computer's performance, as well as the number of access equipment to carry out the 
necessary adjustments. Test software has a window to the default refresh rate of the optimized 
parameters of good, in the absence of special circumstances, do not propose to adjust. Refresh rate 
to adjust the function of the window at right-menu: 
Update 250ms: update rate of 250ms in the window; 
Update 500ms: update rate of 500ms in the window; 
Update 1000ms: to 1000ms window update rate; 
Update 1500ms: Update to the rate of 1000ms window. 
2.1.1.10.2 Style curve adjustment 
Wireless parameters of the chart window menu [Series Options], adjustable to adjust the curve 
style window, as shown in Figure 28: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 42 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 28 Chart Option dialog box 
In the left side of the Chart Options window is a list, the list shows the name of the curve, right 
curve shows the currently selected style information, the meaning of each parameter as follows: 
1. Series: curve style 
i. Color: box on the left shows the color curve, and size, click on this box may pop-up color 
settings dialog box, modify the color of curve; 
ii. Width: the width of curves. 
2. Axis Range: The range of axis 
i. X Max: X-axis end position (starting at 0); 
ii. Y Min: Y-axis location of the starting point; 
iii. Y Max: Y-axis end position; 
iv. Y Axis Automatic: Y-axis by the value for the automatically adjust the size. 
3. Dialog box button function 
i. Ok: Save parameters, and close the dialog box; 
ii. Default: the use of test software default parameters; 
iii. Cancel: cancel settings, close the dialog box. 
Note: The set of parameters will be stored in the settings file, the next time you start testing the 
software automatically loads. 
2.1.1.11 Test software projects 
When replay or turn off the test paper test, the test software will automatically position the window, 
set the parameters of the base station to open information file, the map is loaded automatically 
saved in a project file. In the name of the project document and test the same extension RPJ. Next 
time open the test document, the software will automatically load the project file and restore 
information. 
Test software in the start time, will automatically load a default project file, commonly used to 
automatically open a window to load the map and the base station information. Through the main 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 43 页
WiMAX network optimization 
menu of the [File → Save As Default Project] to set the default item. 
In the General Options window, you can modify the project to load test software settings. 
2.1.1.12 Export of test data 
ZXPOS CNT1 test data to provide rich functionality to export, open the test document, through the 
main menu of the [File → Export ...], could be released Export Manager window, the window has 
two pages in Figure 4, respectively, 12, Figure 4 13 show. 
2.1.1.12.1 Export pages 
Export page of Export Manger, which shows a variety of export-related parameters settings, as 
shown in Figure 29. 
Figure 29 Export Manager—Export page 
1. File Format: the exported file format types; the current version only supports export CSV data 
types. 
2. Export Type: the type of export: the current version only supports export of the Map Data. 
i. TA Data: search engine of the multi-path information; 
ii. Map Data: display geographic data, including time, latitude and longitude, as well as in the 
Map window to show the wireless parameters (such as power); 
iii. Layer 3 Message: WiMAX empty message can be exported to worry too much about 
LogMask parameters; 
iv. Phone Debug Message: Terminal Debug information; 
v. Diag Packet Message: test message packets can be exported to worry too much about LogMask 
parameters; 
3. Export L3/Diag Packet Message Option: Export empty message news as well as test additional 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 44 页
WiMAX network optimization 
option package 
i. Precise Time Stamp: the use of precise time information; 
ii. Export Raw Data: Export news source flow; 
iii. Export Decode Tree: Export tree decoding messages; 
iv. Export Page Channel With IMSI: No. by IMSI paging channel information is derived; 
v. Export Debug Message Content As Message Name: When the Diag Packet Message when 
exporting to Debug messages were a direct hit on the news. 
4. Export: Export of state information 
i. File Name: store export data file name; 
ii. Phone: Select export terminal; 
iii. Progress: Export of progress. 
5. Function button 
i. Export: Export test data; 
ii. Close: Close the test window. 
iii. LogMask page 
Export Manger of LogMask page, showing the LogMask and export-related parameters, as shown 
in Figure 30. 
Figure 30 Export Manager—LogMask page 
Export news when empty test packet or message, can LogMask settings, export the contents of 
the filter. Message in front of each name has a check box, only selected information will be 
derived. 
2.1.1.13 Subsection of test data 
Analysis based on actual need, and sometimes we need to specify the test data for analysis to a 
specific time, specific steps are as follows: 
1, open the installation directory ZXPOS CNT6.2 under the implementation of the APT Extractor 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 45 页
WiMAX network optimization 
documents, such as C:  Program Files  ZTE ZXPOS Solution  Shared Tools  APT Extractor; 
2, double-click the file, import test data, as follows: 
3, in accordance with the regression testing time for the specified time period, click the Execute button, 
the sub-started, and save documents in the appropriate directory, as follows: 
4, the implementation is complete, that is, to preserve the successful, click Exit from the button, in 
preserving the directory to generate the test file 
Specified period of time is the test data, and then will be able to import the relevant software for 
analysis. 
2.1.1.14 Route map 
Through the use of geographic-based display can be measured in the way of clear understanding of 
when the current position and test the geographical distribution of the parameters. 
Through the main menu [View → Route Map] or click the toolbar to open the Route Map window, 
as shown in Figure 31. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 46 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 31 Geographical display windows 
Mapping on the road showing where the current location, and real-time on the importance of 
WiMAX test display geographic data. If load the base station information, it also shows that the 
base station location. 
Figure 31 shows a window divided into three parts: 
1. The top section as a tool; 
2. The left for information display list and data switch; 
3. The right mapping for the path. 
2.1.1.14.1 Toolbar introduction 
Figure 32 Route Map window toolbar 
Please refer to the function table 9, mapping the road Right-click on the shortcut menu that pops 
up also has the same function, the function refer to the basis of this table. 
Table 9 Toolbar button functions instructions 
Button Description of function corresponding shortcut 
button menu item 
Enable the mouse to the 
arrow, the current does not 
have the mandate Mouse 
features 
Arrow 
drag the map Hand 
Reduce the map Zoom Out 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 47 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Button Description of function corresponding shortcut 
button menu item 
Zoom map Zoom In 
Center Map Center 
Measuring the distance 
between two points 
Road test shows a 
complete line of Show 
Bounds 
Show Bounds 
Road test shows a 
complete line of base 
stations, as well as a 
complete map 
At present the road show 
more than the scope of the 
measuring point, the 
automatic stay 
Base layers show 
The text messages show 
the base station (PN, base 
station name) (Need to 
load the base station 
information) 
Find a station 
Layer control (see 6.1.2) 
Shows the current location 
Set display to activate the 
connection (the need for 
information into the base 
station) 
Candidate Itemsets 
shows connection (need to 
load the base station 
information) 
Marker display 
User-defined label settings 
Open the base station 
information file (*. ZRC) 
Documents into layers (*. 
Tab) 
Open Map File… 
Map parameter settings 
(see 6.1.4) 
Legend set up (see 6.1.3) Map Theme 
PN custom colors (see 8.2) 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 48 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Button Description of function corresponding shortcut 
button menu item 
Marker option 
When you click on the toolbar of the "Layer Control", "Legend Set", "PN custom color", "map 
parameters", such as button, the dialog box will pop up; see the use of the specific introduction of 
the following. 
2.1.1.14.2 Control Layer 
Map to show the way in addition to mapping, but also can display the map. Map layer is displayed 
superimposed on the Map, through the control layer can be managed on the layer. Click on the 
toolbar, the Layer Control dialog box will pop up, as shown in Figure 33. 
Figure 33 Control layer dialog box 
Box with the buttons and fields are as follows: 
1. Layers: that the current layers in the map, their order on behalf of the layers in the map of the 
order of Z-axis. IndicateUserDrawLayer, RouteTestUserDraw Layer, CellSiteLayer layers for the 
system, can not they "delete", "indicate that" the operation. 
2. Up: up to move the selected layer. 
3. Down: to move the selected layer down. 
4. Add: add a layer. In the pop-up dialog box, choose the one or more of the TAB file layer to 
join the list. 
5. Remove: delete the selected layer, layers can not be on the system for this operation. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 49 页
WiMAX network optimization 
6. Properties: the properties of modified layer options: 
i. Visible: it can be seen that the system can not make this layer; 
ii. Selectable: whether to allow the contents of the layer to select the operation; 
iii. Automatic Lables: automatic labeling of the layers, showing label information, such as 
display names, place names, such as the need to map file support; 
iv. Display: adjustment layer display options, under normal circumstances, is not recommended 
to do this; 
v. Labels: adjustment layers tab options. Tags can adjust the font, size, location and so on. 
2.1.1.14.3 Theme setting 
When the time set for the Legend, click on the toolbar, and at this time Custom Theme dialog 
box will pop up, as shown in Figure 34. 
Figure 34 Themes Settings dialog box 
The top left of an edit box that is currently editor of the Legend was the name of the bottom of 
the left has set out that the current name of a good legend. 
Current Template: Legend displays the current settings for each band of the situation, by clicking 
the color box and modify the value of edit box, you can modify the legend; 
1. Ranges: modify the current order of legend; 
2. New: create a new legend; 
3. Delete: delete the current legend; 
4. Save: Save current settings; 
5. Save As: save the current name with another legend; 
6. Check: Detection of the current Legend if there is any illegal settings; 
7. OK: the application of the current mapping legend on the road; 
8. Cancel: Cancel to close the window; 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 50 页
WiMAX network optimization 
9. Set Symbol: Legend of the current symbol set. Can choose to show in the path map symbol 
font, modify the size of symbols. As shown in Figure 35; 
Figure 35 Themes setting dialog box――SetSymbol 
10. Auto Generate Values: by setting the initial value (Initial) and the incremental value of (Delta), 
the procedure automatically generates a series of order value. The value of the first n-order size: 
Initial + n * Delta. As shown in Figure 36. 
Figure 36 Themes setting dialog box――Auto Generate Values 
2.1.1.14.4 Map parameters setting 
Click on the toolbar, and Map Options dialog box will pop up, as shown in Figure 37. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 51 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 37 Map parameters setting 
1. Set line color and adjacent areas of the label area 
i. ActSet: Set the connection settings to activate the color; 
ii. CadSet: Set the connection settings the color of the candidate; 
iii. Label PN Text: Tags for small districts to fight when the PN values showed that Area; 
iv. Label Name Text: to play on the label area, indicating the name of district; 
v. Draw Cell Site Transparent: transparent painting area, or by the district allowed the district to 
fill the color PN. 
2. Area map style settings 
i. CellRadius: Area occupied by the pixel value of the radius; 
ii. RepeaterRadius: Repeater occupied by the pixel value of the radius; 
iii. TextRadiusOffset: Cell value tag of the PN from the edge of the pixel cell value; 
iv. NB Line Width: the width of the connection area of the pixel value; 
v. CellSite Color: set the base color of the map, you can choose the type: PN, BTSID, BTS Type, 
and Transparent. 
3. Map Display Settings 
There are two types of MAP Map: Vector Map (vector map), Bitmap Map (bitmap maps, map 
data source is a picture, can be passed in the MapInfo location three ways to create). Bitmap types 
when loading a map, the map will be times when the GPS location of the position and is biased, 
can now display settings by modifying the map be amended. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 52 页
WiMAX network optimization 
i. Auto Select Map Type: whether the MAP automatically selects the type of map; 
ii. MidLon Adj: bitmap map center longitude and latitude to ad just the local map and GPS 
position location is biased, the regulation of this parameter. 
2.1.1.14.5 Custom label settings 
When measured in the way, you can add mapping road marking in order to note the need to pay 
attention to some information, such as dropped calls, the switch problem areas. Click the toolbar, a 
pop-up dialog box User Note, as shown in Figure 38. 
Figure 38 Custom label settings 
The button in the dialog box as follows: 
1. Add: Mapping the way to the edit box to add user-defined label; 
2. Cancel: Cancel. 
2.1.1.14.6 Marker parameters 
When you click on the toolbar and Marker Option dialog box will poped up, as shown in Figure 39. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 53 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 39 Marking Options settings window 
1. CallEvent 
Call each event corresponds to an icon, if the selected mapping in the way shown in the 
corresponding event icon. 
2. User Note Font 
Set user-defined label fonts. 
3. User Note Option 
i. OffsetX: mark the shift in the X-axis, in pixels; 
ii. OffsetY: tagging in the Y-axis offset, in pixels; 
iii. Show Note Icon: Mapping in the way shown on user-defined icon marked; 
iv. Show Note Text: Mapping in the way shown on user-defined label text; 
v. Marker Layer on Top: Marker layer at the top of all layers; 
vi. Show Map Scale: show scale. 
2.1.1.14.7 Find the base station 
When you need to find a base station in that location, click the toolbar, the Find Cell will pop-up 
dialog box, as shown in Figure40. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 54 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 40 Find cell windows 
1. Cell Name / BTS ID / Cell PN: To find the information input; 
2. Find Type: Select type of search, according to BTS ID, sector of the PN, the names of three 
types of sectors; 
3. Direction: Select to find a way (forward or backward); 
4. Find Next: Find the next meet of the base station; 
5. Cancel: Close this dialog box. 
2.1.1.15 Information display and switch 
Information displayed and switched, as shown in Figure 41. 
Figure 41 Information display 
This is a collapsible list, the list there are three, namely: Values (WiMAX), Information, Legend. 
The right of people to show that there is, and then folding up the current item was not carried out, 
through the click of the Mouse, that is, the right will become, at the same time, this will be carried 
out. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 55 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.1.15.1 Values (WiMAX) 
Values (WiMAX) are available for WiMAX geographical display of the number of parameters 
selected in the road on the geographical mapping display. Both tests and replay, the switch can be 
arbitrary. Values (WiMAX) were launched, as shown in Figure 42. 
Figure 42 Information display――Values (WiMAX) 
2.1.1.15.2 Information 
Infomation shows the current value of the parameter point of the test. Information was launched, as 
shown in Figure 43. 
Figure 43 Information display――Information 
2.1.1.15.3 Legend 
Legend shows the mapping of the current Road Legend, Legend was launched, as shown in 
Figure44. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 56 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 44 Information display――Legend 
The top of the "Legend: WiMAX RSSI", said the name of the current Legend is the RSSI, and the 
following legend of the bands that set. 
2.1.1.16 Drive test map 
Drive test map can show the geographical parameters of the distribution, maps, current location, as 
shown in Figure 45. 
Figure 45 Drive test map 
Mapping the road will be based on user settings for dynamic rendering of the legend, the map with 
different colors that belong to different order of value. Red circle on the map that the current position. 
If load the base station information, it also can be displayed on the map of base sation position. 
In replay mode, double-click a test point, replay position to the click-position auto-position. 
At any time, double-click of a base station, Map window with the Cell Site Info window displayed 
synchronized. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 57 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.1.17 Data test 
Data Test window used for testing data services. By choosing [View] menu under the Data Test, 
can turn Data Test window, Figure47, 48, as shown in Figure49. Data Test has three pages, 
respectively, corresponding to the following three functions: program customization, testing, and 
test statistics. 
2.1.1.17.1 Plans setting page automatic test plan 
Plans Settings page was used for the customed test plan, as shown in Figure 46. 
Figure 46 Data Test windows - Test Plan Settings page 
Plans Settings page of the meaning of various parameters are as follows: 
1. General Settings column shows the current testing program to select items of public property: 
i. Service Type: Set the type of test items, including the PPP, FTP, HTTP, Ping and the 
establishment of network connectivity Connect; 
Note: Connect-item test is not an independent type, but for the follow-up testing of automatically 
establishing a dial-up network connection, enabling users do not need to manually dial-up before 
testing in order to facilitate the implementation of the test. When to FTP, HTTP, Ping test, the 
proposed plan as the first test. 
ii. Continuous: settings are for testing; 
iii. Count: the number of repeat test set (only available non-continuous test); 
iv. Duration: the duration of the test set (only available non-continuous test); 
v. Idle Time: Set the interval between two tests of time. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 58 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2. Service Settings column shows the current testing program to select attributes of the business: 
Different types of testing operations, the business property is different, the following were 
introduced. 
i. Connect the operational attributes: 
 Entry: set up a dial-up connection network name, the right button to set the connection attribute, 
the button for new dial-up connection; 
 User Name: set up a dial-up connection user name, by the ISP service providers; 
 Password: set up a dial-up connection user name corresponds to the password; 
 Redial if Drop: chain automatically redial settings, select this if, in connection will be 
automatically dropped even. 
ii. PPP business attributes: 
PPP testing of the business the same attributes and connect. 
iii. FTP operational attributes: 
 Host: set up FTP server host address; 
 Port: set the data access port; 
 PASV: set whether or not to use passive mode to establish a connection; 
 User Name: set up FTP server login user name; 
 Password: set up FTP server login password; 
 Anonymous: registry settings are anonymous FTP servers; 
 Timeout (s): set timeout; 
 Direction: set download or upload transfer; 
 Restore: HTTP settings are; 
 Local File: Set the local file path and file name, the right button to select the file path through 
the dialog box; 
 Remote File: Set the remote FTP server file path and file name. 
iv. HTTP operational attributes: 
 URL: set up data access to the uniform resource address; 
 Direction: setting is to download or upload; 
 Timeout (s): set timeout; 
 Local File: Set the local file path and file name for the right button to select the file path through 
the dialog box. 
v. Ping operational attributes: 
 Host: set target host address; 
 Packet Size (bytes): Set the size of packets; 
 Timeout (ms): set the timeout (unit: ms); 
 Ping Times: set up for each test the number of packets sent; 
 Delay (ms): Send Ping command set up between two of the delay (unit: milliseconds). 
3. Application attributes: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 59 页
WiMAX network optimization 
i. Apply: parameters were revised effective button, click to confirm the parameters of the modified 
parameters to the test plan update; 
ii. Ignore: parameters were revised effective button, click to give up the parameter changes. 
4. Plans to list the right: 
List in the plan to show the current test plan document, all tests, the current testing of the selected 
parameters will be displayed in the left and allow them to amend. Before each test item has a check 
box, only the selected item will be to take these tests. Drag can be adjusted test of the order of 
testing. List the meaning of each field please refer to the General Settings page on the description 
column. 
Toolbar button: 
: a new test plan; 
: Open the test plan; 
: Save test plans; 
: Export test plans; 
: the addition of a test plan; 
: Delete the currently selected test program. 
5. Test 
i. Start Test button: only-to-end testing and the procedures to enter the record mode when 
effective. Click Start Test, Call Monitor will be set up by the Program for testing. 
ii. End Test button: only the beginning of the test before it becomes binding, click End Test, to 
stop the ongoing test. 
2.1.1.17.2 Message Test page news shows 
Message log messages, including a list of test and test the progress of the two parts of the list, as 
shown in Figure47. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 60 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 47 Data Test window - Test page news 
1. News List 
Data services in the state of the testing process to the form of log messages displayed in the 
message list. Log messages of different operations in different colors, in which PPP is green, FTP 
and HTTP message to blue, Ping message to dark blue, dropped calls; connection failure error 
message is red. 
i. ID: said information sequence; 
ii. Date Time: Time that the information generated; 
iii. Message: message specific. 
2. List progress 
Table shows the progress of the plan to participate in the current test item and test progress. 
i. ID: the number of test plan, test plan and a list of selected items of the corresponding plans; 
ii. Service Type: the service type of test items; 
iii. Count (Current / Assigned): tests (the first number of the current / plan to designate the number 
of repeat); 
iv. Duration (Current / Assigned): the test duration (the duration of the current testing / plans to 
designate the duration of each test); 
v. Status: the current state of the test items, including the waiting, running, error, cancel, the 
completion of five possible state. 
3. Right menu list message: 
i. Pause: news updates suspended; 
ii. Clear All Messages: Clear all messages; 
iii. To Replay Position: replay when effective, will select the corresponding point in time 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 61 页
WiMAX network optimization 
information added to the replay tab, and from this point in time to start replay. 
2.1.1.17.3 Throughput shows the throughput of the page 
Throughput page can shows graphics of the throughput, and data transmission status, statistical 
information, as shown in Figure 48. 
Figure 48 Data Test window-data throughput of the page 
1. Graphics throughput 
Curves of different colors to show the FWD PPP (the downlink PPP throughput), REV PPP (the 
uplink PPP throughput), FWD FTP (the downlink FTP throughput), REV FTP (the uplink FTP 
throughput), FWD HTTP (the downlink HTTP throughput), REV HTTP (the uplink HTTP 
throughput). 
2. Right menu graphics throughput 
i. Update 500ms: graphics refresh rate to 500ms; 
ii. Update 1000ms: graphics refresh rate to 1000ms; 
iii. Update 1500ms: graphics refresh rate to 1500ms; 
iv. Show In Kbytes: that the throughput in Kbytes selected for display, or to be displayed in units 
of Kbps; 
v. Option: color and line throughput curve settings. 
3. Transmit information tables: 
i. Service: the current transmission, FTP or HTTP; 
ii. State: the current state of transmission; 
iii. Total Size: the current test to the total data transfer size; 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 62 页
WiMAX network optimization 
iv. Completed: the size of the current has been completed; 
v. Direction: From the current transmission to or download; 
vi. Progress: The progress is expressed as a percentage; 
vii. Load Time: transmission time; 
viii. Avg Throughput: average transfer rate, units of Kbps (equivalent to the value of the total data 
transfer size / transfer of the total time, while the curve shown for the instantaneous transmission 
throughput). 
4. PPP calls and transfer tables: 
i. Sent: The number of bytes sent to connect; 
ii. Received: Received bytes in one time connection; 
iii. Band Width: The current bandwidth connections; 
iv. Duration: The time of connection has been going on; 
v. Call Count: The numbers of the current test call; 
vi. Success Count: the success of the current number of test calls; 
vii. Fail Count: the failure of the current number of test calls; 
viii. Drop Count: The number of the current test dropped. 
2.1.1.17.4 Statistics show page 
Figure 49 Data Test window-statistic page 
1. Ping packets statistic 
i. ID:sequence number; 
ii. Host: target host address; 
iii. Sent: sent data packets; 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 63 页
WiMAX network optimization 
iv. Received: receive data packets; 
v. Lost: lost data packets; 
vi. MinimumRTT: mimimum receive and send time; 
vii. MaximumRTT: maximum receive and send time; 
viii. AverageRTT: averages receive and send time. 
2. PPP connect statistic 
i. ID:sequence number; 
ii. Dial Begin Time: dial begin Time; 
iii. Dial End Time: dial end Time; 
iv. Setup Time: setup time. 
2.1.1.18 Data Monitor 
Data Monitor to monitor IP, TCP, UDP traffic, as well as the acquisition PPP signaling, ICMP 
packets. Apart from Data Monitor and Data Service Test can be used, but also can be arbitrary based 
on the TCP / IP protocol software or network of commercial streaming media player software, such 
as IPERF, Flash Get, Net Ant, Cute FTP, Internet Explorer, Bitcomet, Real Player, Media Player, 
eMule, etc.. 
By choosing [View] menu under the Data Monitor, can activate the Data Monitor window, as 
shown in Figure 50. 
Figure 50 Data Monitor windows 
Window on the meaning of each parameter is as follows: 
i. FWD IP: prior to the IP total number of bytes to receive; 
ii. REV IP: Reverse IP total number of bytes sent; 
iii. FWD TCP: prior to the TCP receive a total number of bytes; 
iv. REV TCP: Reverse TCP total number of bytes sent; 
v. FWD UDP: Forward UDP total number of bytes to receive; 
vi. REV UDP: Reverse UDP total number of bytes sent; 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 64 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Data Monitor window provides two control buttons below: 
i. Monitor Start: Start Monitor Driver, now can begin to monitor the TCP, UDP, IP layer, and the 
acquisition PPP signaling, ICMP packet; 
ii. Monitor Stop: stop the Monitor Driver. 
Data Monitor to start moving, the status bar icon (gray) will be reduced to a (blue), click on the 
icon could be released also Data Monitor window. Configure Logging Mask through the Logging 
Mask settings, can be more convenient to start the Data Monitor. 
Data Monitor collected PPP signaling and ICMP packets, you can Diag Packet Message, as well 
as in Diag Packet Message Summary observation. Flow information can be in the Data Throughput 
or WiMAXView → Data Throughput in the observation. 
2.1.1.19 WiMAX Logon Tool 
WiMAX Logon Tool window shows the landing interface WiMAX terminal 
Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Logon Too] can open WiMAX Logon 
tool window, as shown in Figure51. 
Figure 51 WiMAX system landing interface 
2.1.1.20 WiMAX Logon Tool 
WiMAX basic information display RSSI, CINR, TxPower, personnel and other information. 
Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX basic information] can open the 
window WiMAX basic information, as shown in Figure 52. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 65 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 52 WiMAX basic information 
Specific meaning of each field is as follows: 
field description 
RSSI received signal strength index 
CINR carrier / interference and noise ratio 
TxPower Transmitting power 
Per packet error rate 
2.1.1.21 WiMAX Communication Info 
WiMAX Communication Info display BS Mac Adress,UL Perm Base, DL Perm Base ,Current 
Preamble Index,Previous Preamble Index, Hand Over Cout,Hand Over Fail Cout,Resynchronize 
Cout, PER Receive Cout, PER Error Cout etc. 
Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Communication Info] can open 
WiMAX Basic Info window, as shown in Figure53. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 66 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 53 WiMAX basic information 
Specific meaning of each field is as follows: 
Table 10 WiMAX basic information 
field description 
BS Mac Address Base Station Mac Address 
UL Perm Base Perm Base uplink 
DL Perm Base Perm Base downlink 
Current Preamble 
Index 
Preamble sequence current 
Previous Preamble 
Index 
Preamble previous sequence 
Hand Over Count Hand over times 
Hand Over Fail 
Count 
Hand over fail times 
Resynchronize 
Count 
The number of re-synchronization 
PER Receive Count The number of error packets received 
PER Error Count The number of error packets 
2.1.1.22 WiMAX Air Interface Message 
Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Air Interface Message] can open 
WiMAX Air Interface Message window. As shown in Figure54. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 67 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 54 WiMAX air interface message 
2.1.1.23 WiMAX Modulation Statistics 
Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Modulation Statistics] can open the 
window WiMAX Modulation Statistics. As shown in Figure55. 
Figure 55 WiMAX various adjustments of the data encoding 
2.1.1.24 WiMAX Date Throughput 
WiMAX Date Throughput received MS window to line up and down the TCP / IP and UDP data 
throughput. 
Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Date Throughput] can open the 
window WiMAX Date Throughput. Horizontal axis is time; vertical axis is the throughput, unit 
Kbps / Kbytes, different colors representing different data types, as shown in Figure 56. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 68 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 56 WiMAXView window-data throughput page 
1. Graphics throughput 
Curves of different colors to show the FWD IP (Downlink IP throughput), REV IP (uplink IP 
throughput), FWD TCP (downlink TCP throughput), REV TCP (uplink TCP throughput), FWD 
UDP (Downlink UDP throughput), REV UDP (uplink UDP throughput). 
2. Right menu graphics throughput 
i. Update 500ms: graphics refresh rate to 500ms; 
ii. Update 1000ms: graphics refresh rate to 1000ms; 
iii. Update 1500ms: graphics refresh rate to 1500ms; 
iv. Show In Kbytes: that the throughput in Kbytes selected for display, or to be displayed in units of 
Kbps; 
v. Option: color and line throughput curve settings. 
2.1.2 Optimization analysis tool CNA introduction 
2.1.2.1 Introduction 
CNA 7.5 is targeted at WiMAX standard way to measure the development of analysis software, this 
version supports the CAN in addition to the basic analysis, the new WiMAX high-level of analysis, 
and this article is for WiMAX to provide detailed analysis of the new features and operating 
instructions, aspects of the user's operation. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 69 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.2.2 Terms, definitions and abbreviations 
Abbreviations used in this article dedicated table 11. Abbreviations have been the first one 
according to their alphabetical order. 
Table 11 Specific abbreviations 
abbreviations original text meaning 
CNA Communication Network Analyzer Network Analyzer tool 
CNT Communication Network Test Network Test tool 
2.1.2.3 Comprehensive description 
2.1.2.3.1 Background 
ZXPOS CNA1 is 2G/3G wireless network optimization software for professional analysis. It is 
based on future test data, performance data background, base stations, GIS and other information, 
using charts, geography, and replay, such as intelligence analysis of wireless network performance, 
network optimization guidance. 
2.1.2.3.2 Product Overview 
CNA1 not previously support the WiMAX standard, CNA1 for WiMAX is a new version, the 
version with the most basic functions of CNA at the same time add WiMAX analysis. This version 
supports the CNT V6.3 and V6.5 versions of the APT test data in support of GCT, Beceem, and 
Sequence of three-chip data acquisition. 
This version features support the following sub - 
1, CNA basic analysis functions; 
2, physical layer, IP layer, application layer bandwidth analysis; 
3, interference analysis; 
4, delay, jitter, packet loss rate analysis 
2.1.2.4 Specific functions description 
2.1.2.4.1 Basic function analysis 
CNA has the light version of the basic functions, including: 
1. Data file management (load, Consolidation) 
2. Site information documents management 
3. The basic analysis functions 
i. Geographical analysis (including statistical BIN) 
ii. Spreadsheet analysis 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 70 页
WiMAX network optimization 
iii. Chart Analysis 
iv. Message Analysis 
v. Data delete functions (internal function) 
4. Data broadcast 
5. Data query and filtering. 
2.1.2.4.2 Segment'RSSI and Segment'CINR functions 
Base stations based on the RSSI and CINR functions displayed on the map in the Map of the 
designated base station RSSI and CINR, the concrete operation is as follows: 
1. Open the Map form 
2. Map map Preamble and input Frequency (KHZ) value and click on GO, the map will show the 
corresponding base station RSSI, CINR value. 
3. Map by right-clicking directly on the base map can also show that the corresponding base 
station RSSI, CINR value (click on the following map is 0_2515000). 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 71 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.2.4.3 Call event analysis and delay statistics 
Open the Analysis-> WiMAX Call Analysis ....... 
Analysis of interface, including a summary description of the specific circumstances of each call. 
2.1.2.4.4 Analysis of handover events 
Open the Analysis-> WiMAX Handoff Analysis ......., 
Analysis of the interface is as follows: 
Through using right key menu can locate the corresponding handover event. 
2.1.2.4.5 Interference Analysis 
Interference algorithm is as follows: 
Interfere with the results of the analysis corresponds to the NI field WorkSpace. 
2.1.2.4.6 Analysis of dropped calls 
Open the Analysis-> WiMAX Dropped Analysis....... 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 72 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.2.4.7 Calls, handover of the incident shows the geographical 
Open Map; select the Marker Setting, configuration WiMAX events have shown that: 
2.1.2.4.8 Jitter Analysis of packet loss rate 
This version of the new data services in an increase of TCP / UDP support, TCP / UDP is used to 
test TCP or UDP layer jitter, packet loss rate, bandwidth parameters. 
The two new add table of CAN (TCP UDP Transfer Staics and Jitter Lost Rate) support for TCP / 
UDP test results indicate as following: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 73 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1.2.4.9 Table part of the meaning of Item Value 
1. WiMAX Table Table 
i.Link Status 
That the current link state: 
value significance 
1 LINKUP_ACHIEVED 
2 PHY_SYNC_ERROR 
3 MAC_SYNC_ERROR 
4 RNGING_FAILURE 
5 SBC_FAILURE 
6 PKM_FAILURE 
7 REGISTRATION_FAILURE 
8 DREG_RECEIVED 
9 RESET_RECEIVE 
10 IN_IDLE_MODE 
11 IN_SLEEP_MODE 
12 NETWORK_ENTRY_IN_PROGRESS 
13 WAIT_FOR_NETWORK_ENTRY_CMD 
14 WAIT_FOR_PHY_SYNC_CMD 
15 CARD_MOVED 
16 CARD_INSERT 
17 SHUT_DOWN_RECEIVED 
ii.UpLink Througput and DownLink Througput 
Uplink and downlink throughput, unit Kpbs. 
2. TCP / UDP Transfer Static Table 
i. TCP / UDP 
Agreement test, 1: TCP 2: UDP 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 74 页
WiMAX network optimization 
ii. Direction 
Operational direction of the test, 0: Download 1: From 
iii. State 
The current state of business connections, 0: Unknown Status 1: Connect 2: off 3: Transmission. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 75 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.2 Optimize Test 
2.2.1 Test Content 
Network optimizing include test and parameter optimizing, test can provide basic data and validate for 
optimizing. 
The primary testing item includes coverage and system pointer principle, ect. 
Test should use the way which was recommend, and it also can change the operation type and test 
environment by following business and locale’s required. 
About loading explanation: 
WiMAX adopt AMC techniques, so come to speak from rate of flow single station’s flow is not the 
fixed value, but interpose certain slot numerical value is fixed, WiMAX air-interface resource can be 
unified quantum with SLOT numerical value. If loading, we can make use of fixed position to force to 
carry out the high order code way to do simulate loading. 
2.2.1.1 Cover Test 
Describe the index covering include: DL RSSI, DL CINR and UL RSSI, UL CINR. 
Think about DL RSSI and CINR is preamble value, it only be effected by rated power, and UL RSSI 
and CINR were effected by power control deploy and operation, so generally we can know about 
the network’s cover condition through DL RSSI and CINR test. Collecting UL Tx, UL and DL 
throughout and other data at the same time can describe network’s cover condition. 
Make use of BE business stream to do test. 
Suggesting do test by carry idler. 
Make use of moving test as testing method. 
2.2.1.2 Throughout Test 
Testing include single user test and single segment. 
Working Ping, Iperf, FTP, be in progress counting. 
Think about make use of BE to do test; adopting method continuing testing way. 
2.2.1.3 Cut-over Test 
Describe the index that cut-over in test include cut-over in success rate, cut-over time ( the time 
from initiate cut-over to gain IP). 
Think about UGS’s high preferential step, adopting UGS business stream to do test. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 76 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Suggesting make half carry test. 
Making use of cyclicity test method. 
Making moving and fixed position test. 
2.2.1.4 Calling Test 
Describe the index that calling in test include calling in success rate, calling time ( the time from 
initiate calling to gain IP). 
Think about UGS’s high preferential step, adopting UGS business stream to do test. 
Suggesting make half carry test. 
Making use of cyclicity testing method. 
Making moving and fixed position test. 
2.2.1.5 Operation Test 
Describe the index that operation in test includes time delay and jitter. 
Working PING is in progress counting. 
Think about UGS user in testing. 
Suggesting do test by carry idler. 
Making use of continuing test way. 
Do moving and fixed test. 
When doing moving test, paying attention with the throughout of whole covered area, and the rate 
at area’s edge. 
When doing fixed test, paying attention with different signal intensity, cover rate of MCS should 
correspondence. 
2.2.1.6 Handoff 
Success rate/handoff time 
Think about UGS testing. We make use of continuing testing method. 
Moving test 
2.2.1.7 Lose Words Rate 
Active ( IP ) connecting link is rupture.Active(IP)take off net check function open. 
Because the lose words rate test generally beginning with cover test, think about making use of BE 
to do test. 
Making use of continuing test way. 
Do moving test. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 77 页
WiMAX network optimization 
In generally, making use of testing by carry idler is OK, if customer order to do loading test, we 
usually make use of fifty percent, closing loading way to load or other ways to load. 
2.2.2 Testing Method 
2.2.2.1 DT Testing 
The detail of testing method should refer to DT testing guides book. 
2.2.2.2 CQT Testing 
The detail of testing method should refer to CQT testing guide book. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 78 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.3 RF Optimizing Subject 
2.3.1 RF Optimizing Goal 
RF optimization goal is making the cover signal be optimization, considering the balance of the uplink 
and downlink broadcast path, the test parameter of cover optimization primary is DL RSSI and DL CINR. 
Do optimization can through modulate antenna and transmit power. 
RSSI this parameter is the most important index for test covering, through the transmit power we can 
work out actual link loss. RSSI is the important reference for regulate rated power. Because of the 
segment’s RSSI increasing maybe cause jamming with other neighbor segment, logical RSSI should be 
whole general considered with cover to select.RSSI. 
CINR this parameter can combine with RSSI, and then we can evaluate DL jamming and yawp. It is 
the most important reference parameter for jamming optimization. If the CINR value is bigger, the system’s 
cover will be better. 
2.3.2 Antenna Optimization 
Antenna optimization, it generally following the locale’s terrain and things, through regulating 
antenna’s direction and down obliquity to reach optimize RF cover goal. The specific method is primary 
follow the testing cover chart regulating antenn. If necessary, we can change the antenna height or building 
position, making use of the electricity down obliquity and other ways. 
2.3.3 Calibration Power Optimizing 
Calibration power set up preamble power, Calibration power optimizing ensure the system could 
working in credible working area; in the same time, under the antenna cover was affirmed situation, the 
Calibration power’s value, is the first factor which can effect cover. 
If Calibration power is great, this area will have good cover situation, but it maybe disturb neighbor area, so 
Calibration power should be reasonable installed, default situation will install power by programming 
power, and then according to the test situation do regulating. 
Calibration power’s installing refer to <Calibration Power Guide> 
2.3.4 Interference’s Searching and Frequency Scanning 
In actual network, there may being several kinds of disturbing, so must remove outside jamming first, 
and then doing system parameter optimizing. 
The direct method of finding out interference is frequency scanning. 
The specific method refers to 3.3 frequencies scanning. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 79 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.4 Access and Paging 
In order to optimize net, it is mandatory to know the basic net connection and page procedure, the 
rough introduction is below. 
2.4.1 Basic connection flow 
2.4.1.1 Connection flow chart 
Figure 57 Connection flow chart 
2.4.1.2 Small area option and downlink synchronization 
At the initial phase or after signal lost, the terminal will get the downlink signal channel. If the 
terminal stores the last operational parameter, then it should try to regain the recorded downlink 
signal channel firstly. If failed, then it starts to scan the possible downlink signal channel 
continuously within downlink until it finds an effective downlink signal. As long as physicalal level 
gets synchronization (), MAC level manages to get the control parameter of downlink signal 
channel and then the control parameter of uplink signal channel. 
The downlink physicalal synchronization for WiMAX system depends on Preamble. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 80 页
WiMAX network optimization 
MAC level will search for DL-MAP MAC management information. As long as terminal receives 
at least one DL-MAP information, it will get MAC synchronization. 
After downlink synchronization, the terminal waits for UCD information from base station, in 
order to get the parameter group from uplink signal channel. 
Main information: DCD and UCD 
2.4.1.2.1 OMC parameters chart below 
Table 12 OMC Physicalal Layer Parameter 
SN Parameter Meaning Instruction 
PHY_MODE PHY Layer 
Mode 
802.16 Protocol dedines kinds of PHY layer working 
mode: SC、OFDM、OFDMA,ZTE-WiMAX system 
uses OFDMA. 
DL_FREQUENCY Downlink 
Frequency 
Unit: kHz 
ChannelBW Physicalal 
Channel 
Bandwidth 
Values: 5M, 10M, etc 
FFT_SIZE Points of 
Fast Fourier 
Transform 
Scalable FFT is used for PHY layer of OFDMA, 
FFT is adding when PHY channel bandwidth is 
increasing. PHY channel bandwidth can be 
1.25MHz 、5MHz 、10MHz 、20MHz, which 
corresponding to 128、512、1024、2048 in FFT. 
CYCLE_PREFIX Cyclic Prefix Time domain waveform of OFDMA symbol is 
generated by IFFT. Time structure of each symbol 
consists of two parts: usefull symbol time Tb and 
Cyclic Prefix(CP)。 
FRAME_DUR_CODE Frame 
Length 
It represents the length of a frame, which is defined 
as the interval time between beginnings of 
preambles. 
DUPLEX_MODE Duplex Including two methods: Time Division Duplex 
(TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD). 
TTG Emmission 
Transform 
Time 
It represents the transforming interval between 
downlink subframe and uplink subframe when 
OFDMA works in TDD mode. The BS change into 
receiving from emitting. 
UL_INIT_TX_TIMING Uplink Initial 
Emmision 
Deviation 
It represents how long the uplink initial emission 
before UL_Allocation_Start_Time. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 81 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.4.1.2.2 Physicalal Layer Parameter OMC Configuration 
Figure 58 Physicalal Layer Parameter OMC Configurations 
Remark: the conversion between PS and us, PS=4/Fs in OFDMA, for example as 10M 
bandwidth (sampling frequency=11.2M ), PS=4/Fs=4/11.2M, approximate at 0.357us. 
2.4.1.3 Ranging 
The main purpose of Ranging is for uplink synchronization and uplink power control. 
As for uplink synchronization, it requires the uplink signal from different distance and different 
customers’ terminal can reach base station at the same time. 
The main reasons of uplink nonsynchronization of mobile telecommunication are due to multiple 
customers’ interference and multi-channel transmission. 
In addition, Ranging is also divided into period Ranging, BW requesting Ranging, handover 
Ranging. 
Main information: Ranging-REQ and Ranging-REQ. 
2.4.1.3.1 Ranging parameters 
Ranging parameter table is as below. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 82 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Table 13 Ranging parameter introduction 
Parameter Meaning Instruction 
RNG_CO 
DES_ST 
ART 
The initial 
number of 
Ranging 
In same frequency organized network, if the channel configuration of BS in a 
cell is same as the channel configuration of BS in another cell (including the 
sameness of channel and UL_PermBase), the Ranging code transmitted by 
MS will be received by BS in adjacent cell, these BSs would feedback 
RNG-RSP to the MS, this causes interference and affect access. In this 
circumstance, different Ranging code number is necessary to be configured 
for BSs in adjacent cell. 
INIT_RN 
G_CODE 
S 
The quantity of 
initial Ranging 
code 
Base on the initial number of Ranging code and the initial quantity of 
Ranging code, the interval of Ranging code can be obtained as S ~ (S + O) 
mod 256, where ‘S’ stands for the number of Ranging code 
(RNG_CODES_START); ‘O’ stands for the quantity of Ranging code 
(INIT_RNG_CODES). 
PRDC_R 
NG_CO 
DES 
The quantity of 
Cycle Ranging 
code 
Cycle Ranging code is located behind initial Ranging code. Its interval can 
be obtained according to the initial number of Ranging, the quantity of initial 
Ranging code and the quantity of Cycle Ranging code. 
BW_RE 
Q_CODE 
S 
The quantity of 
bandwidth 
request Ranging 
code 
The bandwidth request Ranging code is located behind the cycle Ranging 
code. Its interval can be obtained according to the initial number of Ranging, 
the quantity of initial Ranging code, the quantity of cycle Ranging code and 
the quantity of bandwidth request Ranging code. 
HO_RN 
G_CODE 
S 
The quantity of 
handoff 
Ranging code 
The handoff Ranging code is located behind the bandwidth request Ranging 
code. Its interval can be obtained according to the initial number of Ranging, 
the quantity of initial Ranging code, the quantity of cycle Ranging code, the 
quantity of bandwidth request Ranging code and the quantity of handoff 
Ranging code.` 
INIT_RN 
G_BKO_ 
START 
Ther size of 
initial Ranging 
backhaul 
window 
For the initial Ranging, if MS does not receive RNG-RSP within the time of 
T3, it means the competition is failed, MS will enlarge the backhaul window 
doubled and compete again. 
2.4.1.3.2 Ranging OMC parameter configuration 
Ranging parameter configuration is as below. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 83 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 59 Ranging OMC parameter configurations 
2.4.1.4 SBC negotiation ability 
SBC ability contain a few physicalal layer parameters, duplex mode, security ability, such as 
modulation code ability,CINR measure ablity, power control support,PKM version, authorization 
policy support. 
Main message: SBC-REQ and SBC-REP 
2.4.1.4.1 SBC parameters 
SBC parameters table is as below. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 84 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Table 14 SBC parameters introduction 
SN Parameter Meaning Instruction 
OFDMA_MS 
_FFT_SIZES 
FFT supporting ability 2048 
128 
512 
1024 
OFDMA_MS_MO 
D 
Supporting ability of 
uplink modulation 
64-QAM 
BTC 
CTC (√ default) 
STC 
HARQ chase 
CTC_IR 
CC_IR 
LDPC 
OFDMA_MS_DE 
MOD 
Supporting ability of 
downlink modulation 
STC 
CC with optional interleaver 
HARQ Chase 
HARQ CTC_IR 
Reserved 0 
HARQ CC IR 
LDPC 
Dedicated pilots 
OFDMA_PERM_ 
SUPP 
Permutation 
supporting ability 
Optional PUSC 
Optional FUSC 
AMC 1x6 
AMC 2x3 
AMC 3x2 
AMC with HARQ map 
TUSC1 
TUSC2 
OFDMA_MA 
P_CAPA 
OFDMA MAP 
supporting ability 
HARQ MAP 
Extended HARQ IE 
Sub MAP for first zone 
Sub MAP for other zones 
DL region definition 
PACKING_SUPP Packing supporting 
ability 
EXTENSION_CA 
PA 
Support extension title 
or not 
MAC_HEAD_SH 
EAD_SUPP 
Which types of MAC 
title and extension is 
supported 
2.4.1.4.2 SBC OMC parameters configuration 
SBC parameters configuration is as below. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 85 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 60 SBC parameters configuration-1 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 86 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 61 SBC parameters configuration-2 
2.4.1.5 Coding and authorization 
Exam the terminals legality, including equipment authorization and customers authorization 
The options of coding data methods 
Main message: -REQ and -REP 
2.4.1.5.1 OMC parameters configuration 
Parameters configuration of Coding and authorization is as below. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 87 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 62 Parameters configuration of Coding and authorization 
2.4.1.6 REG ability negotiation 
Registration is process that terminal is allowed to get access to web and the terminal receives the 
second CID. 
In order to register in base station, terminals send REG-REQ information to base station and base 
station responds based on this information. The terminal in REG-REQ information includes IP 
version parameters indicating that it supports IP version in the second CID. Registration is mainly 
the negotiation process of MAC level ability, negotiation including: sorting ability, CID&SAID 
updating, PHS ability, ARQ ability, switching support. 
2.4.1.7 Service flow setup 
Service flow function is to guarantee Qos, a service flow represents a set of Qos parameters. 
Service flow mechanism offers the support of signal flow control, including setup, delete and 
modify. 
Service data is composed of two physicalal connections from MS to AGW transmission channel: 
MS and BS transport connection, BS and AGW data path. 
Every service flow corresponds with 32 digits SFID. 
The chart of service flow setup as below. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 88 页
WiMAX network optimization 
MS BS ASN-GW AAA 
CS能力协商(空口登记)完成 
RR-Request 
DSA-REQ 
DSA-RSP 
RR-Response 
Data Path Registration Request 
Data Path Registration Response 
Data Path Registration Ack 
Access Accept 
DSA-Ack 
重复RR和DP步骤,完成所有预备业务流通道建立 
Figure 63 Chart of service flow setup 
2.4.1.8 Obtaining IP 
After setting up the service flow signal channel, AAA will allocate IP address by DHCP. 
2.4.2 Idle Idle model and paging flow 
2.4.2.1 The function of idle model 
MS is allowed to receive DL public service information in cycle in the case that MS doesn’t 
register to BS. 
For MS, it is exempt from the requirement of immediate HO and normal execution. 
The restriction of Ms scanning in certain distance makes MS save power and resource. 
For web and BS, it provides a simply way to remind MS about the arrival of downlink service and 
meanwhile reduces the services of air connection and web switch in the case of non-active MS, 
simply speaking, it helps to save electricity. 
Terminal acts as the main flow of web and setup new service connection 
Date is sent to terminal by the new connection. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 89 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.4.2.2 Paging chart 
Figure 64 Paging chart 
2.4.2.3 Entering idle flow chart 
When no data transmit on MS, BS get in idle state triggered by DREG-CMD, or MS lanch through 
DREG-REQ. BS extract the resource distributed to terminals, and the connections are extracted as 
well. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 90 页
WiMAX network optimization 
MS BS AGW 
DREG_REQ 
IMEntry MS State Change Request 
IMEntry_MS State Change Rsponse 
Data Path De-Reg Req 
Data Path De-Reg Rsp 
DREG_CMD 
Data Path De-Reg Ack 
MS发起的进入IDLE模式 
Figure 65 Entering idle flow chart 
2.4.2.4 Location update 
MS need to update the location when paging between groups in idle mode. 
MSS BS 
(a) RNG-REQ 
ASN-GW(Anchor PC/LR) 
(b) LU Request 
(c) LU Response 
(d) RNG_RSP 
(e) LU Confirm 
Figure 66 Location update flow chart 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 91 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.4.2.5 Paging flow 
When the net side need to send out data, paging control unit send paging broadcast which paging 
terminal. 
MSS BS 
AGW(Anchor PC) AGW(Anchor DPF/FA) 
(a) DownLink Data From HA 
(b) Initate Paging Request 
(c) Initate Paging Response 
(d) MS Paging Announce 
(e) BS Broadcast Page Messages 
Figure 67 Paging flow chart 
2.4.2.6 Exit idel state flow 
Flow of Terminal re-accesses net, setup new service connection. Data send to terminal using the 
new connection. 
MS BS 
RNG-REQ 
IMExit MS State Change Request 
IMExit MS State Change Response 
Data Path Registration Request 
Data Path Registration Response 
重入网络,可能协商鉴权能力,可能鉴权,可能重登记 
Data Path Registration Ack 
PCID HMAC/CMAC 
RNG-RSP 
AGW 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 92 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 68 Exit Idle flow chart 
2.4.2.6.1 OMC parameters configuration 
Figure 69 Pagegroup OMC parameters configuration 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 93 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.5 Handover Technology 
2.5.1 Handover types 
Handover includes 3 types: HHO (Hard Handover), FBSS (Fast BS Swtiching), MDHO (Macro 
Diversity Handover). 
2.5.1.1 Hard Handover (HHO) 
The process in which an MS migrates from the air-interface provided by the Serving BS to a 
target BS.Under this type, MS only keep communicating with Serving BS. Between Serving 
BS and Target BS, they can have the same frequency or different, but can’t share the MAC 
information. 
2.5.1.2 Fast BS Switching (FBSS) 
The process in which an MS migrates from the air-interface provided by the Serving BS to 
an active BS. Under this type, MS can only communicate with Serving BS, but can keep 
synchronization and setting up link resource, so it can be switch to another Active BS very 
quickly, between different Active BS, they must have the same frequency and share some MAC 
information. 
2.5.1.3 Macro Diversity Handover(MDHO) 
The process in which an MS migrates from the air-interface provided by one or more BSs to the 
air-interface provided by other one or more BSs. Under this type, MS keep communicating 
with one or more BSs, every BS is MS’s serving BS. This process is accomplished by BSs 
transmitting the same MAC/PHY message to MS such that diversity combining can be 
performed by the mobile station (MS) 
2.5.2 HHO workflow 
At present, our system support HHO, the workflow chart as follows: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 94 页
WiMAX network optimization 
MS SBS TBSn AGW(HO+DP) 
AGW(Auth 
enticator) 
4 R6 _H O _Re q(MS Info) 
5 R6_HO_Req 
6 R6_AK_Context_Req 
7 R6_AK_Transfer(AK,AKID,AKLifetime,AKSN) 
8 R6_Path_Pre_RegReq 
9 R6_Path_Pre_RegRsp 
10 R6_HO_Response 
1 MOB_NBR_ADV 
2 Association with neighbor BS 
3 MOB_MSHO_REQ 
(MSID,target BS list) 
1 2 M OB_BSH O_RSP 
(rec omme nded 
BS=BTSx,n ew CID) 
13 Externed_SN_Subheader 
14 MOB_HO_IND 
(HO_IND_TYPE) 
11 R6 _H O_R espo ns e 
1 5 R6 _ HO_Co n fir m 
17 RNG_REQ 
18 R N G _ R S P 
19 SBC_REQ 
20 SBC_ R SP 
21 REG_REQ 
22 REG_RSP 
23 SN_Report 
16 R6_HO_Confirm 
24)R6_Path_Reg_Req 
25)R6_Path_Reg_Rsp 
26)R6_HO_Complete 
27)R6_HO_Complete 
2 8 )R6 _Path _DR e g_Re q 
2 9)R6 _ Pat h _DR e g_RS P 
Figure 70 Workflow chart of HHO 
2.5.3 The related parameters configure of HO 
The three related HO parameters configure pages in OMC: HO, Neighbor, Trigger 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 95 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.5.3.1 HO configure page 
Figure 71 HO page configure 
2.5.3.2 HO parameter instruction 
HO Type Support: choose HO 
Handoff supported by BS and MSS: choose 0 
HO trigger metric support: CINR 
At present, these three items can be chosed as above. 
System resource retain time:used to describe the time length of resource retain timer. 
HO process optimization MS timer: mainly used as the timer when MS is 
waiting the next MAC message during the new access in optimizated HO. 
MS handover retransmissions timer: if MS still doesn’t receive HORSP after the time lenth of 
timer since it has sent HOREQ to BS, it will retransmit HOREQ. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 96 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Handover indication readiness timer: used to allocate a time for MS to have an opportunity to 
transmitting uplink HOIND forwardly. 
MS HO connections parameters processing timer: define the max time for MS to deal the 
connecting information carried by RNGRSP and REG_RSP, need to debug and confirm with all 
terminials. 
MS HO TEK processing time: define the max time for MS to delal the related information of TEK, 
need to debug and confirm with all terminals. 
Threshold used by the MS to add a neighbor BS: under FBSS/MDHO types, when neighbor BS 
CINR bigger than this threshold, it can be added to available diversity. 
Threshold used by the MS to drop a BS: under FBSS/MDHO types, when neighbour BS CINR less 
than this threshold, it will be deleted from available diversity. 
The slot length of anchor switch report: under MDHO/FBSS types, ASR is a long measure for time, 
its unit is frame number. 
The switch period of anchor switch report: under MDHO/FBSS types, its unit is ASR. 
Hysteresis margin: when target BS CINR 3db bigger than serving BS, permit MS handover. 
Time-to-trigger duration: it needs to keep a long time for MS send HO request since BS satisfies 
above Hysteresis margin, the length of this time is the value of Hysteresis margin, unit is ms. 
FBSS weight: no need to modify 
SSHO weight: no need to modify 
HHO weight: no need to modify 
Inter-frequency scan threshold: used for BS to trigger scan, when BS detects MS uplink CINR 
lower than this value, MS begins to Inter-frequency scan. 
Scan duration: one scan lasts time, unit: frame. 
Scan interval: the time between two scans, during this time, it communicates normally. 
Scan report period: configure MS scan report period, it’s configured in trigger page whether it 
needs scan report period. 
Scan report metric: decide its report is CINR or RSSI, 1 means CINR. 
Association type support: BS support association type, 1 means scan without association, at 
present our suggestion is 1. 
2.5.3.3 Neighbor configure page 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 97 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 72 OMC Neighbor configure 
2.5.3.4 Neighbor parameters explan 
Neighbor configure is based on the actual WiMAX plan result. 
When it’s 1/3 , FA configuration indictor is Same,different frequency network is not same. 
If connect to GPS, the frequency synchronization should be configured as synchronizing, this is 
always used in synchronizing handoff. 
Else it should be configured as asynchronizing. This is always used in asynchronizing handoff. 
When the serving BS and neighbor neither have the same time source nor time is synchronized, 
you need to configure no synchronization. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 98 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.5.3.5 Trigger configure 
First, trigger is usally used in different frequency HO, when it’s same frequency, needn’t to 
configure trigger. 
Figure 73 OMC Trigger configure 
2.5.3.6 Trigger parameter instruction 
Trigger metric type:CINR or RSSI 
Trigger function: trigger condition 
Trigger action: when it satify trigger function, what’s MS action. 
Trigger value:trigger value’s unit is 0.5db 
Trigger averaging duration:MS start trigger action after it lasts trigger averaging during. 
In Figure 73, when the serving BS’s CINR is lower than 10db, MS will send MOB_SCN_REQ. 
Usally different frequency HO, configure a trigger to trigger MS send HO-REQ when serving BS’s 
CINR is 3db lower than target BS. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 99 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.6 Power Control optimization 
2.6.1 PC and AMC principle 
2.6.1.1 The purpose of PC 
The purpose of PC is to decrease the influence of slow fading of wireless channels and slow 
changes in interference on singnals, conquer quick fading and exquisite changes in interference by 
complect coding. 
Preventing competitive power increase and decreasing the overall interference level of system. 
Everychannel’s transmitting power can bring in interfence to other channels, when system is on the 
point of stable power, any power increase can bring in competitive power increase to other 
subscribers, so increase overall interference rapidly. By the control of channel transmitting power, 
overall transmitting power can be the smallest available value, so decreasing the overall interference 
level of system, increasing the system capability. 
Trying to reduce the Tx power in the precondition of meeting communication quality requirements, 
PC technology is an optimization technology, the purpose is to reduce the TX power in the 
precondition of meeting communication quality requirements (bandwidth, BER,FER). 
2.6.1.2 The principles of PC 
Abiding by the following 3 principles 
Powe balance: ensure equal power of the wanted signals at the receive end. For example, ensure 
equal RSSI for the uplink. 
SNR balance:ensure equal C/I(carrier/Interference) at the receive end. 
BER/FER balance:ensure equal BER/FER at the receive end, for example for the uplink, ensure 
equal BER/FER at BS from MS. 
2.6.1.3 Power Control Classification 
Power Control includes uplink PC and downlink PC, uplink Power Control is the main content. 
Uplink PC includes 3 types: closed loop, open loop, external loop. 
Closed loop: comparing with the object value(CINR,RSSI), BS measures the channel 
quality(CINR,RSSI), then confirm the adaptation. 
External loop: BS gets uplink BER or PER, then adjusts CINR by comparing with the enactment 
value to insure communication quality. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 100 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Open loop is mainly carried out by MS. By calculating path loss and modulation coding modules, 
interference of BS, MS adjusts Tx power properly. The advantage of open loop is higher adjusting 
frequency, lower delay, no need bandwidth spending, because of no close loop, the adjustment maybe 
not accurate. 
Downlink PC: when MS migrates to the edge of cells, path loss increases rapidly, the quality of 
signal channel turns worse, if increasing the downlink Power, you can improve communication 
quality. Otherwise when MS is next to BS, the quality of channel is very good, so in the precondition 
of keeping bandwidth, we can decrease power properly, decrease interference level, also save Tx 
power for remote subscribers. WiMAX carries out downlink power control by adjusting Booting 
value. 
2.6.1.4 AMC 
WiMAX adopts AMC technology, according the intension of sinals, automatic adjust modulation 
and coding modes, so it’s very close between AMC and Power Control. 
Uplink encodings in common use: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 101 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Table 15 UL FEC 
Downlink encodings in common use: 
Table 16 DL FEC 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 102 页
WiMAX network optimization 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 103 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.6.1.5 PC and AMC arithmetic 
Uplink AMC and PC methods: 
First, confirm UIUC, according to current UIUC and CINRrcv, judge whether current CINRrcv is 
in min entry threshold or mand exit threshold of current UIUC. 
If so, keep UIUC, otherwise reconfirm UIUC and judge power by congestion. 
Downlink AMC and PC methods: 
First confirm boosting and then confirm DIUC according to CINR, the adjusting method of DIUC 
is similar to UIUC. 
2.6.2 Power Control and AMC configure 
PC parameters are mainly: DL Burst Profile, UL Burst Profile, AMC and PC. 
2.6.2.1 DL Burst Profile configure 
DL Burst Profile configure page in OMC as follows: 
Figure 74 OMC DL Burst Profile configure 
2.6.2.2 DL Burst Profile parameters instruction 
This page describes all types of FEC threshold when downlink adopts AMC. According to 
different terminials and service scene, the configure needs to be optimized. At present, 
recommended DIUC value of GCT card as follows: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 104 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Table 17 DIUC recommended value 
FEC Code type 
and modulation type 
FEC 
number 
UIUC 
Mandatory 
exit threshold 
UIUC Minimum e 
ntry threshold 
QPSK(CC) 1/2 0 24 30 
QPSK(CTC)1/2 13 24 30 
16QAM(CTC)1/2 16 30 36 
16QAM(CTC)3/4 17 36 44 
64QAM(CTC)3/4 20 44 48 
DL Burst Profile 
In Figure 74, DL Burst Profile expresses the configurations of downlink burst modulation and 
coding, this configure is the MC type used to divide downlink burst to terminals by LDS. At most 
12 items, be corresponding to DIUC1~DIUC12. 
Mand exit threshold and Min entry threshold are the same as uplink, the choice of DIUC is 
decided by the downlink AMC method when downlink AMC enable. 
The step of threshold value is 0.5db, and the step of backgroup NPT demonstrate is 1db, so you 
need to use the threshold value divide 2 and then be corresponding to DL CINR of NPT. When 
compare the threshold with the DL CINR of NPT, you need to notice: when downlink AMC enable, 
check the mand exit threshold and min entry threshold of this DIUC, if it’s between these two values, 
there’s no modulate of downlink MC. 
To DL Burst Profile, the first item is DIUC1, the followings are DIUC2, DIUC3…, 12 items at 
most.DIUC0 is used by DL_MAP, it’s configured in DL-MAP Coding indication in figure 74. up to 
now, 0 means QPSK CC 1/2, the other is 2 shows QPSK CTC 1/2. If it was configured QPSK CC 
1/2,DIUC0 is QPSK CC 1/2;if it’s QPSK CTC 1/2,DIUC0 is QPSK CC 1/2. 
When configure the thresholds in these burst profile, generally we use default values. Up to now, 
there’s no expert items testing, so they will be chosed after testing. 
2.6.2.3 UL Burst Profile configure 
OMC configure figure as follows: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 105 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 75 OMC UL Burst Profile configure 
2.6.2.4 UL Burst Profile parameter instruction 
This page describes all types of FEC threshold when downlink adopts AMC. According to 
different terminials and service scene, the configure needs to be optimized. At present, 
recommended UIUC value as follows: 
Table 18 UIUC recommended configure 
FEC Code type 
and modulation 
type 
FEC 
number 
UIUC 
Mandatory 
exit 
threshold 
UIUC 
Minimum entry 
threshold 
PCCI 
QPSK(CC) 1/2 0 52 60 60 
QPSK(CTC)1/2 13 52 60 60 
16QAM(CTC)1/2 16 60 68 68 
16QAM(CTC)3/4 17 68 76 76 
UL Burst Profile 
In Figure 75 UL Burst Profile is the configure of uplink burst MC, which is mainly used to assign 
MC of uplink burst by LDS, at most 10 items, from UIUCUIUC9. 
Mand exit threshold: uplink AMC enable, when UL CINR is lower than the value of Mand exit 
threshold, system will choose a lower step MC according to uplink AMC method. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 106 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Min entry threshold: uplink AMC enable, when UL CINR is higher than the value of Min enry 
threshold, system will choose this MC type, if still higher than higher stup MC, system will choose 
higher MC according to uplink AMC method. 
Up to now, the configure is CC and CTC, the threshold is stepped by 0.25db, but NPT is stepped 
by 1db, so you need to use the threshold divide 4 and then be relative to UL CINR of NPT. When 
compare the threshold with the UL CINR of NPT, you need to notice: when uplink AMC enable, 
check the mand exit threshold and min entry threshold of this UIUC, if it’s between these two 
values, there’s no modulate of downlink MC. 
The third parameter PCCI reference is the reference value of uplink PC, detail solution is based on 
UL power controls enable. 
The following two parameters RSSI reference,Ranging data ratio are no useful up to now, but we 
will deploy correlative job. 
2.6.2.5 AMC configure 
AMC configure as follows: 
Figure 76 AMC configure 1 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 107 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 77 AMC configure 2 
2.6.2.6 AMC frequent parameters instructions 
1. DL AMC enable 
Choose Enable, downlink AMC. 
Choose Disable, downlink AMC disable, use mandatory Modulation and coding. 
As following figure: 
Figure 78 DL AMC enable 
2. DL mandatory FEC 
When DL AMC is disable, parameter DL mandatory FEC is in effect, can choose QPSK(CTC)1/2, 
and other downlink FEC; 
When DL AMC is enabling, this parameter is invalid. 
As follwing figure: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 108 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 79 DL FEC 
3. UL AMC enable 
When it’s Enable,uplink adopts AMC; 
When it’s disabling, uplink AMC is disabling, using mandatory modulation and coding, as 
following figure: 
Figure 80 UL AMC enables 
4. UL mandatory FEC 
When UL AMC is disable, parameter UL mandatory FEC is in effect, can choose QPSK(CTC)1/2 
and other uplink FEC; 
When UL AMC is enable, this parameter is invalid. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 109 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 81 UL FEC 
5. Downlink AMC method 
Figure 82 DL AMC method 
6 Uplink AMC method 
Figure 83 UL AMC methods 
The AMC method of the upper UIUC/DIUC: 
MUMD switch 
1-SUSD switch 
2-MUSD switch 
3-Instant switch: adjust uplink/downlink AMC if CINR of every frame allows, in that case, wave 
CINR brings FEC change, may make system unsteadily, ping delay, even loss. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 110 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Up situation: 
For uplink judicative arithmetic, adopts fixed winodws to store CINR. After statistic of fixed array 
is full, adopts different disposals according to different arithmetic: 
To fixed windows, use a member variable to count, when it’s full, make a statistic, clean array, 
couner equal 0. 
Down situation: 
Downlink judicative arithmetic: adpots slip window to count, if the CINR in slip windows meets 
terms,it will deal according to different arithmetic. 
To slip window: CINRrvc of every frame is stored in array, when if’s full, the oldest will be 
deleted, and store new one, and make statistic. Only when the statistic of CINR meets some 
threshold ratio, there will be MC modify, save a counter member variable to indicate the oldest 
CINR. When next frame coming, use it to replace the old one. 
Special situation: 
When it meets both up and down situation, for a unitive dealing flow, still adopt first up and then 
down, we need to up it to a middle value not the final one, only when it’s no way to down, we 
will up it. So when it meets both up and down situations, the final solution is to fall modulate step. 
The following figure is the parameters of AMC. 
Figure 84 AMC parameter 
.DL_AMC_RiseStatNum 
The rise Statistic of downlink AMC, the object is smooth 
DL_AMC_drop StatNum 
The drop statistic of downlink AMC,the object is smooth 
.UL_AMC_RiseStatNum 
The rise statistic of uplink AMC,the object is smooth. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 111 页
WiMAX network optimization 
UL_AMC_drop StatNum 
The drop statistic of uplink AMC,the object is smooth. 
DL_AMC_RiseTrigNum 
The rise trigger number of downlink AMC, the object is smooth. 
DL_AMC_DropTrigNum 
The drop trigger number of downlink AMC, the object is smooth. 
UL_AMC_RiseTrigNum 
The rise trigger number of uplink AMC, the object is smooth 
UL_AMC_DropTrigNum 
The drop trigger number of uplink AMC,the object is smooth. 
PC_WatchBurstNum 
The number of burst watched for the adjustment of CINR threshold. 
Different AMC entry and exit threshold according to different channels, also the channels are 
changing at any moment. 
At present, the CINR threshold of AMC is decided according to experience, we add AMC 
adjustable mechanism to prevent improper threshold of AMC making AMC performance falling. 
The principle adjusting the threshold of AMC according Burst error ratio. The threshold of AMC is 
to high when the error ratio is much hign, you need to reduce porperly; the threshold need to be 
increased when the burst error ratio is too low. 
This parameter is used to control the period of statistic of burst error ratio. 
2.6.2.7 PC configure parameters 
PC configures parameters as follows: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 112 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 85 PC configure page 1 
Figure 86 PC configure page2 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 113 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 87 PC configure page3 
Figure 88 PC configure page4 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 114 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 89 PC configure page5 
2.6.2.8 PC parameters explanation 
1. DL power control enable 
In the following figure 90, if DL power control enable choose Enable,it means enable downlink 
PC. 
Figure 90 DL PC enables 
When it chooses Disable, it means downlink PC is disable. At this time, DL PC uses the gain 
which fits the appointed boosting, the appointed boosting is configured to Appoint to DL boosting 
as the following figure 91. 
It can be choosed as 0~7,which is corresponding to 0 dB (default),6 dB,-6 dB,9 dB,3 dB,-3 dB,-9 
dB,-12 dB. The corresponding gain of boosting is configured in DL gain of plus value in Figure 
4-50.when downlink PC enables, the value of boosting is decided by the D-value between the min 
entry threshold of the highest multiplicity configured in DL Burst Profile plus 2db and the value of 
DL CINR reported by FFB or REP-RSP. This D-value will be compared to boostiong values of 7, 
and then confirm the boosting value. Then compare the boosting to the Upper bound of DL 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 115 页
WiMAX network optimization 
boosting and Lower bound of DL boosting in figure 92 , if it’s in the bound you can use it; if it’s 
higher than Upper bound of DL boosting,then it adpots the boosting value of upper bound(3db in 
figure 92), if it’s lower than Lower bound of DL boosting, then it adopts the value of lower 
boosting(-3db in fiugre 92). 
Figure 91 Boosting 
Figure 92 PC paramters 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 116 页
WiMAX network optimization 
UL power controls enable 
The following figure 93, UL power control enable chooses Enable, enable uplink PC, and 
otherwise disable uplink PC. 
Figure 93 UL PC enables 
UL PC is adjusted according to the third paramter PCC reference in UL burst profile, when the 
measured CINR of data burst aveage is higher than PCCI, then the UL signal quality can meet 
communication, you can reduce power properly; if UL CINR is lower than the reference value, the 
UL signal qualtiy can not meet communication, you need to upgrade power. The method of 
average:in figure 94, average method for UL CINR measurements=0 means Alpha average,1 
means slipped windows average; Alpha average:new CINR=Alpha * reported CINR+(1- Alpha) 
* old average CINR,Alpha is configured in Alpha for UL CINR average in figure 95,ennerally 
configured 1/16~15/16; windows average is slipped windows average, the size of windows if 
configured in Window for UL CINR average in figure 95, the scope of upgrade or reduce is 
decided by warp of CINR, in figure 94big warp chooses big step, small warp choosed small step, 
correspongding parameters as figure 97, considering the parameter exlanation in 1.2.2 uplink 
parameter control of “ZTE-WiMAX configure parameter handbook”. By this adjusting, you can 
make UL CINR is nearby PCCI. So you can modify uplink power and UL CINR by changing 
PCCI. This is avaiable when UL PC enable, otherwise it’s no use. Generally, PCCI reference is a 
little higher or equal min entry thrshold. 
Figure 94 UL CINR average1 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 117 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 95 UL CINR average 2 
Figure 96 UL power adjust 
Figure 97 UL PC enables 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 118 页
WiMAX network optimization 
UL pc mode 
Differences between close loop PC and open loop PC: 
Close loop is BS measure the CINR, RSSI of data sent by MS, then compare to the target value, 
confirm the power adjusting. At present, our system supports adjust according to UL CINR, in 
future considering RSSI; 
Open loop is mainly completed by MS. MS confirms Tx power according to the path loss, MC, the 
interfere of BS. The advantage of this type is high adjusting frequency, small time delay, no extra 
bandwidth; disadvantage is no close loop, the adjusting maybe not exact. 
In future our system will be added external PC: BS calculates the uplink BER or PER, by 
comparing to the threshold, adjust CINR dynamically to ensure the communication quality. 
Figure 98 UL PC methods 
PC adjust method 
The following figure99 the feedback method of unlink Tx power adjust in PC adjust method. 
• 0: No adjust 
• 1: Power control IE (default) 
Power control IE is sent in UL-MAP,which MS is decided by the CID in UL-MAP IE. 
• 2: Fast power control message 
FPC message is used to adjust several MSs’ power at one time, which was sent by CID 
broadcast.FPC also can be chosed to support BS. 
Otherwise, when there is time and frequency bias in current system,uplink Tx power adjustment 
message will be sent to MS by RNG-RSP, otherwise use PC adjust method over here. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 119 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 99 UL PC message 
Drop off enable 
Generally, set Drop off enable as enable(default),or drop off will not take effect. 
Figure 100 Drop off 
Drop off detection is realized by checking uplink burst of MS, when uplink channel is very bad,the 
PER is very high, the statistic reaches the threshold, BS will release MS forcibly. But in some 
situation, there is none uplink burst, just only burst springed by T27 at intervals. Due to the long 
period, it’s a long time to achieve the number of error packages. For example, the period of T27 is 
500ms; the statistic of 1000 burst needs 500s. No natural uplink burst situations include: 
• no uplink bandwidth requirement of MS; 
• uplink channel of MS is very bad, BS can’t receive MS bandwith request, so BS will not assign 
bandwidth to MS(except UGS); 
• MS power off. 
So we need to import the detection of uplink CINR, when it’s a long time, there is no good CINR, 
also system judges MS drop off. This method also can judge whether MS drop off when there is no 
normal uplink burst. The relatived parameters showed in figure101, considering detailed 
explanation 1.2.5 drop off parateters in “ZTE-WiMAX configure parameter handbook”. 
Figure 101 Drop off 2 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 120 页
WiMAX network optimization 
If microcode doesn’t report MS’s data burst message, the detection of drop off in PC can not be 
executed, it happens that BS can’t drop off, but MS dropped off. How to chech whether microcode 
report MS’s data burst? 
In serial, input“g_dwULChStatSwitch=1”,and then input“g_dwUlChInfo”, it shows the memory 
address of this varible, copy it, input “d g_dwUlChInfo memory address, 1000,4”, the content of 
every 4th 32bits addresses is: 
0: BasicCID(0~15),current frame NO.(16~23),RSSI(24~31); 
1: CINR measured by baseband (0~7), average CINR (8~15), CRC (16~23), HCS (24~31); 
2: time bias measured by baseband (0~31) 
3: frequency bias measured by baseband (0~31). 
Notcie: 
Maybe the location of every 4 32bits address is not the same, maybe the 0 32bit address is time 
bias measured by baseband. CINR can easily recognize locations according increasing frame NO. 
and invariable BasicCID. 
If the print information is unvariable (especially frame NO.), so you can deduce there is no 
microcode report. There is no MS bandwidth assigned by LDS, or MS sent no data in this assigned 
bandwidth. 
At the same time, input”g_dwULChStatSwitch=1”, also input”g_dwULPowerAdjInfo” to check 
the PC adjustment, time and frequency bias after disposal of PC module. Input “g_ 
dwULPowerAdjInfo”to show the memeory address of variable, copy the memory addrss, input “d 
g_ dwULPowerAdjInfo memory address, 1000, 4”, the detail information of every 4 32bits 
address: 
0: average CINR (0~7), unlink PC scope(8~15), unlink Tx power(16~31);(unlink Tx power is 
reported by MS through BR and UL Tx power report header,PHY channel report header,UL Tx 
power report,extended subheader, also attached in SBC-REQ,PMC-REQ,REP-RSP) 
1: time bias needed to be adjusted (0~31), when it’s 0, there’s no need to adjust. 
2: frequency bias needed to be adjusted (0~31), when it’s 0, there’s no need to adjust. 
The method of adjustmet for time and frequency bias is average the time and frequency bias 
reported by baseband, up to now it’s average 30 reported values. When the average time/frequency 
bias is bigger than the threshold of timing/frequency bias(in figure 102 Timing adjustment 
threshold/Frequency adjustment threshold),you can adjust through RNG-RSP. 
3: current frame NO.(0~15), BasicCID(16~31) 
Also maybe the location of every 4 32bits address is not the same, maybe the 0 32bit address is 
time bias measured by baseband. CINR can easily recognize locations according increasing frame 
NO. and invariable BasicCID. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 121 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 102 PC adjustment 
UL limit channel num enabled 
When “UL limit channel num enabled” is enabled in figure 103, that means whether uplink limit 
channel number is enabled. In transmitting process, if the uplink assiged channel is nore steady, MS 
will keep Tx power spectral density. For example, when BS change assigned channel number from 1to 
2, MS Tx power will be twice to keep Tx power spectral density. But when MS Tx power is max, 
adding subchannel will decude power spectral density, uplink CINR also reduces, if there’s no timely 
falling AMC, the result is higher PER. When it’s enable, BS will keep MS current power spectral 
density, calculate the max subchannel assigned to MS according to the current MS Tx power and the 
max power. BS will assign subchannels no more than the max number. Up to now it works not well, so 
the default value is disabling. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 122 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 103 Subchannel limit 
ZONE boosting enable 
Zone boosting enable is the of-off of downlink Zone Boosting, protocol regulates preamble 
subcarrier boosting is 9dB, it’s suitable for FUSC type of all subcarriers, but after importing PUSC, 
to 1/3 PUSC, the power of PUSC Zone is much less than preamble, which makes BS 
power-amplitier is stricted by preamble. So later protocol provides Zone Boosting solution, when 
downlink zone is not all the subchannels, the used subchannels (including data sub-carrier and 
pilot sub-carrier) will be boosting, the boosting value is all the available subcarrier 
number/subcarrier used by zone. 
When Zone Boosting enable, the boosting of Burst won’t exceed 9dB - zone boosting, to 1/3 
PUSC, zone boosting is about 4.7db, so the boosting of burst is less than 3db, the parameter of DL 
Max Boosting(Upper bound of DL boosting)is less than 3dB. 
Zone Boosting is relative to the subchannels used by zone, all the parameters of subchannels used 
by zone is decided by the following parameters: USED_SUBCHN_BMP, 
AMC_DL_SUBCHN_BMP, TUSC1_DL_SUBCHN_BMP, and TUSC2_DL_SUBCHN_BMP. 
Zone Boosting enable is also relative to reference source, when Zone Boosting enable, the number 
of data subcarrier of reference source will be boosting 3db no matter how many PUSC subchannels 
configured. 
The number of subcarrier used by Segment is configured in DL PUSC used subchannel bitmap in 
figure 104, 63 equal use all subcarries. 
Figure 104 Subchannel limit 2 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 123 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 105 DL-MAP 
The meaning of the other parameters in OMC is described in 1.2- power control configure in 
“ZTE-WiMAX configure parameter handbook”. 
The other matters need attention 
You can see MS BasicCID through command DisplayActvieMS in serial, and then input 
GetPCInfo(segmentid,basiccid) to see the content of NPT, including uplin CINR,UIUC/DIUC and 
so on, parameter segmentid is the segmentid accessed by M, generally it’s 0, and basicid 
is some BasicCID obtained by command DisplayActiveMS. 
Up to now, when MS accessed, you input g_dwSuppFFB=0 to close FFB forcibly, there is no 
downlink CINR report, so there is no PC and AMC adjustment. It will report DL CINR by REP-RSP 
after new MS access. 
Now, there are some problems of uplink PC, especailly many subscribers access, UL PC enable will 
lead 
to quick UL CINR frequency changes even to 0, the detail reason need to confirm. Maybe its reason 
includes PC types(close or open), often time and frequency bias,the interference of RSSI,NI,MS 
power and so on.Also some terminals have different disposal to ours, thinking about the infulence of 
RSSI,NI, all these need to be PC optimizated in future. In order to prevent excessive frequency 
adjustment, PC have an average disposal of time and frequency bias reported by baseband. Uplink Tx 
power is mainly adjusted by RNG-RSP, PCIE, FPC, when time and frequency bias also need to be 
adjusted, uplink Tx power adjustment is noticed by RNG-RSP together with time and frequency 
adjustment. If there’s no time and frequency bias, the uplink Tx power adjustment is adjusted 
according the configure in PCIE or FPC. 
During the access of MS, there’s time-delay disposal to AMC in order to deal admission control, now 
You can choose delay or not, default is no delay. Higher MC of Delayed AMC PC is calucated by 
CINR and not reported to LDS, after 2500 frames, it will be reported to LDS, so before this LDS 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 124 页
WiMAX network optimization 
sue the default low UIUC1/DIUC0, otherwise the higher MC will be reported to LDS at once, and 
higer MC will take effect at once. 
2.7 Admission and congestion control 
2.7.1 QOS of the air-interface resource of WiMAX 
2.7.1.1 Air-interface resource 
The air-interface resource of WiMAX is calculated unitely as SLOT number. 
By physicalal structure, one air-interface SLOT is composed of a special time length lasted by 
several sub-carriers. LDS also use SLOT as operation unit, translate MAC message to PHY layer. 
If the time length of an air-interface physicalal FRAME is T, the usable number of subcarriers is N, 
a SLOT lasts t is composed of n subcarriers, so the total SLOT of air-interface is (T/t)*(N/n). Most 
of these SLOT is used to transport service data, little part is used to control channel (DL_MAP, 
UL_MAP, UCD, DCD and so on). 
2.7.1.2 Flux of subscribers’ service-flow 
The air-interface bandwidth occupied by subscribers’ service flow is also calculated by SLOT. 
An important point of WIMAX air-interface is that the service flow of terminals can adopt lots of 
Modeling and Coding types, the number of SLOTs occupied by high level MC is much less than 
low level MC type, but higher quality requirements to air-interface signal. 
Also WIMAX provides Automatic Modeling & Coding, it can automatic MC according to the 
signal quality of terminals access. 
Flexible access types make sufficient use of WIMAX air-interface resource, but bring forward 
higher requirement to air-interface QOS management. 
2.7.1.3 Types of service-flow 
To make sufficient use of air-interface, at the same time adapt to all types service requirements, 
WiMAX system design several types for service flow. 
UGS 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 125 页
WiMAX network optimization 
The character of UGS is fixed service flow bandwidth, once access, the air-interface will hold 
fixed SLOT for the service all the time, no matter whether there’s data to send. The bandwidth can 
not be occupied by other services, and the time delay of data message is very strict. 
UGS is the highest priority service, mainly used as VOIP and such high real-time services. 
VR 
VR service has no fixed bandwidth guarantee, but a bound of bandwidth. once accessed, the 
air-interface should hold enough SLOT for the floor level bandwidth. When the air-interface 
resources is loose, you can add bandwidth dynamically, but it can’t exceed the upper limit; when 
the air-interface resource is tense, you can reduce SLOT and assign them to other services, but 
need to keep the floor level of the bandwidth bound. 
The upper limit of bandwidth bound is named the max last speed, the floor level of bandwidth is 
named the min saved speed. 
VR services are classified into NRT-VR, RT-VR and ERT-VR 
NRT-VR 
The time delay of data message transport is loose, every frame can adjust the assignment of SLOT 
automatically. Mainly be used in FTP transport services. 
RT-VR 
The time delay of data message transport is strict, every frame can adjust the assignment of SLOT 
automatically. Mainly be used in on-line audio video stream services. 
ERT-VR 
The time delay of data message transport is strict, every frame cann’t adjust the assignment of 
SLOT.Automatically, but adjust at intervals. The performance of ERT-VR is near to UGS, but the 
use of bandwidth is more flexible than UGS. The application scope is similar to UGS. 
Among the three VR services, the priority from high to low is ERT-VR, UGS, RT-VR and 
NRT-VR. 
BE-best effort 
BE has no bandwidth guarantee, will be assigned when there is spare SLOT; at one time has 
the max persisting speed restrict. From the point of view of resource management, BE can be 
regarded as NRT-VR whose the minimal bandwidth guarantee is 0. BE service is the lowest 
priority, mostly used as WEB browse services. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 126 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.7.1.4 Admission and congestion control 
Admission and congestion control is two important part of QOS system, the together object of 
them is to avoid overload of air-interface, ensure the quality of service flow transport. 
The function of WIMAX admission control is to restrict the acess ot subscribers’ service flow, 
prevent BS air-interface overload. 
The function of WIMAX congestion control is to unchain overload when the BS congestion is 
caused by reducing quality of signal channel, replacing low phase MC to the accessed terminals. 
2.7.2 Admission Control 
2.7.2.1 Basic principle 
If the spare air-interface SLOT is exhausted after the applying service entered, the service will be 
refused. 
2.7.2.2 Realization method 
Admission control is realized together by SPS, DBS and LDS. 
SPS: put in service access request to DBS, report the type, direction, bandwidth and so on, after 
receiving admission judgement, go on executing service flow access, or backout the established 
service flow. 
LDS: take charge of the usage statistic of SLOT, including total SLOT, used SLOT and so on, also 
report them to DBS at intervals. 
DBS: answer for the final admission judgement, according to the bandwidth requirement and MC 
type reported by SPS, calacute the required SLOT, compare to the usage report by LDS, judge 
whether admission or not. 
2.7.2.3 The application scene of admission control 
Original access 
The subscriber setup a new workflow, admission control judge it by uplink or downlink.. 
Bandwidth variation for accessed subscribers 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 127 页
WiMAX network optimization 
The subscribers want to add or reduce the bandwidth of an accessed service flow. Thereinto, the 
apply of adding bandwidth is restricted by admission control, admission control judges it by uplink 
or downlink service flow. 
HO of terminals 
When terminals handover to other BS, all the accessed services in serving BS will be applied to 
target BS. 
In this scene, all the service flow of terminals should be admitted to the target BS, the HO can 
be completed, or any service flow is not admitted, BS will refuse the HO of terminals. 
2.7.2.4 Serveral terms considering by admission control 
1. MAC overhead 
SPS requests to DBS for service admission, the filled parameters of bandwidth is the payload of 
Service flow, not including MAC overhead; when DBS judges by SLOT, it needs to add suitable 
requirement, and then judge. 
2. Reserved air-interface abundant quantity 
The object of reserved air-interface abundant quantity is to have spare resource when MC types 
Changed or the bandwidth of service flow alters, not as far as the property of service flow changed, 
the air-interface is overload. 
3. the priority of admission for different scenes 
The priority of admission is that different scenes have different admission results when the 
resource of spare SLOT is very tense. Among the three before-mentioned scenes, the priority from 
high to low is HO, bandwidth variation and original access. 
The priority is realized by reserving each air-interface resource abundance, higer priority, less 
reserved abundance. 
4. Disposal to different service flow 
To UGS, judge by the SLOT calculated by fixed bandwidth and MC of terminals. 
To VR services (ERT-VR, RT-VR, NRT-VR), judged by the SLOT calculated by the minimal 
reserved bandwidth and MC of terminals. 
To BE, no reserved bandwidth, so no reserved SLOT, admitted unconditionally. 
2.7.2.5 Admission control parameters explanation 
Table 19 Table of admission control parameter explanation 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 128 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Parameter Meaning Explanation 
T_NEW the usage ratio 
of SLOT for 
original 
access 
judgement 
[0,100] unit is %, It means the discount of SLOT resource 
adjustment in the original access scene. 100% - T_NEW% is the 
reserved value. The default configuration of T_NEW is 80(%) 
T_CHG SLOT usage 
ratio of stream 
changing 
judgment 
The unit of [0,100] is %. It means the discount of SLOT 
resource adjustment in the scene of stream bandwidth changing. 
100% - T_CHG% is the reserved value. The default 
configuration of T_CHG is 85(%). 
T_HO HO 
adminssion 
threshold 
The unit of [0,100] is %. It means the discount of SLOT 
resource adjustment in the scene of stream initial operating. 
100% - T_HO% is the reserved value. The default 
configuration of T_HO is 90(%). 
MAC_RATIO MAC 
overhead ratio 
The unit is %, It means the ratio between the SLOT amount of 
MAC overhead and the SLOT for operating stream load, the 
default value is 5(%). 
LDS_RPTINTVThe interval 
of LDS report 
SLOT usage 
The unit is FRAME, which is that FRAME counts the average 
SLOT data as LDS manage and report to DBS. The default 
configuration is 400(FRAME), which is 2 seconds. It can be 
configured as integer multiple of 200. 
Remark: If the reporting cycle is configured too long, it may 
cause the reduction of the admitting percent of pass, and 
influence the function of port. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 129 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.7.2.6 Admission configure page 
Figure 106 Admission configure page 
2.7.3 Congestion control 
2.7.3.1 Basic principle 
The main reason to congestion is too much data folw, LDS cann’t arrange all the data in limited 
slots. So the kernel of congestion control is to reduce the occupied quantity of SLOT. It can be 
realized by restricting access, upgrading the air-interface power, forcible terminals handover, 
releasing low priority service flow forcibly. 
2.7.3.2 Realized mode 
It’s realized together by subsystem SPS, DBS and LDS. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 130 页
WiMAX network optimization 
LDS: it answers for the Statistic of air-interface slot in time, mainly includes whether produce 
attemper violation, and the rate of violation, also report to DBS cycly. 
DBS: it takes charge of two jobs: first, according to the report of SLOT attemper sent by LDS, 
judge whether the air-interface is in congestion, and the degree of congestion, and then sends the 
report to SPS; second, when it needs to upgrade power, forcible handover or release forcibly to exit 
congestion, choose the service flow and terminals according the information, and then send the 
report to SPS. 
SPS: SPS is the main part of congestion control, after receiving DBS congestion control report, 
chooses the method of relieving congestion, and then choose the object to execute, at last relieve 
congestion to the choosed object. 
2.7.3.3 The scene of congestion control 
According to the procreant situation of congestion, congestions are divided into no congestion, 
light congestion, middle congestion, high congestion. 
No congestion 
No congestion: there is no air-interface slot resoutce overload, normal LDS attemper. 
Light congestion 
When the LDS attemper interval for BE is more than the threshold, the air-interface enters light 
congestion, there’s no influence on UGS and VR. 
Solutions: 
It needs to increase power of terminals to exit light congestion. Among all the terminals which 
accessed the air-interface, choose one or more terminals to upgrade the power, in order to upgrade 
the quality of signal and increase the MC type, so reduce the mount of air-interface slots this 
terminal occupied. 
The principle of terminals who was increased power forcibly: the number of slots occupied 
all the service is the most, you need to upgrade the power. 
Middle congestion 
When LDS stops the attemper of BE, there’s still a mass of attemper violation for NRT-VR. 
The load of air-interface enters middle congestion. There is no influence on UGS, ERT-VR and 
ER-VR. 
Soultions: 
It needs to adopt the following two methods at the same time to exit middle congestion: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 131 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Restrict access: in the air-interface, it’s not permitted to new service access, terminal handover, 
apply for more bandwidth. It’s automatically realized by DBS admission control. 
Compulsive handover: among all the terminals accessed the air-interface, choose one or more to 
handover to another air-interface, so reduce the amount of service. The principle of choosing 
terminals: 
----no handover to the terminals which has UGS or BE service 
----first handover to the terminals which has low MC 
High congestion 
When the attemper violation rate reaches the threshold to all the realtime services(including 
UGS, ERTVR,RTVR), the air-interface enter high congestion. 
Solutions: 
It needs to backout service flow forcibly. Among all the services accessed in the air-interface, 
choose on or more to backout forcibly, so that we can reduce the quantity of service flow quickly. 
In high congestion, it’s obligatory to break service flow. 
The principle of backout to service flow: 
----no release to BE 
----first release to low priority service flow 
----the same priority, first release the one took more slots. 
2.7.3.4 Congestion control parameter 
Table 20 Congestion control parameters explanation 
paramter meanings explanation 
CongestionCtrlIntv congestion 
control interval 
Unit is FRAME, calculate flux of 
air-interface and judge interval of 
congestion, default setting is 1000(frames) 
Entry_L_SchIntv The threshold 
of entry light 
congestion for 
BE service 
Unit is FRAME, for BE service,when the 
interval of receiving service message 
arrives above the threshold, there’s still no 
free slot to send data, then air-interface 
entry light congestion. 
Exit_L_SchIntv The threshold 
of exit light 
congestion for 
BE service 
Unit is FRAME, for BE service, 
under light congestion, when the interval 
of receiving service message arrives lower 
than the threshold, there’s enough free slot 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 132 页
WiMAX network optimization 
to send data, then the air-interface exit light 
congestion. 
Entry_M_Violat The threshold 
of violation 
rate to enter 
middle 
congestion for 
NRT-VR 
[0,100] unit is %, in a congestion 
control interval, if the quantity of failed 
frames is more than the threshold when it 
satifies the deadline BW of NRT-VR,, the 
air-interface is judged as middle 
congestion. 
Exit_M_Violat The 
threshold of 
violation rate to 
exit middle 
congestion for 
NRT-VR 
[0,100] unit is%, if the quantity of 
failed frames is less than the threshold 
when it satifies the deadline BW of 
NRT-VR, the aire-interface is judged as 
exit middle congestion. 
Entry_H_Violat The 
threshold of 
violation rate to 
enter high 
congestion 
[0,100] unit is %, in a congestion 
control interval, if the quantity of failed 
frames is more than the threshold when it 
satifies the deadline BW, the air-interface 
is judged as high congestion. 
Exit_H_Violat The 
threshold of 
violation rate to 
exit middle 
congestion 
[0,100] unit is%, if the quantity of 
failed frames is less than the threshold 
when it satifies the deadline BW the 
aire-interface is judged as exit high 
congestion. 
2.7.3.5 Congestion control configure page 
Figure 107 Congestion control configure 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 133 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Section3 WiMAX Terminal Introduction 
& Knowledge 
l Summary of frequent terminal sort summary -------------------------------------------------------------Level1 
l Detail configuration instruction of frequent terminal---------------------------------------------------- Level1 
3.1 Summary of frequent terminal sort summary 
3.1.1 Sort according to the shape and interface 
Usually sort according to the shape and interface as following: 
USB card 
Express card 
PCMCIA card 
Outdoor CPE 
Indoor CPE(Modem) 
Figure 108 Indoor CPE 
Figure 109 USB Card 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 134 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 110 Express CPE 
Figure 111 Outdoor CPE 
3.1.2 Sort according to the chip vendor 
Sort according to the chip vendor as following: 
GCT 
Beceem(ZTE Beccem USB Card、ZTE Express Card、Beceem PCMCIA Card) 
Sequans(USI CPE、USI Express Card) 
Intel(ZTE Intel USB Card) 
Fujitsu 
Runcom 
3.2 Detail configuration instruction of frequent terminal 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 135 页
WiMAX network optimization 
3.2.1 USI CPE terminal 
3.2.1.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction 
When need to modify frequency point or update version for terminal, please land appointed web 
page to operate; 
Appoint IP address as 192.168.0.168; then input web address http://192.168.0.10 in IE, and input 
user name and password as “admin”, it will appear following page: 
Figure 112 USI CPE IE Configure Page 
Select and login channel&frequency web page, modify physical layer parameters; 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 136 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 113 USI CPE Physical layer parameters configuration 
Select and login security web page, set authtication parameters; 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 137 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 114 USI CPE authtication IE configurations 
Select and login firmware upgrade of tools web page, and start to upgrade and update; 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 138 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 115 USI software upgrade 
3.2.1.2 Use command 
Remote telnet 192.168.0.10, and input user name and password as “admin”, then use related 
command to Check that RSSI and CINR values at MS. 
Command: 
cmd "showssphystatsdl" 
Should use the CINR reuse 1 value to judge the quality of downlink, 27dB is good; 
cmd "showssphystats" 
To display all phy status, included different RFs; 
cmd "showssphy" 
To display the phy status in detail. 
Finally change the IP address as automatic gain mode after all the parameters configuration 
finished, then the terminal will connect to network normally. 
3.2.2 ZTE terminal (base on Beceem chip) 
3.2.2.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction 
1. Install WCM 
WCM is a tool of wireless connection and management, Firstly must have installed three software 
patches before install WCM. They patches as following: 
dotnetfx-2.0.Exe, 
WinPcap_4_0_1.Exe, 
WindowsInstaller-KB893803-x86.Exe。 
2. Modify terminal configuration parameters 
If finished the installation, it will create a map mark of Beceem Config File Editor in desktop, 
click , and then select File - >Open->Macxvi.Cfg, start to modify some 
parameters. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 139 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 116 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 1 
Figure 117 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 2 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 140 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.1 Modify frequency point 
Center Frequency:inputed frequency point need to convert.For example set Center Frequency as 
2545(MHz),so use calculator to compute formula is 2545*4,and then convert into 16 hex result 
is 27C4,finally input the result in red box. 
Figure 118 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 3 
The other items can fill directly. 
2.2 Manually physical synchronization change as automatically physical synchronization(notice: 
this parameter needs to modify, or the terminal will don’t have signal). 
After finish the driver installation, the default mode of terminal is manually physical 
synchronization, need to change into automatically physical synchronization. In the following red 
box, change the“PhyParameter2”into 0. 
0——automatically synchronize (don’t need to click connect for getting signal) 
1——manually synchronize (need to click connect for getting signal) 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 141 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 119 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 4 
2.3 Shutdown timer value 
If the terminal is idle for some time, not access, the terminal will enter shutdown state (as shown in 
Figure a red box). 
If after entering the shutdown state, connet button (as shown in Figure A purple box) is shaded, 
then the parameters need to be "ShutDown Time Value" was revised to FFFFFFFF, disable this 
feature follows the red box shown in Figure B. 
If the same key connet ash, as long as you connect key points, terminal will begin to synchronize, 
and then click connect button, they start to access. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 142 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 120 ZTE Beeccem chip parameter A 
Figure 121 ZTE Beeccem chip parameter B 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 143 页
WiMAX network optimization 
2.4 The other frequent parameters instructions 
i.PKMv2 Enable = 0/1 ---0 shows close authentication,1shows open authentication 
ii.HostDrvrConfig6 = 0x0301 --- 301 shows manually connect,303 shows automatically 
connect. 
iii.MIMO Enable 101 ——both enable uplink and downlink MIMO 
100—— uplink MIMO enable 
1—— downlink MIMO enable 
0——both enable uplink and downlink MIMO 
iv..HARQ 0——HARQ ban 
1——transport HARQ enable 
101——both enable transport HARQ and management HARQ 
v. PUSC 0——support PUSC all of subchannels 
1——support PUSC part of subchannels(1/3 subchannels) 
3.2.2.2 TTIS authentication configuration 
1. Open Beceem Config File Editor 
2. Open configuration file, change PKMv2 Enable into 1, and save it,then pull out and insert card 
again. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 144 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 122 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 1 
3. Open Beceem Wireless Connection 
4. Click Option 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 145 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 123 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 2 
Click option, and then appear following dialog box 
i.Select Authentication page, Enable authentication 
In the second red box set user name and password:Default Identity——TTLS user name,Default 
password——TTLS password. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 146 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 124 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 3 
ii.Select EAP page 
In the first red box EAP methord select EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 
In the second red box import certificate, it provided by basetation side, and can save it in the hard 
disk beforehand. 
In the third red and green box import MAC address of the terminal, and the purple box import the 
postfix of AAA configuration user name,such as“@agwzte.com.cn”. 
Finally click ok. 
Connect 
Manually connect and authentication, the need to use tools Beceem Wireless Connection Mgr. 
WCM installation is complete, will be generated on the desktop icon Beceem Wireless Connection 
Mgr. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 147 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Specific settings and detailed information please refer to WCM installation directory under the 
built-in Wireless Connection Manager User Manual.Pdf document. 
Figure 125 ZTE Beeccem Chip authentication configuration 4 
Note: All installation and Beceem tools to choose a place relating to the path, the path is best not to include 
Chinese, otherwise it will create such anomalies can not be installed. 
5 Firmare version upgrade description 
Firmware version from old to new version, first in the control panel - Add or Remove Programs,there 
will be the old firware (software name: ZTE_WiMAX_Modem "version number") to delete, and then in 
accordance with the new version of the firmware. Tools generally do not need to re-install. 
3.2.3 GCT terminal 
3.2.3.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction 
When finished the driver program installation, need to open WCM and configure user information, 
set frequency point parameters. 
User information set: click setting button and input user information (include user type, password, 
EAP type, server’s CA Cert and so on); 
Frequency point set: use “sf” command configures system frequency point; 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 148 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 126 GCT Card Configure page 
Clinck “Connect”button after finished configuration, the terinal will start to access network. 
3.2.3.2 Common command instruction 
3.2.3.2.1 Set frequency 
Usage: sf RF1_ID RF2_ID Channel_ID (for FPGA board) 
sf Channel_ID [Frequency_kHz] (for GDM7201 EBK) 
Remarks: 
The ‘sf’ command sets RF frequency to the value given by ‘FA’. Available value of FA is 
as shown below. 
Channel_ID Action 
0 2336MHz (KT-Band) 
1 2345MHz (KT-Band) 
2 2354MHz (KT-Band) 
3 2367.5MHz 
4 2376.5MHz 
5 2385.5MHz 
6 2304.5MHz 
7 2313.5MHz 
3.2.3.2.2 Print packet command 
Usage: p [um|dm|ucd|dcd|mna|f] 
Remarks: 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 149 页
WiMAX network optimization 
The ‘p’ command prints out a recently received packet specified by the command 
parameter. The command parameter may be one of f, um, dm, ucd, dcd and mna. The meaning of 
each parameter is as shown below. 
Parameter 
Name 
Action 
f Display FCH 
um Display UL-MAP 
dm Display DL-MAP 
ucd Display UCD 
dcd Display DCD 
mna Display MOB_NBR-ADV 
cm Display Compressed-MAP 
Example: 
p um ==> Display recent UL-MAP packet 
p dm ==> Display recent DL-MAP packet 
p mna ==> Display recent MOB_NBR-ADV packet 
3.2.3.2.3 Dump command 
Usage: dump option 
Remarks: 
The ‘dump’ command shows internal firmware information such as firmware-version, 
connections status and internal data structures. The first parameter ‘option’ indicates the type of 
internal information to be dumped out. Available set of ‘option’ parameters is described in the 
following table. 
Dump option Action 
ver Display firmware version information. 
conn Display internal data structure for connection 
buf Display internal buffer status. 
tim Display internal timer information. 
arq Display ARQ(or Non-ARQ) service flow information 
nbr Display neighbor information 
burst Display number of UL/DL bursts for each modulation & 
coding type. This statistics can be reset by ‘test reset stat’ 
command. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 150 页
WiMAX network optimization 
queue Display internal queue status 
crc Display statistics on CRC packet error. 
cid Display registered CID table 
ho Display internal handover structure 
Example: 
dump ver ==> dump firmware version 
dump arq ==> dump ARQ information 
3.2.3.2.4 Configuration command 
Usage: cfg [type] [options] 
Remarks: 
The ‘cfg’ command changes internal configuration for the category given by the ‘type’ 
parameter. The ‘options’ parameter indicates option for each category where the categories are 
described in the following sections. We have two different ways of entering each parameter value 
– (1) entering each option parameter value in order, (2) entering option name and value in pair as 
shown in the following example. 
cfg cqi 1 6 // CQI enable=1, CQI nbits=6 
cfg cqi nbits 6 // CQI nbits=6 
1. CQI configuration 
Configuration options: 
Optio 
n 
Action 
enable 0 ==> CQI disable, 1==> CQI enable 
nbits Number of bits used for CQI encoding 
(4 ==> Fast Feedback, 6 ==> Enhanced fast feedback) 
offset CQI report offset 
min Minimum CQI value 
max Maximum CQI value 
Example: 
cfg cqi 1 6 0 0 31 // enable=1, nbits=6, offset=0, min=0, max=31 
cfg cqi offset 4 // offset=4 
cfg cqi min 10 31 // min=10, max=31 
2. DBG configuration 
Usage: cfg dbg [dbg_type] [dbg_mask] [ON/OFF] 
Cfg dbg dl 0xf 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 151 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Parameters: 
DBG_ 
Type 
DBG_Mask 
UPPE 
R 
bit#0: Basic upper-MAP message 
bit#1: Set/Get information related message 
bit#2: UP traffic message 
bit#3: Down traffic message 
bit#4: Status message 
HARQ bit#0: HARQ DL-burst debugging 
bit#1: HARQ UL-Burst debugging 
bit#2: HARQ DL-Ack debugging 
bit#3: HARQ UL-Ack debugging 
UL bit#0: Display data-grant information 
bit#1: Display bandwidth request 
bit#2: Display UL PDU size 
PKM PKM message 
DL bit#0: DL burst debugging (DL-MAP IE) 
bit#1: DL burst loss 
bit#2: Rx burst queue 
bit#3: Rx PDU 
ARQ bit#0: Display tx ARQ information (BSN) 
bit#1: Display rx ARQ information (BSN) 
bit#2: Display rx ARQ Feedback information 
bit#3: Display tx ARQ Feedback information 
bit#4: Display rx ARQ Feedback with missing blocks 
bit#5: Display tx ARQ Feedback with missing blocks 
bit#6: ARQ Rx retry 
bit#7: ARQ Tx retry 
PM bit#0: Tx PM information 
bit#1: RF PM information (ON/OFF timing) 
bit#2: RF PM information (activation timing) 
bit#3: System PM 
MIMO Bit#0: Display ZONE_STC_IE 
Bit#1: Display MIMO DL-MAP 
Bit#2: Display MIMO UL-MAP 
Bit#3: Display MIMO Compressed MAP 
The other common commands please refer to document of <GCT_Text_DM_Quick_Refrence>. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 152 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Section4 WiMAX Network KPI Introduction 
& Knowledge 
l WiMAX network performance KPI introduction --------------------------------------------------------Level3 
l KPI statistic tool CNO2 introduction --------------------------------------------------------------------- Level3 
4.1 WiMAX network performance KPI introduction 
4.1.1 KPI concept 
KPI (Key Performance Indication): key performance index, through setting, sampling, calculation, 
analysis for the key parameters of a process input and output ends of the inner organization;it is a 
targeted quantitative management index for measurement of process performance management. 
It is a tool that can make the strategic objectives of the enterprise be decomposed into long-term 
objectives for the operation, and it is also the basis of performance management system for enterprise. 
KPI is a modern enterprise in the universal importance of performance appraisal methods. 
KPI application is widely used for products assessment; it has become widely accepted measure 
of product performance evaluation methods. 
4.1.2 WiMAX KPI introduce 
4.1.2.1 Coverage KPI 
4.1.2.1.1 DL/UL RSSI 
Name: Received Signal Strength Indication 
Meaning: measure the received signal strength of RF front-end, including the noise, interference 
and channel losses, so a high RSSI index does not necessarily mean good quality channel. It is a 
reference index to measure of the level of network planning and optimization. 
Measurement method: UL RSSI through by the performance statistical tools for statistics at the 
base station side; DL RSSI statistics through by CNT tools at the terminal side. 
Unit: dBm 
4.1.2.1.2 DL/UL CINR 
Name: Carrier-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 153 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Meaning: CINR defines the ratio between a useful carrier frequency signal level and noise level; it 
is an important index to measure the level of network coverage. 
Measurement method: UL CINR statistics collect by the base station performance management, 
DL CINR through by CNT network optimization test tools at the terminal side. 
Unit: dB 
4.1.2.1.2 DL/UL Tx Power 
Name: Transmit Power 
Meaning: main inclue system base station transmits power and terminal transmits power; it is also 
an important index to measure the level of network coverage. 
Measurement method: UL Tx Power through by CNT network optimization test tools for statistic, 
and DL Tx Power through by the base station performance management. 
Unit: dBm 
4.1.2.2 System Performance KPI 
4.1.2.2.1 Initial Access 
1.Initial Access Success Rate: 
Name: Initial access success rate 
Meaning: It is an important index to measure the ability of establishing call connection. 
Formula: the initial access success rate * 100 = the number of success initial access / (the number 
of success initial access + the number of failure initial access). 
Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics 
Unit: % 
2. Average Time Latency of Initial Access: 
Name: Initial access delay 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 154 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Meaning: It is also an important index to measure the ability of establishing call connection. 
Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics 
Units: ms 
Signaling flow and statistical points 
Figure 127 Initial access flow 
4.1.2.2.2 Service Flow Setup 
1. Service Flow Setup Success Rate 
Name: service flow setup success rate 
Meaning: Initial network access is completed; the network side should launch the setup of 
preparatory service flow. This index is one of the important indexs for measure the ability of 
system calls setup. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 155 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Formula: service flow setup success rate = the number of success service flow setup * 100 / (the 
number of success service flow setup + the number of failure service flow setup) 
Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics 
Unit: % 
2. Average Time Latency of Service Connection Setup 
Name: the average delay of service flow setup 
Meanning: It is also an important index for measure the ability of system calls setup. 
Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics 
Units: ms 
3. Signaling flow and statistical points 
Figure 128 Service setup flow 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 156 页
WiMAX network optimization 
4.1.2.2.3 System Connection Drop Rate 
1. Name: system connection drop rate 
Meaning: it is due to the system caused by abnormal dropped calls during the service transmission 
phase, and it is an important index to reflect the ability of system call and maintain, it can also be 
used to measure the operation state and QoS processing capabilities. Including MS / BS / AGW / 
IDLE abnormaly caused by dropped calls. 
Formula: system connection drop rate = abnormal release num* 100 / (abnormal release num + 
normal release num) 
Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics 
Unit: % 
2. Signaling flow and statistical points 
Figure 129 System connection drop flow 
4.1.2.2.4 Hard Handover 
1. Name: Hard handover success rate 
Meaning: including the same frequency and different frequency handover of inter_BS, handover 
of intra_BS, it is difference between the inter_BS and intra_BS for handover process. The higher 
the index, the probability of dropped calls for mobile users to the smaller, and it is an important 
index to measure the mobile ability of wireless systems. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 157 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Formula: Hard Handover Success Rate = Hard Handover Success num * 100 / (Hard Handover 
Success num + Hard Handover Fail num) 
Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics 
Unit: % 
2. Signaling flow and statistical points 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 158 页
WiMAX network optimization 
MS SBS TBSn AGW(HO+DP) 
AGW(Auth 
enticator) 
4 R6_HO_Req(MSInfo) 
5 R6_HO_Req 
6 R6_AK_Context_Req 
7 R6_AK_Transfer(AK,AKID,AKLifetime,AKSN) 
8 R6_Path_Pre_RegReq 
9 R6_Path_Pre_RegRsp 
10 R6_HO_Response 
1 MOB_NDR_ADV 
2 Association with neighbor BS 
3 MOB_MSHO_REQ 
(MSID,target BS list) 
12 MOB_BSHO_RSP 
(recommended 
BS=BTSx,newCID) 
13 Externed_SN_Subheader 
14 MOB_HO_IND 
(HO_IND_TYPE) 
11 R6_HO_Response 
1 5 R6_H O_Confirm 
17 RNG_REQ 
18 RNG_RSP 
19 SBC_REQ 
20 SBC_RSP 
21 REG_REQ 
22 REG_RSP 
23 SN_Report 
16 R6_HO_Confirm 
24)R6_Path_Reg_Req 
25)R6_Path_Reg_Rsp 
26)R6_HO_Complete 
27)R6_HO_Complete 
28 )R6_Path_DReg_Req 
29 )R6_Path_DReg_RSP 
Figure 130 Hard handover flow 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 159 页
WiMAX network optimization 
3. Average Interrupted Time Latency of Hard Handover 
Name: Average interrupt latency of Hard Handover 
Meaning: the duration of call interruption time when MS make handover, the index may affect the 
provision of service continuity capabilities, and it is an important index to measure the mobile 
ability of wireless systems, the smaller the index value, the user's experience not more obvious 
when the handover occur. 
Formula: see flowchart 
Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics 
Units: ms 
4. Signaling flow and statistical points 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 160 页
WiMAX network optimization 
MS SBS TBSn AGW(HO+DP) 
AGW(Auth 
enticator) 
4 R6_HO_Req(MSInfo) 
5 R6_HO_Req 
6 R6_AK_Context_Req 
7 R6_AK_Transfer(AK,AKID,AKLifetime,AKSN) 
8 R6_Path_Pre_RegReq 
9 R6_Path_Pre_RegRsp 
10 R6_HO_Response 
1 MOB_NDR_ADV 
2 Association with neighbor BS 
3 MOB_MSHO_REQ 
(MSID,target BS list) 
12 MOB_BSHO_RSP 
(recommended 
BS=B TSx,newCID) 
13 Externed_SN_Subheader 
14 MOB_HO_IND 
(HO_IND_TYPE) 
11 R6_HO_Response 
15 R6_HO_Con firm 
17 RNG_REQ 
18 RNG_RSP 
19 SBC_REQ 
20 SBC_RSP 
21 REG_REQ 
22 REG_RSP 
23 SN_Report 
16 R6_HO_Confirm 
24)R6_Path_Reg_Req 
25)R6_Path_Reg_Rsp 
26)R6_HO_Complete 
27)R6_HO_Complete 
28)R6_Path_DReg_Req 
29)R6_Path_DRe g_RSP 
Figure 131 Hard handover duration flow 
4.1.2.2.5 Delay 
Name: Delay for UGS Ping Service 
Meaning: This index through ping packets to measure end-to-end delay of UGS service, the ping 
packet bytes corresponding with the length of commonly UGS service, package used long. It is an 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 161 页
WiMAX network optimization 
important index to measure the ability of system ensures UGS service. The smaller the value 
means that the delay of system transfer UGS packe is shorter. 
Calculation formula: Through the ping command to obtain delay, and then make the average of N 
times the delays. 
Statistical methods: In the terminal-side or server-side through the ping command. 
Units: ms 
Peer-to-peer KPI: similar indexs include ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS and BE services ping packet delay, 
and measure respectively the levels of several services delay. The following table is the simulated 
packet length for all kinds of services type ping packets. 
Service Type UGS ErtPS rtPS nrtPS BE 
Packets length 
(Byte) 
200 200 1400 1400 or 
1500 
1400 or 
1500 
4.1.2.2.6 Jitter 
Name: Jitter for UGS Ping Service 
Meaning: Jitter indicate that from the terminal sent a UGS service packet to the core network has 
been received (or sent from the core network to the terminal has been received) changes in the 
value of the delay. 
This is an important index to measure the ability of system ensures UGS service. The smaller the 
value means that system transimit more stable for UGS packets. 
Formula: jitter = Delay (max)-Delay (all_packet_in_stream) 
Statistical methods: Through ping command to get delay at the terminal side or core network side, 
and then calculated jitter according to the formula. 
Units: ms 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 162 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Peer-to-peer KPI: similar indexs include ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS and BE services ping packet jitter, and 
measure respectively the levels of several services jitter. 
Service Type UGS ErtPS rtPS nrtPS BE 
Packets length 
(Byte) 
200 200 1400 1400 or 
1500 
1400 or 
1500 
4.1.2.2.7 Packet Loss 
Name: Packet loss for UGS Service 
Meaning: This index defines the proportion of lost packets with the total transmission packets of 
the IP layer. This is an important index to measure the ability of system ensure UGS service. The 
smaller the value means that the correction ability of system transimission is stronger for UGS 
service packets. 
Formula: packet loss = 100 * Number-of-lost-packets/Total-number-of-sent-packets 
Statistical methods: Use Iperf tool transmit the corresponding with UGS service the same length 
packets to abttain this index value at terminal side or core network server. 
Unit: % 
Peer-to-peer KPI: similar indexs include ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS and BE services packet loss rate, and 
measure respectively the levels of several services packet loss. 
4.1.2.3 KPI recommend value 
According to reference project test experience, we provide the recommend value for these KPI as 
follow: 
Table 21 KPI reference value 
KPI 
REFERENCE 
VALUE 
DL CINR >10dB 
DL RSSI >-85dBm 
Initial Access Success Rate >95% 
Average Access Duration <5s 
System connection drop rate <2% 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 163 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Optimized Hard Handover Success Rate intra Sector >90% 
Optimized Hard Handover Success Rate inter Sector >90% 
Intra-BBU Hard Handoff Interrupt Average Duration <120ms 
Inter-BBU Hard Handoff Interrupt Average Duration <120ms 
Delay for Ping Service <160ms 
Jitter for UGS iperf Service <80ms 
Packet Loss <1% 
PER <1% 
4.2 KPI statistic tool CNO2 introduction 
4.2.1 Introduction of CNO2 
ZXPOS CNO2 (Mobile Communication Network Integrated Expert Office II) is a network 
optimization & analysis software belonging to ZTE ZXPOS network plan and optimization solution. Based 
on OMC data (CM、FM、PM、CDT etc.) CNO2 cooperates with other ZXPOS software to give 
customer a comprehensive and powerful solution for network planning, constructing, running and 
maintenance. 
As a powerful optimization & analysis platform, it is accomplished in depth presentation, analysis, 
drill of the network performance data and network running status. Robust nature and flexible deployment 
together with user friendly nature ensures proper analysis and as a result the optimization of the network 
becomes easier and faster. 
The functions of CNO2 is classified to basic functions provided with ZTE OMC software and advanced 
functions optional for meeting the needs of customers flexibly. 
4.2.2 Benefit of using CNO2 
Ø Reduce a great deal of artificial labor in the process of network maintenance everyday and 
make the customers manpower cost lower. 
Ø Cut the period from discovering a problem to solving the problem. 
Ø Let customers better understand and evaluate network performance all-sided and exactly to 
raise the devotion produces a ratio. 
4.2.3 Data Characteristic of CNO2 
Ø CM data and PM data of OMC are collected real-timely into CNO2 as secondary data storage 
each hour for post-statistics and post-analysis. CNO2 PM data collection from OMC has the 
40(min) delay relative to OMC PM data collection. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 164 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Ø CNO2 data (CM/PM) are transmitted from CNO2-OMM to CNO2-NMC each hour, which 
makes many CNO2-OMMs, can be managed centrally by CNO2-NMC. Each CNO2-NMC can 
manage 20 CNO2-OMMs. 
Ø CNO2 PM data have hourly granularity and day granularity. The PM hour data and day data 
storage scales in CNO2-OMM are 40 days and 90 days, and in CNO2-NMC they are 7 days and 
180 days. 
Ø History data (CM/PM) will be maintained automatically in CNO2-NMC and CNO2-OMMs. 
4.2.4 Advantage of CNO2 
Ø CNO2 is a web based enterprise application. It is constructed by browser/server three tiers 
structure and makes customs access ease and quick. Customs are dismissed any agony for client 
software’s installing and updating. 
Ø CNO2 is module structure designed, safe and reliable, with powerful fault-tolerant & 7*24 
hours running capability. 
Ø CNO2 offers many basic functions and optional advanced functions to meet the needs of 
customers with different administrative levels. 
Ø CNO2 offered a powerful WiMAX network performance KPI index system to make customers 
evaluate network status from many angles multi-layer stereoscopic. 
Ø Based on the powerful index system and other kinds of running data, CNO2 offered powerful 
analysis tools such as basic statistics, TopN analysis, Failure Reason analysis, CDT analysis etc. 
to speed the procedure of discovering a problem and solving the problem. 
Ø CNO2 can be deployed flexibly in ZTE OMM, LOMC, and POMC or be deployed 
independently. This flexibility will make the customer have more choices to combine 
economical their hardware investment. 
Ø CNO2 have good stability, scalability and expansibility. 
4.2.5 Main Operation Statistic steps of CNO2 for WiMAX 
CNO2 supports WiMAX network performance KPI. It provides ample indexes’ and statistics template 
by default. 
1. Sign in the CNO2 (both username and password is cno2); 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 165 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 132 Land interface 
2. Open system management, enter into template management create statistic indexes template; 
Figure 133 Template management interface 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 166 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 134 Create indexes template 
3. Open analysis tools, set statistic time, select the created template ,click ”search” button, start to 
statistic; 
Figure 135 Analysis tool interface 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 167 页
WiMAX network optimization 
Figure 136 Choose statistic indexes interface 
4. Read and record the statistic result; 
Figure 137 Statistic result interface 
The more CNO2 functions and specific operations please refer to document of <ZXPOS CNO2 User 
Manual>. 
本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 168 页

More Related Content

PDF
UMTS Drive Test Analysis and Examples
PDF
Evaluation of tdoa techniques for position
PDF
Wcdma rno handover algorithm analysis and parameter configurtaion guidance 20...
PDF
actix-troubleshooting-and-optimizing-umts-network
PDF
Lte u forum-lte-u_technical_report_v1.7
PDF
Front Matter Smart Grid Communications
PDF
Product description of net numen _m3_(cdma_omc)
PDF
Packet synchronization over_carrier_ethernet_networks_for_mbh_2012021
UMTS Drive Test Analysis and Examples
Evaluation of tdoa techniques for position
Wcdma rno handover algorithm analysis and parameter configurtaion guidance 20...
actix-troubleshooting-and-optimizing-umts-network
Lte u forum-lte-u_technical_report_v1.7
Front Matter Smart Grid Communications
Product description of net numen _m3_(cdma_omc)
Packet synchronization over_carrier_ethernet_networks_for_mbh_2012021

What's hot (20)

PDF
Subscriber mgmt-solution-layer2-wholesale
DOCX
Alex optimization guidelines - retainability huawei - rev.01
PDF
Lte planning guide
PDF
80 w0324 1_a
PDF
Implementation of a Localization System for Sensor Networks-berkley
PDF
PDF
Optical Transport Network (OTN) Tutorial
PDF
Tech note umts
PDF
1x evdo optimization_guide_v3.0_chr
PDF
actix lte
PDF
3 gpp tr 23.907v1.2.0
PDF
Nwa 6281 manual-20110816
PDF
Nar 5060 user's manual-english
PDF
Example NetTrax Report
PDF
04 geran bc-en-zxg10 i bsc structure and principle-1-training manual-201010 (1)
PDF
1.2 m hz networking for bcch trxs(gbss21.1 draft a)
PDF
2015 trainingproposal forwcdma-project
PDF
Motorola rfs wi_ng_system_ref_guide
PDF
Subscriber mgmt-solution-layer2-wholesale
Alex optimization guidelines - retainability huawei - rev.01
Lte planning guide
80 w0324 1_a
Implementation of a Localization System for Sensor Networks-berkley
Optical Transport Network (OTN) Tutorial
Tech note umts
1x evdo optimization_guide_v3.0_chr
actix lte
3 gpp tr 23.907v1.2.0
Nwa 6281 manual-20110816
Nar 5060 user's manual-english
Example NetTrax Report
04 geran bc-en-zxg10 i bsc structure and principle-1-training manual-201010 (1)
1.2 m hz networking for bcch trxs(gbss21.1 draft a)
2015 trainingproposal forwcdma-project
Motorola rfs wi_ng_system_ref_guide
Ad

Similar to Wi max -network optimization (20)

PDF
Ijartes v1-i3-001
PDF
IRJET- Mobile Wimax Technology
PPT
0 wi max overview
PDF
Scalable ofdma wp_mobile_wi_max_ic_stelecom
PDF
Opnet based simulation and investigation of wimax network using different qo s
PDF
Radio network dimensioning and planning for wimax networks
PDF
Wcdma radio-network-optimization-guide
PPTX
WiMAX_Intro
PDF
Wifi Vs Wimax By Dr Walter Green
PPT
Wi fi and wimax
PPT
Presentation of-wimax
PPT
PDF
BER PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS FOR WIMAX PHY LAYER UNDER DIFFERENT CHANNEL CONDITIONS
PDF
BER PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS FOR WIMAX PHY LAYER UNDER DIFFERENT CHANNEL CONDITIONS
PDF
BER PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS FOR WIMAX PHY LAYER UNDER DIFFERENT CHANNEL CONDITIONS
PPT
WiMAX BASED APPROACH TO ENHANCE LOCALIZED HUMAN SOCIAL NETWORK.
PPTX
WIMAN , wireless communication technology
PDF
4 g demystified-celplan
Ijartes v1-i3-001
IRJET- Mobile Wimax Technology
0 wi max overview
Scalable ofdma wp_mobile_wi_max_ic_stelecom
Opnet based simulation and investigation of wimax network using different qo s
Radio network dimensioning and planning for wimax networks
Wcdma radio-network-optimization-guide
WiMAX_Intro
Wifi Vs Wimax By Dr Walter Green
Wi fi and wimax
Presentation of-wimax
BER PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS FOR WIMAX PHY LAYER UNDER DIFFERENT CHANNEL CONDITIONS
BER PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS FOR WIMAX PHY LAYER UNDER DIFFERENT CHANNEL CONDITIONS
BER PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS FOR WIMAX PHY LAYER UNDER DIFFERENT CHANNEL CONDITIONS
WiMAX BASED APPROACH TO ENHANCE LOCALIZED HUMAN SOCIAL NETWORK.
WIMAN , wireless communication technology
4 g demystified-celplan
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Chapter 3 Spatial Domain Image Processing.pdf
PDF
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
PDF
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
PDF
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
PPTX
A Presentation on Artificial Intelligence
PPTX
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
PPTX
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
PDF
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
PDF
Approach and Philosophy of On baking technology
PDF
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
PPTX
MYSQL Presentation for SQL database connectivity
PDF
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
PDF
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
PPTX
Cloud computing and distributed systems.
PDF
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
PDF
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
PDF
Spectral efficient network and resource selection model in 5G networks
PDF
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025
PDF
The Rise and Fall of 3GPP – Time for a Sabbatical?
Chapter 3 Spatial Domain Image Processing.pdf
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
A Presentation on Artificial Intelligence
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
Approach and Philosophy of On baking technology
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
MYSQL Presentation for SQL database connectivity
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
Cloud computing and distributed systems.
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
Spectral efficient network and resource selection model in 5G networks
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025
The Rise and Fall of 3GPP – Time for a Sabbatical?

Wi max -network optimization

  • 1. WiMAX network optimization WiMAX Network Optimizing Technique Date Author Remarks 2008.5 WiMAX P&O Team Chines Version 2009.8 WiMAX P&O Team English Version 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播
  • 2. WiMAX network optimization Contents Section1 Wireless Network Planning and Optimization Process ....................................... 1 1.1 Basic Process Introduction .................................................................................................................. 1 1.2 Requirement Analysis.......................................................................................................................... 4 1.3 Spectrum Scan ..................................................................................................................................... 5 1.3.1 Scanning overview................................................................................................................... 5 1.3.2 Scanning test type and test tools............................................................................................... 5 1.3.2.1 Test type..................................................................................................................... 5 1.3.2.2 Test tools.................................................................................................................... 5 1.3.2.3 Spectrum analyzer parameters setting........................................................................ 5 1.3.3 Test procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6 1.3.3.1 Drive test procedure ................................................................................................... 6 1.3.3.2 Fixed location test procedure ..................................................................................... 6 1.3.4 Analysis of test data ................................................................................................................. 6 1.3.4.1 Analysis of drive test data .......................................................................................... 6 1.3.4.2 Analysis of fixed location test data ............................................................................ 7 1.3.5 Analysis of interference in service areas .................................................................................. 8 1.3.5.1 The influence of external interference ....................................................................... 8 1.3.5.2 The influence of external interference on coverage ................................................... 9 1.3.5.3 According to the result of frequency scanning export conclusions and scanning report.................................................................................................................................... 10 1.3.6 System OMC uplink spectrum scanning instruction .............................................................. 10 1.3.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................. 10 1.3.6.2 Uplink spectrum scanning function ............................................................................................. 10 1.4 Single Station Test............................................................................................................................. 20 1.4.1 Single station test scope and objective ................................................................................... 20 1.4.2 Single station test verification requirement ............................................................................ 20 1.4.2.1 Single site verification RNP..................................................................................... 20 1.4.2.2 Coverage area verification ....................................................................................... 20 1.4.2.3 Coverage area KPI target ......................................................................................... 20 1.4.3 Single station test verification contents .................................................................................. 21 1.4.3.1 Single site information verification.......................................................................... 21 1.4.3.2 Functional test verification....................................................................................... 21 1.4.3.3 Drive test result ........................................................................................................ 21 1.4.4 Coverage test verification contents ........................................................................................ 22 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - i -
  • 3. WiMAX network optimization 1.4.4.1 Configuration information ....................................................................................... 22 1.4.4.2 Coverage polygon .................................................................................................... 22 1.4.4.3 Coverage street information..................................................................................... 22 1.4.5 Single station and coverage test verification report................................................................ 22 1.5 Calibration Test ................................................................................................................................. 23 1.6 Network Evaluation before Optimization.......................................................................................... 24 1.7 BS Cluster Optimization.................................................................................................................... 26 1.8 Whole Network Optimization and Network Evaluation.................................................................... 27 1.9 Project Acceptance Test and Report Hand in .................................................................................... 28 Section2 Network Planning Issue ...................................................................................... 29 2.1 Optimization Test Tool Introduction ................................................................................................. 29 2.1.1 Optimization test tool CNT introduction................................................................................ 29 2.1.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 29 2.1.1.2 The use of ZXPOS CNT1........................................................................................ 29 2.1.1.2.1 Test process .................................................................................................... 29 2.1.1.2.2 Hardware detection and configuration ........................................................... 30 2.1.1.2.3 Hardware configuration interface introduced................................................. 31 2.1.1.2.4 Hardware configuration interface introduced................................................. 33 2.1.1.3 Work interface ......................................................................................................... 33 2.1.1.4 Window interface..................................................................................................... 35 2.1.1.4.1 Title bar .......................................................................................................... 35 2.1.1.4.2 Menu bar ........................................................................................................ 35 2.1.1.4.3 Status bar........................................................................................................ 35 2.1.1.5 Toolbar..................................................................................................................... 36 2.1.1.6 Replay toolbar .......................................................................................................... 37 2.1.1.7 Right key menu toolbar............................................................................................ 38 2.1.1.8 Menu and function analysis ..................................................................................... 39 2.1.1.9 Explorer window...................................................................................................... 40 2.1.1.9.1 Device Config ................................................................................................ 41 2.1.1.9.2 Windows......................................................................................................... 41 2.1.1.10 Refresh rate to adjust the window style and the curve........................................... 42 2.1.1.10.1 Adjust wireless parameters window refresh rate chart................................. 42 2.1.1.10.2 Style curve adjustment ................................................................................. 42 2.1.1.11 Test software projects ............................................................................................ 43 2.1.1.12 Export of test data .................................................................................................. 44 2.1.1.12.1 Export pages................................................................................................. 44 2.1.1.13 Subsection of test data ......................................................................................... 45 2.1.1.14 Route map............................................................................................................. 46 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - ii -
  • 4. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.1.14.1 Toolbar introduction ..................................................................................... 47 2.1.1.14.2 Control Layer ............................................................................................... 49 2.1.1.14.3 Theme setting ............................................................................................... 50 2.1.1.14.4 Map parameters setting ................................................................................ 51 2.1.1.14.5 Custom label settings ................................................................................... 53 2.1.1.14.6 Marker parameters........................................................................................ 53 2.1.1.14.7 Find the base station..................................................................................... 54 2.1.1.15 Information display and switch .......................................................................... 55 2.1.1.15.1 Values (WiMAX) ......................................................................................... 56 2.1.1.15.2 Information................................................................................................... 56 2.1.1.15.3 Legend.......................................................................................................... 56 2.1.1.16 Drive test map ...................................................................................................... 57 2.1.1.17 Data test ................................................................................................................ 58 2.1.1.17.1 Plans setting page automatic test plan.......................................................... 58 2.1.1.17.2 Message Test page news shows.................................................................... 60 2.1.1.17.3 Throughput shows the throughput of the page ............................................. 62 2.1.1.17.4 Statistics show page ..................................................................................... 63 2.1.1.18 Data Monitor .......................................................................................................... 64 2.1.1.19 WiMAX Logon Tool ............................................................................................. 65 2.1.1.20 WiMAX Logon Tool ............................................................................................. 65 2.1.1.21 WiMAX Communication Info ............................................................................... 66 2.1.1.22 WiMAX Air Interface Message ............................................................................. 67 2.1.1.23 WiMAX Modulation Statistics .............................................................................. 68 2.1.1.24 WiMAX Date Throughput ..................................................................................... 68 2.1.2 Optimization analysis tool CNA introduction........................................................................ 69 2.1.2.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................. 69 2.1.2.2 Terms, definitions and abbreviations ....................................................................... 70 2.1.2.3 Comprehensive description...................................................................................... 70 2.1.2.3.1 Background .................................................................................................... 70 2.1.2.3.2 Product Overview........................................................................................... 70 2.1.2.4 Specific functions description.................................................................................. 70 2.1.2.4.1 Basic function analysis................................................................................... 70 2.1.2.4.2 Segment'RSSI and Segment'CINR functions ................................................. 71 2.1.2.4.3 Call event analysis and delay statistics........................................................... 72 2.1.2.4.4 Analysis of handover events........................................................................... 72 2.1.2.4.5 Interference Analysis...................................................................................... 72 2.1.2.4.6 Analysis of dropped calls ............................................................................... 72 2.1.2.4.7 Calls, handover of the incident shows the geographical ................................ 73 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - iii -
  • 5. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.2.4.8 Jitter Analysis of packet loss rate ................................................................... 73 2.1.2.4.9 Table part of the meaning of Item Value ........................................................ 74 2.2 Optimize Test .................................................................................................................................... 76 2.2.1 Test Content ........................................................................................................................... 76 2.2.1.1 Cover Test................................................................................................................ 76 2.2.1.2 Throughout Test....................................................................................................... 76 2.2.1.3 Cut-over Test ........................................................................................................... 76 2.2.1.4 Calling Test.............................................................................................................. 77 2.2.1.5 Operation Test.......................................................................................................... 77 2.2.1.6 Handoff .................................................................................................................... 77 2.2.1.7 Lose Words Rate...................................................................................................... 77 2.2.2 Testing Method ...................................................................................................................... 78 2.2.2.1 DT Testing ............................................................................................................... 78 2.2.2.2 CQT Testing............................................................................................................. 78 2.3 RF Optimizing Subject ...................................................................................................................... 79 2.3.1 RF Optimizing Goal ............................................................................................................... 79 2.3.2 Antenna Optimization ............................................................................................................ 79 2.3.3 Calibration Power Optimizing................................................................................................ 79 2.3.4 Interference’s Searching and Frequency Scanning................................................................. 79 2.4 Access and Paging............................................................................................................................. 80 2.4.1 Basic connection flow............................................................................................................ 80 2.4.1.1 Connection flow chart.............................................................................................. 80 2.4.1.2 Small area option and downlink synchronization .................................................... 80 2.4.1.2.1 OMC parameters chart below ........................................................................ 81 2.4.1.2.2 Physicalal Layer Parameter OMC Configuration........................................... 82 2.4.1.3 Ranging.................................................................................................................... 82 2.4.1.3.1 Ranging parameters........................................................................................ 82 2.4.1.3.2 Ranging OMC parameter configuration......................................................... 83 2.4.1.4 SBC negotiation ability............................................................................................ 84 2.4.1.4.1 SBC parameters.............................................................................................. 84 2.4.1.4.2 SBC OMC parameters configuration ............................................................. 85 2.4.1.5 Coding and authorization......................................................................................... 87 2.4.1.5.1 OMC parameters configuration...................................................................... 87 2.4.1.6 REG ability negotiation ........................................................................................... 88 2.4.1.7 Service flow setup.................................................................................................... 88 2.4.1.8 Obtaining IP ............................................................................................................. 89 2.4.2 Idle Idle model and paging flow............................................................................................. 89 2.4.2.1 The function of idle model....................................................................................... 89 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - iv -
  • 6. WiMAX network optimization 2.4.2.2 Paging chart ............................................................................................................. 90 2.4.2.3 Entering idle flow chart............................................................................................ 90 2.4.2.4 Location update........................................................................................................ 91 2.4.2.5 Paging flow.............................................................................................................. 92 2.4.2.6 Exit idel state flow ................................................................................................... 92 2.4.2.6.1 OMC parameters configuration...................................................................... 93 2.5 Handover Technology ....................................................................................................................... 94 2.5.1 Handover types....................................................................................................................... 94 2.5.1.1 Hard Handover (HHO)............................................................................................. 94 2.5.1.2 Fast BS Switching (FBSS)....................................................................................... 94 2.5.1.3 Macro Diversity Handover(MDHO) .................................................................. 94 2.5.2 HHO workflow....................................................................................................................... 94 2.5.3 The related parameters configure of HO................................................................................ 95 2.5.3.1 HO configure page ................................................................................................... 96 2.5.3.2 HO parameter instruction......................................................................................... 96 2.5.3.3 Neighbor configure page.......................................................................................... 97 2.5.3.4 Neighbor parameters explan .................................................................................... 98 2.5.3.5 Trigger configure ..................................................................................................... 99 2.5.3.6 Trigger parameter instruction................................................................................... 99 2.6 Power Control optimization............................................................................................................. 100 2.6.1 PC and AMC principle ......................................................................................................... 100 2.6.1.1 The purpose of PC.................................................................................................. 100 2.6.1.2 The principles of PC .............................................................................................. 100 2.6.1.3 Power Control Classification ................................................................................. 100 2.6.1.4 AMC ...................................................................................................................... 101 2.6.1.5 PC and AMC arithmetic......................................................................................... 104 2.6.2 Power Control and AMC configure ..................................................................................... 104 2.6.2.1 DL Burst Profile configure .................................................................................... 104 2.6.2.2 DL Burst Profile parameters instruction ................................................................ 104 2.6.2.3 UL Burst Profile configure .................................................................................... 105 2.6.2.4 UL Burst Profile parameter instruction.................................................................. 106 2.6.2.5 AMC configure ...................................................................................................... 107 2.6.2.6 AMC frequent parameters instructions .................................................................. 108 2.6.2.7 PC configure parameters ........................................................................................ 112 2.6.2.8 PC parameters explanation..................................................................................... 115 2.7 Admission and congestion control................................................................................................... 125 2.7.1 QOS of the air-interface resource of WiMAX ..................................................................... 125 2.7.1.1 Air-interface resource ............................................................................................ 125 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - v -
  • 7. WiMAX network optimization 2.7.1.2 Flux of subscribers’ service-flow........................................................................... 125 2.7.1.3 Types of service-flow............................................................................................. 125 2.7.1.4 Admission and congestion control ......................................................................... 127 2.7.2 Admission Control ............................................................................................................... 127 2.7.2.1 Basic principle ....................................................................................................... 127 2.7.2.2 Realization method ................................................................................................ 127 2.7.2.3 The application scene of admission control ........................................................... 127 2.7.2.4 Serveral terms considering by admission control .................................................. 128 2.7.2.5 Admission control parameters explanation ............................................................ 128 2.7.2.6 Admission configure page ..................................................................................... 130 2.7.3 Congestion control ............................................................................................................... 130 2.7.3.1 Basic principle ....................................................................................................... 130 2.7.3.2 Realized mode........................................................................................................ 130 2.7.3.3 The scene of congestion control............................................................................. 131 2.7.3.4 Congestion control parameter ................................................................................ 132 2.7.3.5 Congestion control configure page ........................................................................ 133 Section3 WiMAX Terminal Introduction ....................................................................... 134 3.1 Summary of frequent terminal sort summary.................................................................................. 134 3.1.1 Sort according to the shape and interface............................................................................. 134 3.1.2 Sort according to the chip vendor......................................................................................... 135 3.2 Detail configuration instruction of frequent terminal ...................................................................... 135 3.2.1 USI CPE terminal................................................................................................................. 136 3.2.1.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction..................................................... 136 3.2.1.2 Use command......................................................................................................... 139 3.2.2 ZTE terminal (base on Beceem chip) ................................................................................... 139 3.2.2.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction..................................................... 139 3.2.2.2 TTIS authentication configuration ......................................................................... 144 3.2.3 GCT terminal........................................................................................................................ 148 3.2.3.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction..................................................... 148 3.2.3.2 Common command instruction.............................................................................. 149 3.2.3.2.1 Set frequency................................................................................................ 149 3.2.3.2.2 Print packet command.................................................................................. 149 3.2.3.2.3 Dump command........................................................................................... 150 3.2.3.2.4 Configuration command............................................................................... 151 Section4 WiMAX Network KPI Introduction ................................................................ 153 4.1 WiMAX network performance KPI introduction............................................................................ 153 4.1.1 KPI concept .......................................................................................................................... 153 4.1.2 WiMAX KPI introduce ........................................................................................................ 153 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - vi -
  • 8. WiMAX network optimization 4.1.2.1 Coverage KPI......................................................................................................... 153 4.1.2.1.1 DL/UL RSSI................................................................................................. 153 4.1.2.1.2 DL/UL CINR................................................................................................ 153 4.1.2.1.2 DL/UL Tx Power.......................................................................................... 154 4.1.2.2 System Performance KPI....................................................................................... 154 4.1.2.2.1 Initial Access ................................................................................................ 154 4.1.2.2.2 Service Flow Setup ...................................................................................... 155 4.1.2.2.3 System Connection Drop Rate ..................................................................... 157 4.1.2.2.4 Hard Handover ............................................................................................. 157 4.1.2.2.5 Delay............................................................................................................ 161 4.1.2.2.6 Jitter.............................................................................................................. 162 4.1.2.2.7 Packet Loss................................................................................................... 163 4.1.2.3 KPI recommend value............................................................................................ 163 4.2 KPI statistic tool CNO2 introduction .............................................................................................. 164 4.2.1 Introduction of CNO2 .......................................................................................................... 164 4.2.2 Benefit of using CNO2......................................................................................................... 164 4.2.3 Data Characteristic of CNO2................................................................................................ 164 4.2.4 Advantage of CNO2............................................................................................................. 165 4.2.5 Main Operation Statistic steps of CNO2 for WiMAX......................................................... 165 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - vii -
  • 9. WiMAX network optimization Figure Content Figure 1 Network Optimizing Flow............................................................................................................. 2 Figure 2 Structure of Network Optimizing Project...................................................................................... 3 Figure 3 The influence of interference on coverage .................................................................................... 9 Figure 4 The opening of the spectrum scanning method ........................................................................... 12 Figure 5 Opening of the methods of scanning the spectrum...................................................................... 12 Figure 6 Spectrum scanning parameters set............................................................................................... 13 Figure 7 Opening of the base-band interference analysis method ............................................................. 14 Figure 8 Opening of base-band interference analysis method ................................................................... 14 Figure 9 Analysis of base-band interference parameters ........................................................................... 15 Figure 10 Spectrum scan result.................................................................................................................. 16 Figure 11 The curve plot of spectrums scanning ....................................................................................... 17 Figure 12 Base-band interference analysis reported result ........................................................................ 18 Figure 13 Brief Flow for Network Evaluation........................................................................................... 24 Figure 14 Hardware configuration windows.............................................................................................. 31 Figure 15 Advanced configuration window............................................................................................... 32 Figure 16 Suspension of the dialog box testing equipment ....................................................................... 33 Figure 17 The main operation interface..................................................................................................... 34 Figure 18 Main interface title bar .............................................................................................................. 35 Figure 19 Main interface menu bar............................................................................................................ 35 Figure 20 Main interface status bar............................................................................................................ 35 Figure 21 Main interface toolbar ............................................................................................................... 36 Figure 22 Replay toolbar............................................................................................................................ 37 Figure 23 Set replay position ..................................................................................................................... 38 Figure 24 Set replay position ..................................................................................................................... 38 Figure 25 Device Config page ................................................................................................................... 41 Figure 26 Window management page........................................................................................................ 41 Figure 27 Wireless Parameters window menu chart .................................................................................. 42 Figure 28 Chart Option dialog box ............................................................................................................ 43 Figure 29 Export Manager—Export page.................................................................................................. 44 Figure 30 Export Manager—LogMask page ............................................................................................. 45 Figure 31 Geographical display windows.................................................................................................. 47 Figure 32 Route Map window toolbar ....................................................................................................... 47 Figure 33 Control layer dialog box ............................................................................................................ 49 Figure 34 Themes Settings dialog box....................................................................................................... 50 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - viii -
  • 10. WiMAX network optimization Figure 35 Themes setting dialog box――SetSymbol................................................................................ 51 Figure 36 Themes setting dialog box――Auto Generate Values .............................................................. 51 Figure 37 Map parameters setting.............................................................................................................. 52 Figure 38 Custom label settings................................................................................................................. 53 Figure 39 Marking Options settings window............................................................................................. 54 Figure 40 Find cell windows...................................................................................................................... 55 Figure 41 Information display.................................................................................................................... 55 Figure 42 Information display――Values (WiMAX) ............................................................................... 56 Figure 43 Information display――Information......................................................................................... 56 Figure 44 Information display――Legend................................................................................................ 57 Figure 45 Drive test map............................................................................................................................ 57 Figure 46 Data Test windows - Test Plan Settings page ............................................................................ 58 Figure 47 Data Test window - Test page news........................................................................................... 61 Figure 48 Data Test window-data throughput of the page....................................................................... 62 Figure 49 Data Test window-statistic page.............................................................................................. 63 Figure 50 Data Monitor windows .............................................................................................................. 64 Figure 51 WiMAX system landing interface ............................................................................................. 65 Figure 52 WiMAX basic information ........................................................................................................ 66 Figure 53 WiMAX basic information ........................................................................................................ 67 Figure 54 WiMAX air interface message................................................................................................... 68 Figure 55 WiMAX various adjustments of the data encoding................................................................... 68 Figure 56 WiMAXView window-data throughput page ......................................................................... 69 Figure 57 Connection flow chart ............................................................................................................... 80 Figure 58 Physicalal Layer Parameter OMC Configurations .................................................................... 82 Figure 59 Ranging OMC parameter configurations................................................................................... 84 Figure 60 SBC parameters configuration-1 ............................................................................................... 86 Figure 61 SBC parameters configuration-2 ............................................................................................... 87 Figure 62 Parameters configuration of Coding and authorization ............................................................. 88 Figure 63 Chart of service flow setup ........................................................................................................ 89 Figure 64 Paging chart ............................................................................................................................... 90 Figure 65 Entering idle flow chart ............................................................................................................. 91 Figure 66 Location update flow chart ........................................................................................................ 91 Figure 67 Paging flow chart....................................................................................................................... 92 Figure 68 Exit Idle flow chart .................................................................................................................... 93 Figure 69 Pagegroup OMC parameters configuration ............................................................................... 93 Figure 70 Workflow chart of HHO............................................................................................................ 95 Figure 71 HO page configure..................................................................................................................... 96 Figure 72 OMC Neighbor configure.......................................................................................................... 98 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - ix -
  • 11. WiMAX network optimization Figure 73 OMC Trigger configure ............................................................................................................. 99 Figure 74 OMC DL Burst Profile configure ............................................................................................ 104 Figure 75 OMC UL Burst Profile configure ............................................................................................ 106 Figure 76 AMC configure 1..................................................................................................................... 107 Figure 77 AMC configure 2..................................................................................................................... 108 Figure 78 DL AMC enable....................................................................................................................... 108 Figure 79 DL FEC.................................................................................................................................... 109 Figure 80 UL AMC enables ..................................................................................................................... 109 Figure 81 UL FEC.....................................................................................................................................110 Figure 82 DL AMC method ......................................................................................................................110 Figure 83 UL AMC methods.....................................................................................................................110 Figure 84 AMC parameter ........................................................................................................................111 Figure 85 PC configure page 1 .................................................................................................................113 Figure 86 PC configure page2 ..................................................................................................................113 Figure 87 PC configure page3 ..................................................................................................................114 Figure 88 PC configure page4 ..................................................................................................................114 Figure 89 PC configure page5 ..................................................................................................................115 Figure 90 DL PC enables ..........................................................................................................................115 Figure 91 Boosting....................................................................................................................................116 Figure 92 PC paramters ............................................................................................................................116 Figure 93 UL PC enables ..........................................................................................................................117 Figure 94 UL CINR average1 ...................................................................................................................117 Figure 95 UL CINR average 2 ..................................................................................................................118 Figure 96 UL power adjust .......................................................................................................................118 Figure 97 UL PC enables ..........................................................................................................................118 Figure 98 UL PC methods.........................................................................................................................119 Figure 99 UL PC message........................................................................................................................ 120 Figure 100 Drop off ................................................................................................................................. 120 Figure 101 Drop off 2 .............................................................................................................................. 120 Figure 102 PC adjustment........................................................................................................................ 122 Figure 103 Subchannel limit .................................................................................................................... 123 Figure 104 Subchannel limit 2 ................................................................................................................. 123 Figure 105 DL-MAP................................................................................................................................ 124 Figure 106 Admission configure page ..................................................................................................... 130 Figure 107 Congestion control configure ................................................................................................ 133 Figure 108 Indoor CPE............................................................................................................................ 134 Figure 109 USB Card............................................................................................................................... 134 Figure 110 Express CPE .......................................................................................................................... 135 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - x -
  • 12. WiMAX network optimization Figure 111 Outdoor CPE.......................................................................................................................... 135 Figure 112 USI CPE IE Configure Page .................................................................................................. 136 Figure 113 USI CPE Physical layer parameters configuration ................................................................ 137 Figure 114 USI CPE authtication IE configurations ................................................................................ 138 Figure 115 USI software upgrade ............................................................................................................ 139 Figure 116 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 1............................................................................. 140 Figure 117 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 2............................................................................. 140 Figure 118 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 3............................................................................. 141 Figure 119 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 4............................................................................. 142 Figure 120 ZTE Beeccem chip parameter A............................................................................................ 143 Figure 121 ZTE Beeccem chip parameter B............................................................................................ 143 Figure 122 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 1 ............................................................... 145 Figure 123 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 2 ............................................................... 146 Figure 124 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 3 ............................................................... 147 Figure 125 ZTE Beeccem Chip authentication configuration 4............................................................... 148 Figure 126 GCT Card Configure page..................................................................................................... 149 Figure 127 Initial access flow.................................................................................................................. 155 Figure 128 Service setup flow ................................................................................................................. 156 Figure 129 System connection drop flow ................................................................................................ 157 Figure 130 Hard handover flow............................................................................................................... 159 Figure 131 Hard handover duration flow................................................................................................. 161 Figure 132 Land interface........................................................................................................................ 166 Figure 133 Template management interface ............................................................................................ 166 Figure 134 Create indexes template......................................................................................................... 167 Figure 135 Analysis tool interface ........................................................................................................... 167 Figure 136 Choose statistic indexes interface.......................................................................................... 168 Figure 137 Statistic result interface.......................................................................................................... 168 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - xi -
  • 13. WiMAX network optimization TABLE CONTENT Table 1 Information of Interference in DT................................................................................................. 7 Table 2 Noise Floor List of XX Site .......................................................................................................... 7 Table 3 Main Interference List in Each Frequency Band at Site 1............................................................. 8 Table 4 Running the ZXPOS CNT1......................................................................................................... 34 Table 5 State of the status icon function .................................................................................................. 36 Table 6 Note the toolbar button................................................................................................................ 36 Table 7 Toolbar help replay function ....................................................................................................... 37 Table 8 The main interface toolbar .......................................................................................................... 39 Table 9 Toolbar button functions instructions.......................................................................................... 47 Table 10 WiMAX basic information.......................................................................................................... 67 Table 11 Specific abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 70 Table 12 OMC Physicalal Layer Parameter............................................................................................... 81 Table 13 Ranging parameter introduction.................................................................................................. 83 Table 14 SBC parameters introduction ...................................................................................................... 85 Table 15 UL FEC ..................................................................................................................................... 102 Table 16 DL FEC ..................................................................................................................................... 102 Table 17 DIUC recommended value........................................................................................................ 105 Table 18 UIUC recommended configure ................................................................................................. 106 Table 19 Table of admission control parameter explanation.................................................................... 128 Table 20 Congestion control parameters explanation .............................................................................. 132 Table 21 KPI reference value................................................................................................................... 163 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播 - xii -
  • 14. WiMAX network optimization Section1 Wireless Network Planning and Optimization Process & Knowledge l Basic process introduction ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 l Requirement analysis -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level1 l Spectrum scan----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level1 l Single station test -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 l Calibration test ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 l Network evaluation before optimization ----------------------------------------------------------------Level1 l BS cluster optimization ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level2 l Whole network optimization and network evaluation ------------------------------------------------ Level2 l Project acceptance test and report hand in --------------------------------------------------------------Level2 1.1 Basic Process Introduction Network optimizing is a significant point during the wireless network constructing, the function of wireless network always varies while the network is developing, subscriber amount is increasing and subscriber distribution altered. Therefore, network optimization is to guarantee the network function will satisfy the subscribers all the time. The complete flow of wireless network optimization is shown as figure 1.The unnecessary stages in this flow will be cancelled according to the client’s requirement and project situation in actual network optimizing projects. For the optimization of the third party, stages should be selected base on the contract of network optimization. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 1 页
  • 15. WiMAX network optimization Figure 1 Network Optimizing Flow The wireless propogation environment should be ensured firlstly in the process of network optimizing, and then the problems in the network should be solved step by step form part to entire (from single BS to cluster then to whole network). The functions of main stages in network optimization are as below: 1. Requirements analysis: to understand the working target and obtain useful information. 2. Spectrum scanning: to ensure the wireless environment (without interference). 3. Sample station inspection: to ensure a single station works well. 4. BS cluster optimization: to ensure a part of network area works well. 5. Entire network optimization: to ensure the whole network works well. A network optimizing project may adopt the organization structure as a network programming project, which is shown as figure 2. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 2 页
  • 16. WiMAX network optimization Figure 2 Structure of Network Optimizing Project 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 3 页
  • 17. WiMAX network optimization 1.2 Requirement Analysis The purpose of requirement analysis is to obtain the detail requirement of a project, including the client’s anticipation about the result optimized, the standard of checking and acceptance. According to the normal process, the network is already active at this stage; detail information can be collected via communicating with clients. For the network optimization executed by equipment vendor or program designed corporation, the relevant information should be collected by internal approach. In this stage, some information needs collecting and some content needs confirming, such as to know the requirement of coverage and capacity, including the scope of optimizing area, the scope of essential area and the wireless environment of optimizing area, especially the information of area that has particular requirement about data capacity. These areas should be ensured essentially in an optimization process. 1. To obtain the information of current network, including the longitude/latitude, station type, antenna height, sector orientation, declination angle, antenna model, feeder line length, emission power, area wireless parameter programming, etc. 2. To collect the system parameter configuration, including the basic parameters of physicals layout and MAC layout, power control and AMC, handoff parameter, acceptance and congestion control parameters, calling group configuration and IP address scheme, etc. 3. To collect problems of the current network, including client’s complaint and feedback from other paths, especially the most urgent problem which client can not suffer should be solved essentially. 4. To confirm the checking standard of each sub-project, the checking standard should be clear in the contract of network optimization; if it is not clear, these information should be confirmed at the requirement analysis stage; every sub-project in the network optimization should have checking standard, otherwise it will be difficult to confirm whether the optimizing work achieve the standard. 5. To confirm the parameter of each project under testing: including the selection standard, calling mode requirement, testing period configuration (busy, null, load) of the testing path and testing point. 6. To confirm the division between client and us: confirm what task the client should do and what resource the client should provide. For item 4, only if the network optimization is at the third party, the last 3items will be confirmed with client together. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 4 页
  • 18. WiMAX network optimization 1.3 Spectrum Scan 1.3.1 Scanning overview Spectrum scanning is to know whether the interference exists in the system spectrum, including scanning and interference checking. Generally, the scanning is needed; the interference checking should be implemented by the company which has the relevant intelligence. Spectrum scanning is conducted for confirming whether there existing interference within the working frequency band and selects proper channel number with no or little interference for the current network. In the WiMAX system, the TDD mode is adopted by the network, so scanning either uplink or downlink is enough. 1.3.2 Scanning test type and test tools 1.3.2.1 Test type The spectrum scanning can be classified into two types: drive test and fixed location test. The drive test can find possible areas with interference but it cannot identify the accurate locations of interference sources. While the spectrum scanning at fixed locations can search out more detailed information about interfering frequencies, such as their direction and position, strength, etc. Select the test type depending on the actual situation; referring to the Regulations of Frequency Scanning. 1.3.2.2 Test tools 1. Spectrum Analyzer 2. Omni antenna type and antenna gain 3. Filter loss 4. LNA gain 5. Proper RF cable (confirm cable loss) 6. GPS receiver 7. PCMCIA card (or Flash memory/Serial cable/Floppy disk) 8. Laptop 1.3.2.3 Spectrum analyzer parameters setting 1. Central frequency 2. Scanning band span 3. Scan time span 4. Resolution Band Width (RBW): 10 kHz (or actual RBW) 5. Ref level 6. Attenuation 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 5 页
  • 19. WiMAX network optimization 1.3.3 Test procedure 1.3.3.1 Drive test procedure 1. Determine the test routes. It is required that the test routes passes through the whole coverage area as much as possible. 2. Connect the test devices; set the resolution band width (RBW) as 10 kHz; the band width is XX MHz~XX MHz. 3. Conduct the DT on the designated routes, recording the variation information of the signal when passing on different paths. 4. Analyze the test data. 1.3.3.2 Fixed location test procedure 1. Select the test points; 2. Locate with the GPS, recording the longitude and latitude of test points; 3. Connect the test devices, and set the test software properly; 4. Without antenna connection, measure noise floor of the spectrum analyzer. Note that the RBW setting during this step should be accorded with that used in the actual frequency scanning process. If the noise floor is normal, go on to the next steps; otherwise, check out whether the spectrum analyzer can work properly. 5. Connect antenna, filter, etc., and measure the noise floor of target frequency band, then save the result; 6. Interference test: Measure the interference within target frequency band. Note that reserve the test data after the peak value is keeping stable. Repeat such test, until all uplink and downlink frequency bands which need to be measured have been tested. Save results. 7. When the test is finished, output the recorded data or related figure files and complete the test report. 1.3.4 Analysis of test data 1.3.4.1 Analysis of drive test data According to the DT in XX service area, it is found that there exist interference signals within the tested frequency bands (including in the uplink and downlink). The detailed information about the interference is as follows: 1. Distribution figure of positions with interference: mark the positions where there exists interference in the figure and make a serial number for each position. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 6 页
  • 20. WiMAX network optimization 2. Figure of signals received in positions where there exists interference: provide the frequency spectrum figure featuring the interfering signal. For each position, present a corresponding frequency spectrum figure, which can be named after “Interference at the position X”. Data analysis: describe the information of interference in a table like follows. “Position of interference” means the geographic position of the interference. If ensure interference occurs in several positions, present the position where the interference is the strongest. Table 1 Information of Interference in DT Position of interference Center frequency of Interference (MHz) Interference Bandwidth (kHz) Peak Power (dBm) Information of Interference in DT 1.3.4.2 Analysis of fixed location test data 1. Figures of frequency spectrum during frequency scanning: the figure of frequency spectrum generally contains two parts: the background noise and interfering frequency spectrum of each band. Present a figure of interference frequency spectrum for each band; the figure of frequency spectrum is also demanded even though no interference exists in the band. 2. Table of data analysis: background noise measurement means measuring the background noise of the frequency scanning apparatus without the built-out antenna. Conduct such measurement at all sites, with the main purpose of checking out if the frequency scanning apparatus has set properly. If several RBW settings are used during the test, it needs to measure the background noise under each RBW setting and list them in the following table. Table 2 Noise Floor List of XX Site Table Frequency Band (or Channel Number) Noise Floor without Antenna (dBm) Noise Floor with Antenna (dBm) Remark Note: There are only major interference being listed in the above “Interference list”, the interference intensity (power) being generally above -105dBm. In terms of the weaker interferences, they can be 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 7 页
  • 21. WiMAX network optimization consulted from the above frequency spectrum figure. This requirement is the same to the following test points. Table 3 Main Interference List in Each Frequency Band at Site 1 Central Frequency of Interference (MHz) Interference Bandwidth (kHz) Peak Power (dBm) RBW (kHz) Equivalent Peak Power Relative to RBW=10kHz (dBm) 450.048 20 -70 10 -70 450.12 40 -84 100 -94 1.3.5 Analysis of interference in service areas According to the test result of DT, present the areas with relatively strong interference and describe the interference details; According to the test result of the point test, supply the information of the sites with relatively serious interference; Present the information of the frequency bands within which there is relatively much interference; Present the primary analysis about the interfering signals (for example, showing whether the interference signal is regular or not), along with the rough range of the interference intensity (power). According to the result of frequency scanning, we can get the following conclusions: 1.3.5.1 The influence of external interference If interference exists in radio system, it can influence all performance and the most important influence is coverage radius (reverse coverage radius especially). Since WIMAX is a spread spectrum communications system, the low power and narrow bandwidth interference only influence less WIMAX system, but the high power and wide bandwidth interference can interference seriously WIMAX system. There is an example to calculate the influence. An interference calculation example is given in 2500MHz WIMAX system, because there are some PTT systems, radio access system and many illegal users, these high power and wide bandwidth interference will influence seriously the 2500MHz WIMAX system if it is set up. If the interference with 20KHz bandwidth and average –70dBm spectrum power is spread over 1.23MHz bandwidth of WIMAX system, then the rise over thermal (ROT) at BTS receiver is –70+10log10(20/1230)=-87.89dBm. The thermal noise without interference is –108dBm, so this interference makes thermal noise rise 20dB. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 8 页
  • 22. WiMAX network optimization According to Hata formula: L ( dB ) = 46.3 + 33.9log fMHz - 13.82log h - a ( h ) + - 10 10 1 2 (44.9 6.55log h 10 1 ) log 10 dkm - Cm a 2 h h ( ) = 3.2(log 11.75 ) - 4.97 2 10 2 3(In Urban Area) = Cm If BTS antenna height is 30 meters, mobile antenna is 1.5 meters, B is 80 present and frequency band is 2500MHz, so above formula can be changed: L dB dkm ( ) = 129.82 + 35.22log10 The BTS sensitivity is invariable value, so the link budget coverage radius should decrease when the thermal noise is raised 20dB. According to above formula: DL = + d - - d = d 129.82 35.22log 129.82 35.22log 35.22log ( km 1 ) 2 km km d 10 1 10 2 10 km DL 1 = = d km d So: 1035.22 3.7 2 km This means that the coverage radius decrease 1/3.7 times. 1.3.5.2 The influence of external interference on coverage Now give an example, the influence of interference on coverage is as follows: relationship between equivalent interference and coverage radius 100.00% 90.00% 80.00% 70.00% 60.00% 50.00% 40.00% 30.00% 20.00% 10.00% 0.00% -108 -104 -100 -96 -92 -88 equivalent interference(dBm) present of coverage radius and area decrease radius area Figure 3 The influence of interference on coverage 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 9 页
  • 23. WiMAX network optimization 1.3.5.3 According to the result of frequency scanning export conclusions and scanning report. When finished the scanning test, we need to make conclusions and export scanning report. The report format can refer to <WiMAX spectrum scanning report template>. 1.3.6 System OMC uplink spectrum scanning instruction 1.3.6.1 Overview The guide book is writed for WiMAX wireless network optimization. The WiMAX technology has initially with my colleagues in the background, you can directly refer to the instructions of the work flow and processing methods. The guide book is writed for the guidance of WiMAX wireless interference investigation work environment. The main method is to clear away the use of system functions to locate and troubleshoot interference. It supports the functions of the above version 3.20.02B1 version. 1.3.6.2 Uplink spectrum scanning function 1.1 Introduction Uplink spectrum scanning includes two functional modules, the spectrum scanning and analysis of base-band interference. 1.1.1 Spectrum Scan Spectrum scanning function is defined as a prerequisite for access to non-users, in the specified uplink Segment (also designated carrier) on the specified antenna configuration of the entire channel bandwidth for the sub-carrier power (average power or peak power) scan, and reported the results of scanning to the background, which can be configured in the background shows the whole bandwidth of the spectrum (the power of all subcarriers), channel bandwidth and PAPR RSSI, similar to the function of spectrum analyzer. 1.1.2 Analysis of base-band interference For broadband interference, RSSI can be observed in general to judge, therefore, interfere with the analysis of base-band narrowband interference only. Through the analysis of base-band frequency spectrum characteristics of each symbol in order to determine whether there is interference. If there is interference, will be the peak position (interference location) average (subcarriers), and peak position of the variance, more than the ratio threshold, such as the specific results reported to the background. 1.2 The purposes and the basic principles of base-band interference analysis 1.2.1The purpose of base-band interference analysis 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 10 页
  • 24. WiMAX network optimization The received signals of WiMAX system, beside we need the terminal signal, may also include other source signals, the source of the signal system where if falls on WiMAX channel bandwidth, and up to a certain intensity, the interference has become. WiMAX systems will interfere with a certain degree of performance degradation, such as access would cause some users uploading and downloading speeds drop, performance instability. Serious interference will lead terminal unable to access network and so on. Analysis of base-band interference is in accordance with the purpose of setting the parameters of the background base-band sampling and analysis, from the surface to determine whether there is interference. If there is interference, it will interfere with the analysis of the results (such as the interference location) reported to the background, so that we can know which band is the existence of interference in the band WiMAX system settings, you can circumvent the interference of these frequencies, to improve the WiMAX system performance. 1.2.2 The principle of base-band interference analysis According to base-band received frequency domain data for each sub-carrier power calculation, and through 22 sub-carrier power comparison between the subcarriers from the largest power, as peak power, and then divided by the peak power of all other sub-carrier average power , the PAPR. The use of PAPR calculated with the background set the threshold for comparison, if the reporting period exceeds the threshold PAPR specific ratio of the proportion of the background set to illustrate the existence of interference, the results will be reported to the background interference. 1.3 Use instructions 1.3.1 Start conditions WiMAX systems operating normally, the background of the single window alarms (CSIM, MPIM, and WBPM) without warning. No user access (a user can start the scan access, but may interfere with the baseband business and affect the results of the analysis) 1.3.2 Start Methods 1.3.2.1 Spectrum Scan Select [View → System Tools → Analysis of RF / Views → System Tools → RF Analysis] menu, enter the "spectrum scanning / Spectrum Scan" interface. Please refer to follow Figure 4 and Figure 5. The more detail operation of spectrum scanning, please refer to the document of<WiMAX spectrum scanning guidance>. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 11 页
  • 25. WiMAX network optimization Figure 4 The opening of the spectrum scanning method Figure 5 Opening of the methods of scanning the spectrum 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 12 页
  • 26. WiMAX network optimization Select [Scan Settings spectrum / Set] or click the icon on the toolbar settings to scan the network element / NE setting, and choose to scan the antenna / Select antenna, the type of scan / Scan type setting (power scan or peak power scan), the duration of scanning / Report working hours (m), the data reported to the cycle / Report period (s) and so on. As follow figure 6. Figure 6 Spectrum scanning parameters set Choose [to start scanning the spectrum / Start] or click the icon on the toolbar to start scanning. 1.3.2.2 Analysis of base-band interference Select [View → System Tools → Analysis of RF / Views → System Tools → RF Analysis] menu, enter the "base-band interference analysis / Interfere Analyse" interface. As follow Figure 7 and Figure 8. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 13 页
  • 27. WiMAX network optimization Figure 7 Opening of the base-band interference analysis method Figure 8 Opening of base-band interference analysis method 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 14 页
  • 28. WiMAX network optimization Select [base-band interference analysis set / Set] or click the icon on the toolbar settings to scan the network element / NE setting, and choose to scan the antenna / Select antenna, the duration of scanning / Report working hours (m), data reported to the cycle / Report period (s) and so on. In the "threshold PAPR" / PAPR threshold (dB) text box, enter the PAPR threshold value specific value, unit of dB; in the "threshold than the proportion of over peak value" / Overrun PAPR threshold (%) text box Enter "Over peak value threshold than the proportion of" the specific value of 0.01 units, enter the 20 representatives of 20%, as shown in Figure 6. Here, to determine whether to select the threshold of interference is crucial. If the selected threshold is too low, more power will be part of the normal data ruled Dead; if selected threshold is too high may result in undetected Dead. According to "Simulation Analysis of Interference Rejection Report V1.1", a number of interference statistics to determine the threshold rate and the miscarriage of justice under the ignore judge rate, and bit error rate value, and ultimately set the threshold for interference: QPSK way to determine the interference threshold to 10.5dB, 16QAM interference approach to determine the threshold 12.5dB, check the nearest whole number can be input. Over peak value threshold proportion can input according to requirements. Figure 9 Analysis of base-band interference parameters 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 15 页
  • 29. WiMAX network optimization Choose [the beginning of base-band interference analysis / Start] or click the icon on the toolbar to start scanning. 1.3.3 Stop method 1.3.2.3 Spectrum Scan Select [stop spectrum scanning / Stop] or click on the toolbar to stop scanning. To stop the success of the interface in the log to stop the success of tips given. To stop the failure of the interface in the log the reasons for failure are given prompt. 1.3.2.4 Analysis of base-band interference Select [Analysis of base-band to stop scanning / Stop] or click on the toolbar to stop scanning. To stop the success of the interface in the log to stop the success of tips given. To stop the failure of the interface in the log the reasons for failure are given prompt. Reported the results of 1.3.2.4 1. Spectrum scanning: Open Scan function if successful, will be given in the log to open a successful interface prompts; in the "spectrum scanning table," observed reported RSSI, PAPR, such as data, network element every cycle, a return to a news report in the spectrum scanning Table interface to add a record, as shown in Figure 10. Figure 10 Spectrum scan result In the "scan curve plot of the spectrum" can be observed that the bandwidth of the spectrum graphics, as shown in Figure 11: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 16 页
  • 30. WiMAX network optimization Figure 11 The curve plot of spectrums scanning Map abscissa bandwidth on behalf of the band, the representative of power ordinate. Clear away function if the failure to open, in the log the reasons for failure are given prompt interface. 2. Baseband interference analysis: If you open the base-band interference analysis of the success of the interface is given in the log to open a successful tips. If the open fails, the log gives the reasons for failure prompted interface. After the success of start, if there is interference (ie, memory cycles calculated in the base-band sub-carrier average power ratio PAPR PAPR set the background threshold high, and the proportion above the threshold set to meet or exceed the proportion of the background), will be the peak position (interference location) average (subcarriers), and peak position of the variance, more than the ratio threshold, such as the specific results reported to the background. If every report period returns a message, in the spectrum scanning interface will add a record, as shown in Figure 12. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 17 页
  • 31. WiMAX network optimization Figure 12 Base-band interference analysis reported result Reported the results of three major parameters: 1. The peak location (the location of interference) average / Interference Location Average, 2. That is the figure reported to the sub-carrier, 3. From No. subcarriers can be provided in accordance with the method followed to calculate the frequency bands where interference. 4. Peak location variance / Interference Location Variance, 5. This parameter can be compared to determine whether interference with a fixed location in the same 6. The peak position of the variance is zero, at one place, as the Figure peak location variance is zero of 512. 7. That interference in the 512 fixed on the sub-carrier. The deviation value is more small, 8. Interference occurred in the more fixed position, 9. Contrarily. 10. The location of interference 11 not more fixed. 12. More than the specific ratio of the threshold / Over Threshold Ration, 13. The main report shows that in a cycle, 14. PAPR exceeds a set threshold ratio. If there is no interference, then there will be no background in data reporting. The definition of interference is related to the setting threshold of PAPR and the proportion of the over threshold value. Notes: 1. Background PAPR threshold set to 0 when data should be reported, but there is not interference. 2. Detection of interference, the need to constantly adjust the settings background PAPR threshold, so that the peak position reported to minimize the variance (preferably 0), this report should be the peak position is relatively fixed to the existence of interference the location of the. Bandwidth on the 10M and 7M, the peak position of 512, corresponding to its center frequency; 5M bandwidth for the peak position 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 18 页
  • 32. WiMAX network optimization of 256, corresponding to its center frequency. 10M, 5M width of each sub-carrier is about 10K, 7M about 7K, it can interfere with the location value, center frequency, the width of each subcarrier to calculate about the existence of band interference, this can also scan curves with the spectrum to see. 3. To detect the existence of band interference can be by modifying the system to the center frequency band to avoid interference. 1.3.6.3 Other notes WiMAX as a result of the current agreements and products are constantly improved, updated hardware and software faster than each of the requirements and objectives of the test is not entirely consistent. Up-to-date information, therefore, to understand the changes in the parameters, the complete network optimization is a necessary condition for network optimization is also a goal. The guide book may be the upgrade version of change. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 19 页
  • 33. WiMAX network optimization 1.4 Single Station Test 1.4.1 Single station test scope and objective This document describes drive test and network statistics acceptance test procedure for Preliminary Acceptance (PA), Final Acceptance (FA) & Stability Acceptance (SA) and RF systems performance criteria for a WiMAX 802.16e wireless network using hardware and software provided by vendor. The purpose of single station testing is to make sure each station works well, to avoid someone affects the entire performance. The single test main include two parts: Single site verification test and Coverage area verification test. 1.4.2 Single station test verification requirement 1.4.2.1 Single site verification RNP Singles site verification (SSV) shall be one of requirement for the WiAMX Rollout network to achieve service readiness. On completion of site installation, the vendor shall perform alarm parameter consistency check before site activation. The drive test routes shall include serving areas for 3 sectors and to have handover between sectors. The drive test measurement shall be conducted on normal working day within 9am to 10 am. Vehicle speed should not be more than 70km/h. The vendor shall perform single site Verification by having RSSI and CINR Coverage scanning for all sector. Single Site Verification report is to be submitted no later more than 2 days after site activation. The report shall include but not limited to the following: Site information, Defined measurement test routes, Drive test coverage plot, and Drive test measurement logs. Coverage scanning includes RSSI and CINR & Tx Power data collection. Basic functionality test include: Call setup (VoIP), Packet setup (FTP), Download and upload Throughput (FTP), Intra-site handover. 1.4.2.2 Coverage area verification All data shall be collected in mobility condition and test areas within the designed service coverage area. The “designed service coverage area” is defined as the coverage polygon. The data collected shall be evenly distributed within the designed service coverage area. 1.4.2.3 Coverage area KPI target Data shall be collected under mobility condition and complete agreed drive test route. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 20 页
  • 34. WiMAX network optimization Field measurements by drive tests (air interface measurements) will be carried out to measure and validate the coverage of the cluster. Drive tests shall be performed using WiMAX scanner and having statistically significant number of data. All data collected shall be logged and recorded for post-processing and verification. For Single Site Verification(SSV), the KPIs target are: At least 90% of the measured downlink RSSI shall be greater or equal to -85dBm. At least 90% of the measured downlink CINR shall be greater or equal to 10dB. 1.4.3 Single station test verification contents 1.4.3.1 Single site information verification Before Single Site Verification test, We must confirm the following site information: · Radio Specification: Antenna Azimuth, Mechanical Down Tilt, Antenna Type, Antenna Height · Cell Configurations: BS_ID, Frequency, Preamble_Index, TxPower 1.4.3.2 Functional test verification Functional test must include the following: · Functional Test: Network Access, Ping Test, Throughput Test, Intra-site HO, Inter-site HO 1.4.3.3 Drive test result After drive test, we export coverage test plot. · Drive test Plot : Drive Test Route, RSSI Coverage Plot, CINR Coverage Plot, Tx Power Plot 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 21 页
  • 35. WiMAX network optimization 1.4.4 Coverage test verification contents 1.4.4.1 Configuration information In first part give planned and optimization configuration information, it must include the following site information: · Site_ID, Cell_ID, BS_ID, Cluster, Azimuth, M_Tilt, Frequency, Premble_Index , TX_Power, Antenna_Height 1.4.4.2 Coverage polygon In this part there should be coverage polygon plot. The RSSI of polygon layer is more than -85 dBm. The CINR of polygon layer is more than 10 dB. 1.4.4.3 Coverage street information The report should give a table file of coverage street name, and a mapinfo file of coverage polygon. 1.4.5 Single station and coverage test verification report When finished the verificatiost test, we need to collect test results and export test verification report. The report format can refer to the document of <WiMAX single site verification report template>. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 22 页
  • 36. WiMAX network optimization 1.5 Calibration Test Adjustment test is used for testing the loss in different environment, so that the coverage of other environment can be calculated according to the data of the environment that has been tested. Adjustment test consists of items below during network optimizing: 1. Indoor penetrating loss testing i. This process is to test the loss between Indoor and outdoor, in order to know the Indoor coverage situation according to the drive test. ii. Through the concurrent test of two terminals Indoor and outdoor, the Indoor penetrating loss can be obtained according to the receiving power of the weo terminals. 2. Vehicle antenna adjustment test i. This process is to test the loss of vehicle antenna; it is used for the tools which need vehicle antenna. The test result of inside vehicle can be deduced according to the vehicle antenna testing. ii. Put the antenna of testing tool inside or on the top of the vehicle, according to the signal strength, the gain between vehicle antenna and inside can be obtained. 3. MS antenna test i. This process is to test the signal difference between the MS antenna and inside vehicle, the inside coverage effect can be deduced according to the testing data of MS antenna. ii. Connect the MS antenna with the vehicle top and test the receiving power, compare with the receiving power of inside vehicle, the antenna gain in normal situation can be obtained. 4. Test of average penetrating loss in vehicle i. Test the signal difference between inside and outside vehicle, calculate the outside communicating position according to the inside testing data, such as the coverage effect of pedestrian path. ii. Put two terminals at normal positions inside and outside the vehicle, test using PING package concurrently, and make a record of the receiving power in both circumstances, the penetrating loss can be got after comparing. All adjustment testing should use multiple test points, the final value should be the mean value. When the testing values are being preceded, the coverage effect of different environment can be obtained according to the test result inside vehicle. If the condition of above equipments (including vehicles) are not in accord, the adjustment testing should be added in the CNT1 and get the loss roaming value, to assure the modification of testing tool will not affece the accuracy of result. If the condition of above equipments (including vehicles) are not in accord, the adjustment testing should be added in the CNT1 and get the loss roaming value, to assure the modification of testing tool will not affece the accuracy of result. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 23 页
  • 37. WiMAX network optimization 1.6 Network Evaluation before Optimization Before optimization, to estimate the situation of network has effect in two aspects: 1. to compare with the network after optimization and know the optimizing effect; 2. to find out the problem in current network, this will be the guidance for network optimization in future. Tasks in this stage: The flow of network estimation is show as figure 13. Figure 13 Brief Flow for Network Evaluation Tasks in this stage include: 1. Confirm whether OMC data can be provided, transitted network needs to be coordinated; confirm whether the data estimation is needed. 2. Define the parameters which are confirmed by the contract and client. If no requirement is in the contract, the parameters should be defined as universal values or sub-branch company 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 24 页
  • 38. WiMAX network optimization confirmed; the parameters include test path of DT(drive test), test point of CQT(call qualty test), test time, calling method; and confirm the test method for data operation, such as FTP or Iperf. 3. Confirm the estimating project and standard, if this is not provided, it should be given by client; if client can not do this, and general standard should be involved for estimation. 4. Make a plan: including the requirement of time, staff and resource. Time should be confirmed by client, DT、CQT and OMC can be operated in parallel or serial according to the requirement of resource and time. 5. Data collection: DT test, CQT test, and OMC data collection should be operated according to predefined parameters: i. DT test consists of urban DT and main roads DT, record datas DL received, such as RSSI, CINR, inverse emission power, connection times, successful connection times, lost connection times, DL/UL data rate, handoff times, handoff delay, etc. ii. CQT test is operated in dense urban area only, which is to test voice and data. Record datas DL received, such as RSSI, CINR, inverse emission power, connection times, successful connection times; iii. OMC target is the entire network data, which generally includes successful calling rate, lost rate, and adjust according to the client’s target. 6. Data process: obtain the result of estimated project according to the standard and data clooected before, such as RSSI coverage, CINR coverage, maximum data rate, DT, CQT and OMC should be treated respectively. 7. Marking: mark DT, CQT and OMC repectively and then get the total mark. 8. Problem analysis: analyze the problem area according to the estimated result, find out the problem, such as handoff causes lost, block induces bad coverage. 9. Planning suggeation: the suggestion for network construction should be given according to the current problems, to solve the network problem is first aim of network problem in this stage. Write the report for network estimation, network estimation finish after client confirm. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 25 页
  • 39. WiMAX network optimization 1.7 BS Cluster Optimization The purpose of BS cluster optimization is to locate in sections and solve problems in the network, which may have peoblems in network estimation, cluster testing and others. Frequent problems are: low quality voice, high lost rate, and calling difficulty, low data rate, calling failure, long setup time and low successful handoff rate. Tasks of BS cluster optimization are introduced as below: For a large network, especially an unfinished projest, or malfunction BS is in a network, it is necessary to divide the whole network into small clusters, and optimize one by one. This method decreases the difficulty of optimization, which is named as cluster optimization. BS cluster optimization includes tasks below: 1. BS cluster division i. The entire network should be divided into clusters before optimization, generally less than 19 BTS (BS amount in standard network topology), overlap should exist between contiguous BSs. ii. BS cluster is marked by the standards below: topography business requirement. The areas have particularly needs in data or voice should be marked in the same cluster, so problems can be solved easier. The areas which have same problems in networks should be marked in the same cluster. 2. BS cluster optimization: i. BS clusters can be optimized in serial or parallel according to the resource siyuation and time requirement. ii. Solve problems in different topics: such as coverage, business, handoff, etc. iii. Base on the information about problems of network estimation and cluster test, engineers analyze the problems and make the solution. iv. After the adjustment is implemented (including the site adjustment and parameter adjustment), engineers should test the area where problems exist; if problems have been solved, go to next stage, otherwise it should be analyzed again. v. After all problems have been solved, engineers should test the entire BS cluster and collect information of acceptance checking; it meets the acceptance, go to optimize the next cluster, otherwise the affecting elements should be analyzed and optimize furthermore. vi. After every BS cluster meets the standard of acceptance checking, go to optimize the entire network. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 26 页
  • 40. WiMAX network optimization 1.8 Whole Network Optimization and Network Evaluation After all BS clusters have been optimized, the entire network needs optimizing to solve the problem between BS clusters. When the retire network meets the requirement, the network function can be known by estimation. Tasks in this stage: After all BS clusters optimization has been finished, systems in most areas should work well, but in some area, especially the clusters overlapped area, problems might exist. These parts should be adjusted considering function guide to achieve the final target of network optimization. The working flow is as below: 1. Understand the optimizing purpose which is the target should be achieved. 2. Confirm the testing route, including all important coverage area. 3. All around driving test. 4. Analyze testing data, find out problems in the network and make an adjusting scheme. 5. Implement the scheme and test to verify. 6. Analyze the testing data, comfirm whether it achieves the prospective target. If it achieves, go to next problem, otherwise optimize further. 7. If all problems have been solved, go to the network estimation after optimization, test the optimized area according to the acceptance checking standard. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 27 页
  • 41. WiMAX network optimization 1.9 Project Acceptance Test and Report Hand in Project acceptance checking is to test the project according to the contract or agreement. The inspecting standard is in the contract or agreement. Tasks in this stage include items as below: 1. Make a plan, start testing after the person who is charge of this confirms. 2. Determine the testing route and set the parameters according to the contract or agreement; if no regulation is in the contract, we should consult with client; the CQT test is probably needed based on the contract. 3. Test and record the data in background, write <checking testing report> according to the data; if the nerwork meets the standard, write <wireless network optimizing report>; if the network not meets the standard, check after analyzing and solving problems; client’s staff should participate in the the process of testing and analyzing to guarantee the the result and report can be admitted by client. 4. Report should be handed in to the client after checking, communicate and introduce the process, problems, optimizing implements and result, according to the report, <checking and acceptance report> and <acceptance and checking report>, client confirm the effect of optimization. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 28 页
  • 42. WiMAX network optimization Section2 Network Planning Issue & Knowledge l Optimization test tool introduction ----------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 l Optimization test -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 l RF optimization subject -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level1 l Access and paging ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level1 l Handover technology --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level2 l Power control optimization -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Level2 l Receive control and congest control--------------------------------------------------------------------- Level3 l MIMO technology ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level4 l HARQ technology ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level4 l FFR technology -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Level3 2.1 Optimization Test Tool Introduction 2.1.1 Optimization test tool CNT introduction 2.1.1.1 Overview WiMAX network optimization tests were aimed at knowing the work status of the network through signal test. Prepare to optimization and adjusting for the network, Optimization of the current equipment is ZXPOS CNT1 software, GPS, GCT card. This document will be introduced this system to install and use the CNT. 2.1.1.2 The use of ZXPOS CNT1 2.1.1.2.1 Test process 1. According to the test need to select hardware devices (hardware option for the GPS, GCT card terminal). 2. Received computer equipment (please refer to equipment manuals, equipment, connectivity and understanding of the operation parameter configuration). 3. Running ZXPOS CNT1, testing of the equipment on the computer port. Test software will automatically identify the type of equipment and the completion of the configuration parameters related to communications (equipment testing method of the parade, please refer to 2.1.1.2.2 of this 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 29 页
  • 43. WiMAX network optimization chapter). 4. Click on Main Menu [File → Save ...] or click the toolbar to enter the test mode, save the test data. At this point test software from a variety of devices to read the test parameters, and save documents in the test. If the test does not save data, click the toolbar button , enter the test mode LIVE. 5. Through the main menu on the [WiMAXView], the function of various window open to observe the wireless parameters. 6. The test is completed, click the toolbar , you can stop recording the test data. 7. Exit the ZXPOS CNT1. 2.1.1.2.2 Hardware detection and configuration Hardware detection and configuration is in the Explorer window of the Device Config page. ZXPOS CNT1 hardware detection offers two ways: the attention of the G card WiMAX terminal CNT software must be running before the insertion port, otherwise it is impossible to detect. 1. Manual detection: the need for the user to confirm the device connected to the port, as well as types of test equipment. Realizing that the equipment connected to the port, as well as the type of device, they can quickly complete the configuration of equipment. Steps are as follows: i. Click on Device Config page Explorer window, the window shows a tree of all the ports on your computer. ii. Click on the port connection of the equipment. iii. Click the right mouse button, pop-up shortcut menu and select the type of equipment testing: GPS device is connected click [Detect GPS]; iv. At this time the name of the port in the back, will show the current state of testing. If the equipment successfully detected, the port will automatically mount the following device name. If testing fails, what ports do not show the back (when the detection fails, the users need to refer to equipment manuals, carefully testing equipment, as well as the connecting device parameter settings). 2. Automatic detection: test software to scan all the ports, the port automatically detects the device. Scan all the ports, often rather time-consuming. 3. Steps are as follows: i. Click on Device Config page Explorer window, the window shows a tree of all the ports on your computer. ii. Click the right mouse button, pop-up shortcut menu, click on [Auto Detect All]. iii. At this time the name of the port in the back, will show the current state of testing. If the equipment successfully detected, the port will automatically mount the following device name. If testing fails, what ports do not show the back (when the detection fails, the users need to refer to 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 30 页
  • 44. WiMAX network optimization equipment manuals, carefully testing equipment, as well as the connecting device parameter settings). 4. Intelligent Detection: ZXPOS CNT1 will check and test equipment by previous hardware configuration, if the device is detected the same with last time, it will enter automatically the Live Testing mode. When the equipment and their connection mode are fixed, it is the fastest check and test mode. Flexibility uses the three testing methods that can enhance the work efficiency. 2.1.1.2.3 Hardware configuration interface introduced Hardware configuration of the interface is located in the Explorer window Device Config page, Figure 14 has been configured for the hardware after the completion of the Device Configure window. Figure 14 Hardware configuration windows 1. Build In: i Sim Navigator: Simulation of GPS, when the computer does not have a GPS device and any connected or not mandatory Indoor Navigator when selected, the system will automatically use the simulation of internal GPS, the GPS will automatically generate random GPS positioning information. ii Indoor Navigator: If the Indoor test, select this. 2. COM: hardware serial number is located. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 31 页
  • 45. WiMAX network optimization 3. Right Menu: i. Detect GPS: detected on the selected serial port GPS; ii.Detect Phone: detected on the selected serial port terminal; iii.Detect PNScanner: detected on the selected serial port PNScanner; iv.Auto Detect Drv: serial port on the selected type of automatic hardware detection; v. Auto Detect All: detected in all serial port hardware; vi. Smart Detect Dev: according to the previous devices, the intelligent detection; vii. Delete Device: delete the selected hardware device; viii. Delete All Devices: remove all the hardware serial port; viv. Live Rec Mode: access to real-time recording mode, so that the work equipment, and real-time data display window (Note: At this time data is not recorded in the document); vv. Advanced Config: hardware-driven pop of the Advanced Configuration window shown in Figure 15; Figure 15 Advanced configuration window 1. Enable Advanced Settings: Advanced Settings parameter functions do not use the default high-level parameters; 2. Phone DM Baud: Baud rate Terminal Diag Mode. If you specify a baud rate, can greatly enhance the detection rate of terminal, but the wrong settings, will detect the failure terminal. The default setting is Auto Band (Automatic baud rate); 3. Phone Model: number of terminals of the need to test the use of special software in order to allow detection of success-to-end. If you use these terminals, you must use this feature. These terminal: LG FWD, LG fixed Desk; HY FWD, HY fixed Taiwan; ZTE PTT, ZTE's PTT terminal; Custom, custom high-level features, from technical support staff under the guidance of the use; General Qualcomm, Qualcomm general chip terminals, this type by default. 4. GPS Detect Time: GPS to check the time, units of seconds, default is 5 seconds. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 32 页
  • 46. WiMAX network optimization 5. Note: The appropriate use of advanced settings that can effectively reduce the testing time, but inappropriate settings, this will result in detection of the failure of equipment, such as the baud rate is set wrong. 6. View Drv Status: See the hardware type of status information. 2.1.1.2.4 Hardware configuration interface introduced If you want the process of testing equipment, suspension equipment testing, you can right-click Device Config page will pop up as shown in Figure 16 dialog box. Click <Yes>, the software will be the suspension of the testing equipment. Figure 16 Suspension of the dialog box testing equipment 2.1.1.3 Work interface The main ZXPOS CNT1 standard WINDOWS interface style, through the main interface can be easily out of the window functions. Main interface Main interface to provide the following elements: 1. Main menu: a variety of functions out of the window; 2. Article Tools: Quick out of the window function used; 3. Explorer window: responsible for equipment configuration and window management; 4. Title bar and status bar: shows the status of software and equipment. Click [Start → Programs → ZTE Netscope Solution → ZXPOS CNT1] to start the main program ZXPOS CNT1, the operation of the main screen shown in Figure 17. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 33 页
  • 47. WiMAX network optimization Figure 17 The main operation interface There is a number of ZXPOS CNT1 state, each state corresponds to a specific function. Operation is divided into three categories according to their functions, are as follows: device configuration status, test status, replay status. Specific description of a variety of state in Table 4: Table 4 Running the ZXPOS CNT1 Sub-state name Function description System Init System Init state system is activated Device Config Device Configuration Device Config Device configuration System Close System Close the system is shut down Live Testing Live Testing to test the state of real-time testing, software to read data from the device, but does not save data Logging Logging records, and software to read data from the device and the data stored in the APT document Test status Logging Pause Logging Pause to suspend the data files stored in the APT, but the software still read data from the device 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 34 页
  • 48. WiMAX network optimization Sub-state name Function description Logging Stop Logging Stop the closure of test files, return to the status of Live Testing Replay Init Replay Init state replay replay initialization in progress Replaying Replaying are replay Replay Pause Replay Pause replay of the suspension Replay status Replay Stop Replay Stop to stop replay 2.1.1.4 Window interface 2.1.1.4.1 Title bar Figure 18 Main interface title bar Title bar shows the version number ZXPOS CNT1 (see Figure 18). 2.1.1.4.2 Menu bar Figure 19 Main interface menu bar 1. [File] menu, including documents and procedures on the operation of the option; 2. [View] menu, including custom testing program, TCP / IP data acquisition, mapping the way show the window; 3. [WiMAXView] menu includes a variety of software pieces of WiMAX wireless parameters of the chart; 4. [Tools] menu include a variety of software parameters setting and commonly used tools; 5. [Window] menu include the option to operatation for procedures window; 6. [Help] menu include versions instructions of procedures and help document the options. 2.1.1.4.3 Status bar Figure 20 Main interface status bar As shown in Figure 20: 1. The status bar of the first column shows the time to end the current test, are to be connected to 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 35 页
  • 49. WiMAX network optimization display terminal; 2. The second column shows the terminal with the current test model; 3. The third column shows the current status of testing of the GPS; 4. The fourth column shows the Hint software information; 5. The fifth column shows the battery power of information: that the use of alternating current blue and green that the use of battery; 6. The sixth column of four icons of the status information display system, as shown in table 5; 7. Seventh column shows the CPU usage information. Table 5 State of the status icon function Icon Functional Description Equipment operating normally, without any warning The existence of alarm. Click on the icon, you can pop-up warning dialog box to view specific content Alert Process equipment is state of the state or the replay Live Testing procedures or in the Logging Pause state, test data is not saved to the hard disk Logging procedures, and test data saved to the hard disk GPS did not lock the satellite GPS satellite lock Did not collect TCP / IP, PPP data, click on the adjustable DataMonitor Acquisition is TCP / IP, PPP data, click on the adjustable DataMonitor 2.1.1.5 Toolbar Figure 21 Main interface toolbar Toolbar to place a commonly used shortcut menu button, the button on the toolbar of the function refer to Figure21. The right side of the toolbar where shows the status of software running, the meaning of running status in Table 6. Table 6 Note the toolbar button button description of function menu item Road test data to open File→Open Road test data preservation File→Save Rapid deployment (when replay is not visible, see Chapter IV) Shortcut button for the F2, in the device configuration window of the shortcut menu, there is also the corresponding function. Test (when replay is not visible, in the device configuration window 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 36 页
  • 50. WiMAX network optimization button description of function menu item that there is no test of red, yellow, said Live Testing, green means Logging, said purple Logging Pause). Tip: When the software Live Testing state, and then click this button, you can revert to the status of device configuration shortcut menu, there is also the corresponding function. Suspension of the test data record (save the test data can be seen) File→Pause Logging To stop recording the test data, return to a state of Live Testing (save the test data can be seen) File→Stop Logging Explorer window to show or hide Cascade window Window→Cascade Horizontal window Window→Tile Horizontally Placed vertical window Window→Tile Vertically Test data View→Data Test Road Mapping View→Route Map Basic Information Map WiMAX View→WiMAX Basic Info Base station information map WiMAX View → WiMAX Communication Info WiMAX data throughput WiMAX View → WiMAX Data Throughput WiMAX air interface message browser WiMAX View→WiMAX Air Interface Message 2.1.1.6 Replay toolbar If the program in a replay state, the main interface will increase the replay toolbar is as follows: Figure 22 Replay toolbar Description of the function of the button, please refer to table 7. Table 7 Toolbar help replay function Button Description of function To replay the first file Suspend replay Mobile players back Article To stop replay 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 37 页
  • 51. WiMAX network optimization The beginning of replay Article players move Document to the end of replay Speed up the replay speed manual Replay speed of the current paper is the number of times the normal speed, 1x, said normal speed, 2X speed that is twice the normal, 1/2X that half of normal speed, followed by analogy. : Rolling block shows the current replay position, at both ends of scroll bar documents show that the test starting time, most of the time the right side shows the current replay time point. 2.1.1.7 Right key menu toolbar In replay mode, the menu label to provide replay time, this feature can be precisely set the current replay position, and automatically record the location of the recent set of replay. Figure 23 Set replay position 1. Auto Fill: Auto Fill settings are data replay. Article replay when the drag, the program automatically to the current replay before the data to fill some time to read and fill. Propose to open this function. 2. Set Replay Positon: set the replay point to the location, see Figure24. The lower half of the menu, indicating that the user has recently set the replay position: 1. C said that this time of CPU time (CPU Time); 2. S said that the time to end this time (Time Stamp). Figure 24 Set replay position 1. CPU Time said that the time set for the CPU time; 2. TimeStamp that time set up time for the terminal. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 38 页
  • 52. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.1.8 Menu and function analysis ZXPOS CNT1 software features a simple menu description. Table 8 The main interface toolbar menu drop-down menu options Function New File New to open the device configuration window Open Open to open the road test data Save Save to preserve the road test data Close Close to close the road test or the closure of a state document Export … Export to the road test data into a CSV file Introduction Recent APT File a recent road test data list Quick Config Rapid deployment of Quick Config Live Testing Live Testing stagnant document Save As Default Project save the current project settings to the default settings of the project Load WinPos From Default Project Project item from the default settings in the location of the window loading Load Cell Site base station loading information file Unload Cell Site uninstall the base station information file Recent Cell Site Files document the most recent list of base station information Open Project File… Open the project file Save Project File Save project files Recent Project File project documents have recently Save Window Position preserve the location of documents saved as POS Open Win Position Files open the window position Recent Win Position Files the location of the recent file list File Close All Windows close all windows (except for device drivers window) 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 39 页
  • 53. WiMAX network optimization menu drop-down menu options Function Exit Exit from the main program Data Test View Data Test Data Test View Data Monitor TCP / IP data collection Route Map Road Mapping WiMAX Logon Tool WiMAX network landing WiMAX Basic Info WiMAX Basic Info display RSSI, CINR, TxPower, Per and other information WiMAX Communication Info base station information WiMAX Air Interface Message Air Interface Message WiMAX Modulation Statistics modulation coding WiMAXView WiMAX Date Throughput The throughput of uplink and downlink Replay Bookmark Replay Bookmark General Options System Parameters System Mode Configuration System Mode Configuration option settings Alarm List Alarm List List Device Alarm Configuration Parameters alarm system hardware configuration Measurement Alert Configuration configuration of alarm parameters Cellsite Color Settings Cellsite Color Settings area custom color Tools Cellsite Information Cellsite Information Browser Cascade Cascade window Tile Horizontally horizontal window Tile Vertically placed vertical window Window Minimize All minimize all windows Content Help Content Help About … Version Information 2.1.1.9 Explorer window When ZXPOS CNT1 started, Explorer window automatically follow the start, used for equipment configuration window management. Explorer window has two TAB pages, which respectively are Device Config and Windows Windows. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 40 页
  • 54. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.1.9.1 Device Config TAB this page as shown in Figure 25, the main equipment used for the configuration. Figure 25 Device Config page 2.1.1.9.2 Windows TAB pages of this as follow Figure 26; it is used for window management. Figure 26 Window management page 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 41 页
  • 55. WiMAX network optimization Window management page, as well as by the type of equipment, business classification, classify various windows. Selection box which in front of window name expresent that it has been opened. Users can click the name of the pre-selection window frames, corresponding to open or close the window. 2.1.1.10 Refresh rate to adjust the window style and the curve In the main menu of the [View] and [WiMAXView] the most out of wireless parameters in the chart window has the following functions: to change the refresh rate window, and modify the style curve. These two functions can be right from the window out menu, right menu, as shown in Figure 27. Figure 27 Wireless Parameters window menu chart 2.1.1.10.1 Adjust wireless parameters window refresh rate chart Test software will be updated from time to time the chart window, the frequency of updates can be a window through which the right settings menu. High update frequency, data display will be more timely, but a little waste of the computer's CPU resources. Window refresh rate can be based on your computer's performance, as well as the number of access equipment to carry out the necessary adjustments. Test software has a window to the default refresh rate of the optimized parameters of good, in the absence of special circumstances, do not propose to adjust. Refresh rate to adjust the function of the window at right-menu: Update 250ms: update rate of 250ms in the window; Update 500ms: update rate of 500ms in the window; Update 1000ms: to 1000ms window update rate; Update 1500ms: Update to the rate of 1000ms window. 2.1.1.10.2 Style curve adjustment Wireless parameters of the chart window menu [Series Options], adjustable to adjust the curve style window, as shown in Figure 28: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 42 页
  • 56. WiMAX network optimization Figure 28 Chart Option dialog box In the left side of the Chart Options window is a list, the list shows the name of the curve, right curve shows the currently selected style information, the meaning of each parameter as follows: 1. Series: curve style i. Color: box on the left shows the color curve, and size, click on this box may pop-up color settings dialog box, modify the color of curve; ii. Width: the width of curves. 2. Axis Range: The range of axis i. X Max: X-axis end position (starting at 0); ii. Y Min: Y-axis location of the starting point; iii. Y Max: Y-axis end position; iv. Y Axis Automatic: Y-axis by the value for the automatically adjust the size. 3. Dialog box button function i. Ok: Save parameters, and close the dialog box; ii. Default: the use of test software default parameters; iii. Cancel: cancel settings, close the dialog box. Note: The set of parameters will be stored in the settings file, the next time you start testing the software automatically loads. 2.1.1.11 Test software projects When replay or turn off the test paper test, the test software will automatically position the window, set the parameters of the base station to open information file, the map is loaded automatically saved in a project file. In the name of the project document and test the same extension RPJ. Next time open the test document, the software will automatically load the project file and restore information. Test software in the start time, will automatically load a default project file, commonly used to automatically open a window to load the map and the base station information. Through the main 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 43 页
  • 57. WiMAX network optimization menu of the [File → Save As Default Project] to set the default item. In the General Options window, you can modify the project to load test software settings. 2.1.1.12 Export of test data ZXPOS CNT1 test data to provide rich functionality to export, open the test document, through the main menu of the [File → Export ...], could be released Export Manager window, the window has two pages in Figure 4, respectively, 12, Figure 4 13 show. 2.1.1.12.1 Export pages Export page of Export Manger, which shows a variety of export-related parameters settings, as shown in Figure 29. Figure 29 Export Manager—Export page 1. File Format: the exported file format types; the current version only supports export CSV data types. 2. Export Type: the type of export: the current version only supports export of the Map Data. i. TA Data: search engine of the multi-path information; ii. Map Data: display geographic data, including time, latitude and longitude, as well as in the Map window to show the wireless parameters (such as power); iii. Layer 3 Message: WiMAX empty message can be exported to worry too much about LogMask parameters; iv. Phone Debug Message: Terminal Debug information; v. Diag Packet Message: test message packets can be exported to worry too much about LogMask parameters; 3. Export L3/Diag Packet Message Option: Export empty message news as well as test additional 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 44 页
  • 58. WiMAX network optimization option package i. Precise Time Stamp: the use of precise time information; ii. Export Raw Data: Export news source flow; iii. Export Decode Tree: Export tree decoding messages; iv. Export Page Channel With IMSI: No. by IMSI paging channel information is derived; v. Export Debug Message Content As Message Name: When the Diag Packet Message when exporting to Debug messages were a direct hit on the news. 4. Export: Export of state information i. File Name: store export data file name; ii. Phone: Select export terminal; iii. Progress: Export of progress. 5. Function button i. Export: Export test data; ii. Close: Close the test window. iii. LogMask page Export Manger of LogMask page, showing the LogMask and export-related parameters, as shown in Figure 30. Figure 30 Export Manager—LogMask page Export news when empty test packet or message, can LogMask settings, export the contents of the filter. Message in front of each name has a check box, only selected information will be derived. 2.1.1.13 Subsection of test data Analysis based on actual need, and sometimes we need to specify the test data for analysis to a specific time, specific steps are as follows: 1, open the installation directory ZXPOS CNT6.2 under the implementation of the APT Extractor 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 45 页
  • 59. WiMAX network optimization documents, such as C: Program Files ZTE ZXPOS Solution Shared Tools APT Extractor; 2, double-click the file, import test data, as follows: 3, in accordance with the regression testing time for the specified time period, click the Execute button, the sub-started, and save documents in the appropriate directory, as follows: 4, the implementation is complete, that is, to preserve the successful, click Exit from the button, in preserving the directory to generate the test file Specified period of time is the test data, and then will be able to import the relevant software for analysis. 2.1.1.14 Route map Through the use of geographic-based display can be measured in the way of clear understanding of when the current position and test the geographical distribution of the parameters. Through the main menu [View → Route Map] or click the toolbar to open the Route Map window, as shown in Figure 31. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 46 页
  • 60. WiMAX network optimization Figure 31 Geographical display windows Mapping on the road showing where the current location, and real-time on the importance of WiMAX test display geographic data. If load the base station information, it also shows that the base station location. Figure 31 shows a window divided into three parts: 1. The top section as a tool; 2. The left for information display list and data switch; 3. The right mapping for the path. 2.1.1.14.1 Toolbar introduction Figure 32 Route Map window toolbar Please refer to the function table 9, mapping the road Right-click on the shortcut menu that pops up also has the same function, the function refer to the basis of this table. Table 9 Toolbar button functions instructions Button Description of function corresponding shortcut button menu item Enable the mouse to the arrow, the current does not have the mandate Mouse features Arrow drag the map Hand Reduce the map Zoom Out 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 47 页
  • 61. WiMAX network optimization Button Description of function corresponding shortcut button menu item Zoom map Zoom In Center Map Center Measuring the distance between two points Road test shows a complete line of Show Bounds Show Bounds Road test shows a complete line of base stations, as well as a complete map At present the road show more than the scope of the measuring point, the automatic stay Base layers show The text messages show the base station (PN, base station name) (Need to load the base station information) Find a station Layer control (see 6.1.2) Shows the current location Set display to activate the connection (the need for information into the base station) Candidate Itemsets shows connection (need to load the base station information) Marker display User-defined label settings Open the base station information file (*. ZRC) Documents into layers (*. Tab) Open Map File… Map parameter settings (see 6.1.4) Legend set up (see 6.1.3) Map Theme PN custom colors (see 8.2) 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 48 页
  • 62. WiMAX network optimization Button Description of function corresponding shortcut button menu item Marker option When you click on the toolbar of the "Layer Control", "Legend Set", "PN custom color", "map parameters", such as button, the dialog box will pop up; see the use of the specific introduction of the following. 2.1.1.14.2 Control Layer Map to show the way in addition to mapping, but also can display the map. Map layer is displayed superimposed on the Map, through the control layer can be managed on the layer. Click on the toolbar, the Layer Control dialog box will pop up, as shown in Figure 33. Figure 33 Control layer dialog box Box with the buttons and fields are as follows: 1. Layers: that the current layers in the map, their order on behalf of the layers in the map of the order of Z-axis. IndicateUserDrawLayer, RouteTestUserDraw Layer, CellSiteLayer layers for the system, can not they "delete", "indicate that" the operation. 2. Up: up to move the selected layer. 3. Down: to move the selected layer down. 4. Add: add a layer. In the pop-up dialog box, choose the one or more of the TAB file layer to join the list. 5. Remove: delete the selected layer, layers can not be on the system for this operation. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 49 页
  • 63. WiMAX network optimization 6. Properties: the properties of modified layer options: i. Visible: it can be seen that the system can not make this layer; ii. Selectable: whether to allow the contents of the layer to select the operation; iii. Automatic Lables: automatic labeling of the layers, showing label information, such as display names, place names, such as the need to map file support; iv. Display: adjustment layer display options, under normal circumstances, is not recommended to do this; v. Labels: adjustment layers tab options. Tags can adjust the font, size, location and so on. 2.1.1.14.3 Theme setting When the time set for the Legend, click on the toolbar, and at this time Custom Theme dialog box will pop up, as shown in Figure 34. Figure 34 Themes Settings dialog box The top left of an edit box that is currently editor of the Legend was the name of the bottom of the left has set out that the current name of a good legend. Current Template: Legend displays the current settings for each band of the situation, by clicking the color box and modify the value of edit box, you can modify the legend; 1. Ranges: modify the current order of legend; 2. New: create a new legend; 3. Delete: delete the current legend; 4. Save: Save current settings; 5. Save As: save the current name with another legend; 6. Check: Detection of the current Legend if there is any illegal settings; 7. OK: the application of the current mapping legend on the road; 8. Cancel: Cancel to close the window; 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 50 页
  • 64. WiMAX network optimization 9. Set Symbol: Legend of the current symbol set. Can choose to show in the path map symbol font, modify the size of symbols. As shown in Figure 35; Figure 35 Themes setting dialog box――SetSymbol 10. Auto Generate Values: by setting the initial value (Initial) and the incremental value of (Delta), the procedure automatically generates a series of order value. The value of the first n-order size: Initial + n * Delta. As shown in Figure 36. Figure 36 Themes setting dialog box――Auto Generate Values 2.1.1.14.4 Map parameters setting Click on the toolbar, and Map Options dialog box will pop up, as shown in Figure 37. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 51 页
  • 65. WiMAX network optimization Figure 37 Map parameters setting 1. Set line color and adjacent areas of the label area i. ActSet: Set the connection settings to activate the color; ii. CadSet: Set the connection settings the color of the candidate; iii. Label PN Text: Tags for small districts to fight when the PN values showed that Area; iv. Label Name Text: to play on the label area, indicating the name of district; v. Draw Cell Site Transparent: transparent painting area, or by the district allowed the district to fill the color PN. 2. Area map style settings i. CellRadius: Area occupied by the pixel value of the radius; ii. RepeaterRadius: Repeater occupied by the pixel value of the radius; iii. TextRadiusOffset: Cell value tag of the PN from the edge of the pixel cell value; iv. NB Line Width: the width of the connection area of the pixel value; v. CellSite Color: set the base color of the map, you can choose the type: PN, BTSID, BTS Type, and Transparent. 3. Map Display Settings There are two types of MAP Map: Vector Map (vector map), Bitmap Map (bitmap maps, map data source is a picture, can be passed in the MapInfo location three ways to create). Bitmap types when loading a map, the map will be times when the GPS location of the position and is biased, can now display settings by modifying the map be amended. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 52 页
  • 66. WiMAX network optimization i. Auto Select Map Type: whether the MAP automatically selects the type of map; ii. MidLon Adj: bitmap map center longitude and latitude to ad just the local map and GPS position location is biased, the regulation of this parameter. 2.1.1.14.5 Custom label settings When measured in the way, you can add mapping road marking in order to note the need to pay attention to some information, such as dropped calls, the switch problem areas. Click the toolbar, a pop-up dialog box User Note, as shown in Figure 38. Figure 38 Custom label settings The button in the dialog box as follows: 1. Add: Mapping the way to the edit box to add user-defined label; 2. Cancel: Cancel. 2.1.1.14.6 Marker parameters When you click on the toolbar and Marker Option dialog box will poped up, as shown in Figure 39. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 53 页
  • 67. WiMAX network optimization Figure 39 Marking Options settings window 1. CallEvent Call each event corresponds to an icon, if the selected mapping in the way shown in the corresponding event icon. 2. User Note Font Set user-defined label fonts. 3. User Note Option i. OffsetX: mark the shift in the X-axis, in pixels; ii. OffsetY: tagging in the Y-axis offset, in pixels; iii. Show Note Icon: Mapping in the way shown on user-defined icon marked; iv. Show Note Text: Mapping in the way shown on user-defined label text; v. Marker Layer on Top: Marker layer at the top of all layers; vi. Show Map Scale: show scale. 2.1.1.14.7 Find the base station When you need to find a base station in that location, click the toolbar, the Find Cell will pop-up dialog box, as shown in Figure40. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 54 页
  • 68. WiMAX network optimization Figure 40 Find cell windows 1. Cell Name / BTS ID / Cell PN: To find the information input; 2. Find Type: Select type of search, according to BTS ID, sector of the PN, the names of three types of sectors; 3. Direction: Select to find a way (forward or backward); 4. Find Next: Find the next meet of the base station; 5. Cancel: Close this dialog box. 2.1.1.15 Information display and switch Information displayed and switched, as shown in Figure 41. Figure 41 Information display This is a collapsible list, the list there are three, namely: Values (WiMAX), Information, Legend. The right of people to show that there is, and then folding up the current item was not carried out, through the click of the Mouse, that is, the right will become, at the same time, this will be carried out. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 55 页
  • 69. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.1.15.1 Values (WiMAX) Values (WiMAX) are available for WiMAX geographical display of the number of parameters selected in the road on the geographical mapping display. Both tests and replay, the switch can be arbitrary. Values (WiMAX) were launched, as shown in Figure 42. Figure 42 Information display――Values (WiMAX) 2.1.1.15.2 Information Infomation shows the current value of the parameter point of the test. Information was launched, as shown in Figure 43. Figure 43 Information display――Information 2.1.1.15.3 Legend Legend shows the mapping of the current Road Legend, Legend was launched, as shown in Figure44. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 56 页
  • 70. WiMAX network optimization Figure 44 Information display――Legend The top of the "Legend: WiMAX RSSI", said the name of the current Legend is the RSSI, and the following legend of the bands that set. 2.1.1.16 Drive test map Drive test map can show the geographical parameters of the distribution, maps, current location, as shown in Figure 45. Figure 45 Drive test map Mapping the road will be based on user settings for dynamic rendering of the legend, the map with different colors that belong to different order of value. Red circle on the map that the current position. If load the base station information, it also can be displayed on the map of base sation position. In replay mode, double-click a test point, replay position to the click-position auto-position. At any time, double-click of a base station, Map window with the Cell Site Info window displayed synchronized. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 57 页
  • 71. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.1.17 Data test Data Test window used for testing data services. By choosing [View] menu under the Data Test, can turn Data Test window, Figure47, 48, as shown in Figure49. Data Test has three pages, respectively, corresponding to the following three functions: program customization, testing, and test statistics. 2.1.1.17.1 Plans setting page automatic test plan Plans Settings page was used for the customed test plan, as shown in Figure 46. Figure 46 Data Test windows - Test Plan Settings page Plans Settings page of the meaning of various parameters are as follows: 1. General Settings column shows the current testing program to select items of public property: i. Service Type: Set the type of test items, including the PPP, FTP, HTTP, Ping and the establishment of network connectivity Connect; Note: Connect-item test is not an independent type, but for the follow-up testing of automatically establishing a dial-up network connection, enabling users do not need to manually dial-up before testing in order to facilitate the implementation of the test. When to FTP, HTTP, Ping test, the proposed plan as the first test. ii. Continuous: settings are for testing; iii. Count: the number of repeat test set (only available non-continuous test); iv. Duration: the duration of the test set (only available non-continuous test); v. Idle Time: Set the interval between two tests of time. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 58 页
  • 72. WiMAX network optimization 2. Service Settings column shows the current testing program to select attributes of the business: Different types of testing operations, the business property is different, the following were introduced. i. Connect the operational attributes:  Entry: set up a dial-up connection network name, the right button to set the connection attribute, the button for new dial-up connection;  User Name: set up a dial-up connection user name, by the ISP service providers;  Password: set up a dial-up connection user name corresponds to the password;  Redial if Drop: chain automatically redial settings, select this if, in connection will be automatically dropped even. ii. PPP business attributes: PPP testing of the business the same attributes and connect. iii. FTP operational attributes:  Host: set up FTP server host address;  Port: set the data access port;  PASV: set whether or not to use passive mode to establish a connection;  User Name: set up FTP server login user name;  Password: set up FTP server login password;  Anonymous: registry settings are anonymous FTP servers;  Timeout (s): set timeout;  Direction: set download or upload transfer;  Restore: HTTP settings are;  Local File: Set the local file path and file name, the right button to select the file path through the dialog box;  Remote File: Set the remote FTP server file path and file name. iv. HTTP operational attributes:  URL: set up data access to the uniform resource address;  Direction: setting is to download or upload;  Timeout (s): set timeout;  Local File: Set the local file path and file name for the right button to select the file path through the dialog box. v. Ping operational attributes:  Host: set target host address;  Packet Size (bytes): Set the size of packets;  Timeout (ms): set the timeout (unit: ms);  Ping Times: set up for each test the number of packets sent;  Delay (ms): Send Ping command set up between two of the delay (unit: milliseconds). 3. Application attributes: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 59 页
  • 73. WiMAX network optimization i. Apply: parameters were revised effective button, click to confirm the parameters of the modified parameters to the test plan update; ii. Ignore: parameters were revised effective button, click to give up the parameter changes. 4. Plans to list the right: List in the plan to show the current test plan document, all tests, the current testing of the selected parameters will be displayed in the left and allow them to amend. Before each test item has a check box, only the selected item will be to take these tests. Drag can be adjusted test of the order of testing. List the meaning of each field please refer to the General Settings page on the description column. Toolbar button: : a new test plan; : Open the test plan; : Save test plans; : Export test plans; : the addition of a test plan; : Delete the currently selected test program. 5. Test i. Start Test button: only-to-end testing and the procedures to enter the record mode when effective. Click Start Test, Call Monitor will be set up by the Program for testing. ii. End Test button: only the beginning of the test before it becomes binding, click End Test, to stop the ongoing test. 2.1.1.17.2 Message Test page news shows Message log messages, including a list of test and test the progress of the two parts of the list, as shown in Figure47. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 60 页
  • 74. WiMAX network optimization Figure 47 Data Test window - Test page news 1. News List Data services in the state of the testing process to the form of log messages displayed in the message list. Log messages of different operations in different colors, in which PPP is green, FTP and HTTP message to blue, Ping message to dark blue, dropped calls; connection failure error message is red. i. ID: said information sequence; ii. Date Time: Time that the information generated; iii. Message: message specific. 2. List progress Table shows the progress of the plan to participate in the current test item and test progress. i. ID: the number of test plan, test plan and a list of selected items of the corresponding plans; ii. Service Type: the service type of test items; iii. Count (Current / Assigned): tests (the first number of the current / plan to designate the number of repeat); iv. Duration (Current / Assigned): the test duration (the duration of the current testing / plans to designate the duration of each test); v. Status: the current state of the test items, including the waiting, running, error, cancel, the completion of five possible state. 3. Right menu list message: i. Pause: news updates suspended; ii. Clear All Messages: Clear all messages; iii. To Replay Position: replay when effective, will select the corresponding point in time 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 61 页
  • 75. WiMAX network optimization information added to the replay tab, and from this point in time to start replay. 2.1.1.17.3 Throughput shows the throughput of the page Throughput page can shows graphics of the throughput, and data transmission status, statistical information, as shown in Figure 48. Figure 48 Data Test window-data throughput of the page 1. Graphics throughput Curves of different colors to show the FWD PPP (the downlink PPP throughput), REV PPP (the uplink PPP throughput), FWD FTP (the downlink FTP throughput), REV FTP (the uplink FTP throughput), FWD HTTP (the downlink HTTP throughput), REV HTTP (the uplink HTTP throughput). 2. Right menu graphics throughput i. Update 500ms: graphics refresh rate to 500ms; ii. Update 1000ms: graphics refresh rate to 1000ms; iii. Update 1500ms: graphics refresh rate to 1500ms; iv. Show In Kbytes: that the throughput in Kbytes selected for display, or to be displayed in units of Kbps; v. Option: color and line throughput curve settings. 3. Transmit information tables: i. Service: the current transmission, FTP or HTTP; ii. State: the current state of transmission; iii. Total Size: the current test to the total data transfer size; 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 62 页
  • 76. WiMAX network optimization iv. Completed: the size of the current has been completed; v. Direction: From the current transmission to or download; vi. Progress: The progress is expressed as a percentage; vii. Load Time: transmission time; viii. Avg Throughput: average transfer rate, units of Kbps (equivalent to the value of the total data transfer size / transfer of the total time, while the curve shown for the instantaneous transmission throughput). 4. PPP calls and transfer tables: i. Sent: The number of bytes sent to connect; ii. Received: Received bytes in one time connection; iii. Band Width: The current bandwidth connections; iv. Duration: The time of connection has been going on; v. Call Count: The numbers of the current test call; vi. Success Count: the success of the current number of test calls; vii. Fail Count: the failure of the current number of test calls; viii. Drop Count: The number of the current test dropped. 2.1.1.17.4 Statistics show page Figure 49 Data Test window-statistic page 1. Ping packets statistic i. ID:sequence number; ii. Host: target host address; iii. Sent: sent data packets; 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 63 页
  • 77. WiMAX network optimization iv. Received: receive data packets; v. Lost: lost data packets; vi. MinimumRTT: mimimum receive and send time; vii. MaximumRTT: maximum receive and send time; viii. AverageRTT: averages receive and send time. 2. PPP connect statistic i. ID:sequence number; ii. Dial Begin Time: dial begin Time; iii. Dial End Time: dial end Time; iv. Setup Time: setup time. 2.1.1.18 Data Monitor Data Monitor to monitor IP, TCP, UDP traffic, as well as the acquisition PPP signaling, ICMP packets. Apart from Data Monitor and Data Service Test can be used, but also can be arbitrary based on the TCP / IP protocol software or network of commercial streaming media player software, such as IPERF, Flash Get, Net Ant, Cute FTP, Internet Explorer, Bitcomet, Real Player, Media Player, eMule, etc.. By choosing [View] menu under the Data Monitor, can activate the Data Monitor window, as shown in Figure 50. Figure 50 Data Monitor windows Window on the meaning of each parameter is as follows: i. FWD IP: prior to the IP total number of bytes to receive; ii. REV IP: Reverse IP total number of bytes sent; iii. FWD TCP: prior to the TCP receive a total number of bytes; iv. REV TCP: Reverse TCP total number of bytes sent; v. FWD UDP: Forward UDP total number of bytes to receive; vi. REV UDP: Reverse UDP total number of bytes sent; 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 64 页
  • 78. WiMAX network optimization Data Monitor window provides two control buttons below: i. Monitor Start: Start Monitor Driver, now can begin to monitor the TCP, UDP, IP layer, and the acquisition PPP signaling, ICMP packet; ii. Monitor Stop: stop the Monitor Driver. Data Monitor to start moving, the status bar icon (gray) will be reduced to a (blue), click on the icon could be released also Data Monitor window. Configure Logging Mask through the Logging Mask settings, can be more convenient to start the Data Monitor. Data Monitor collected PPP signaling and ICMP packets, you can Diag Packet Message, as well as in Diag Packet Message Summary observation. Flow information can be in the Data Throughput or WiMAXView → Data Throughput in the observation. 2.1.1.19 WiMAX Logon Tool WiMAX Logon Tool window shows the landing interface WiMAX terminal Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Logon Too] can open WiMAX Logon tool window, as shown in Figure51. Figure 51 WiMAX system landing interface 2.1.1.20 WiMAX Logon Tool WiMAX basic information display RSSI, CINR, TxPower, personnel and other information. Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX basic information] can open the window WiMAX basic information, as shown in Figure 52. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 65 页
  • 79. WiMAX network optimization Figure 52 WiMAX basic information Specific meaning of each field is as follows: field description RSSI received signal strength index CINR carrier / interference and noise ratio TxPower Transmitting power Per packet error rate 2.1.1.21 WiMAX Communication Info WiMAX Communication Info display BS Mac Adress,UL Perm Base, DL Perm Base ,Current Preamble Index,Previous Preamble Index, Hand Over Cout,Hand Over Fail Cout,Resynchronize Cout, PER Receive Cout, PER Error Cout etc. Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Communication Info] can open WiMAX Basic Info window, as shown in Figure53. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 66 页
  • 80. WiMAX network optimization Figure 53 WiMAX basic information Specific meaning of each field is as follows: Table 10 WiMAX basic information field description BS Mac Address Base Station Mac Address UL Perm Base Perm Base uplink DL Perm Base Perm Base downlink Current Preamble Index Preamble sequence current Previous Preamble Index Preamble previous sequence Hand Over Count Hand over times Hand Over Fail Count Hand over fail times Resynchronize Count The number of re-synchronization PER Receive Count The number of error packets received PER Error Count The number of error packets 2.1.1.22 WiMAX Air Interface Message Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Air Interface Message] can open WiMAX Air Interface Message window. As shown in Figure54. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 67 页
  • 81. WiMAX network optimization Figure 54 WiMAX air interface message 2.1.1.23 WiMAX Modulation Statistics Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Modulation Statistics] can open the window WiMAX Modulation Statistics. As shown in Figure55. Figure 55 WiMAX various adjustments of the data encoding 2.1.1.24 WiMAX Date Throughput WiMAX Date Throughput received MS window to line up and down the TCP / IP and UDP data throughput. Through the main menu of the [WiMAXView → WiMAX Date Throughput] can open the window WiMAX Date Throughput. Horizontal axis is time; vertical axis is the throughput, unit Kbps / Kbytes, different colors representing different data types, as shown in Figure 56. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 68 页
  • 82. WiMAX network optimization Figure 56 WiMAXView window-data throughput page 1. Graphics throughput Curves of different colors to show the FWD IP (Downlink IP throughput), REV IP (uplink IP throughput), FWD TCP (downlink TCP throughput), REV TCP (uplink TCP throughput), FWD UDP (Downlink UDP throughput), REV UDP (uplink UDP throughput). 2. Right menu graphics throughput i. Update 500ms: graphics refresh rate to 500ms; ii. Update 1000ms: graphics refresh rate to 1000ms; iii. Update 1500ms: graphics refresh rate to 1500ms; iv. Show In Kbytes: that the throughput in Kbytes selected for display, or to be displayed in units of Kbps; v. Option: color and line throughput curve settings. 2.1.2 Optimization analysis tool CNA introduction 2.1.2.1 Introduction CNA 7.5 is targeted at WiMAX standard way to measure the development of analysis software, this version supports the CAN in addition to the basic analysis, the new WiMAX high-level of analysis, and this article is for WiMAX to provide detailed analysis of the new features and operating instructions, aspects of the user's operation. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 69 页
  • 83. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.2.2 Terms, definitions and abbreviations Abbreviations used in this article dedicated table 11. Abbreviations have been the first one according to their alphabetical order. Table 11 Specific abbreviations abbreviations original text meaning CNA Communication Network Analyzer Network Analyzer tool CNT Communication Network Test Network Test tool 2.1.2.3 Comprehensive description 2.1.2.3.1 Background ZXPOS CNA1 is 2G/3G wireless network optimization software for professional analysis. It is based on future test data, performance data background, base stations, GIS and other information, using charts, geography, and replay, such as intelligence analysis of wireless network performance, network optimization guidance. 2.1.2.3.2 Product Overview CNA1 not previously support the WiMAX standard, CNA1 for WiMAX is a new version, the version with the most basic functions of CNA at the same time add WiMAX analysis. This version supports the CNT V6.3 and V6.5 versions of the APT test data in support of GCT, Beceem, and Sequence of three-chip data acquisition. This version features support the following sub - 1, CNA basic analysis functions; 2, physical layer, IP layer, application layer bandwidth analysis; 3, interference analysis; 4, delay, jitter, packet loss rate analysis 2.1.2.4 Specific functions description 2.1.2.4.1 Basic function analysis CNA has the light version of the basic functions, including: 1. Data file management (load, Consolidation) 2. Site information documents management 3. The basic analysis functions i. Geographical analysis (including statistical BIN) ii. Spreadsheet analysis 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 70 页
  • 84. WiMAX network optimization iii. Chart Analysis iv. Message Analysis v. Data delete functions (internal function) 4. Data broadcast 5. Data query and filtering. 2.1.2.4.2 Segment'RSSI and Segment'CINR functions Base stations based on the RSSI and CINR functions displayed on the map in the Map of the designated base station RSSI and CINR, the concrete operation is as follows: 1. Open the Map form 2. Map map Preamble and input Frequency (KHZ) value and click on GO, the map will show the corresponding base station RSSI, CINR value. 3. Map by right-clicking directly on the base map can also show that the corresponding base station RSSI, CINR value (click on the following map is 0_2515000). 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 71 页
  • 85. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.2.4.3 Call event analysis and delay statistics Open the Analysis-> WiMAX Call Analysis ....... Analysis of interface, including a summary description of the specific circumstances of each call. 2.1.2.4.4 Analysis of handover events Open the Analysis-> WiMAX Handoff Analysis ......., Analysis of the interface is as follows: Through using right key menu can locate the corresponding handover event. 2.1.2.4.5 Interference Analysis Interference algorithm is as follows: Interfere with the results of the analysis corresponds to the NI field WorkSpace. 2.1.2.4.6 Analysis of dropped calls Open the Analysis-> WiMAX Dropped Analysis....... 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 72 页
  • 86. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.2.4.7 Calls, handover of the incident shows the geographical Open Map; select the Marker Setting, configuration WiMAX events have shown that: 2.1.2.4.8 Jitter Analysis of packet loss rate This version of the new data services in an increase of TCP / UDP support, TCP / UDP is used to test TCP or UDP layer jitter, packet loss rate, bandwidth parameters. The two new add table of CAN (TCP UDP Transfer Staics and Jitter Lost Rate) support for TCP / UDP test results indicate as following: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 73 页
  • 87. WiMAX network optimization 2.1.2.4.9 Table part of the meaning of Item Value 1. WiMAX Table Table i.Link Status That the current link state: value significance 1 LINKUP_ACHIEVED 2 PHY_SYNC_ERROR 3 MAC_SYNC_ERROR 4 RNGING_FAILURE 5 SBC_FAILURE 6 PKM_FAILURE 7 REGISTRATION_FAILURE 8 DREG_RECEIVED 9 RESET_RECEIVE 10 IN_IDLE_MODE 11 IN_SLEEP_MODE 12 NETWORK_ENTRY_IN_PROGRESS 13 WAIT_FOR_NETWORK_ENTRY_CMD 14 WAIT_FOR_PHY_SYNC_CMD 15 CARD_MOVED 16 CARD_INSERT 17 SHUT_DOWN_RECEIVED ii.UpLink Througput and DownLink Througput Uplink and downlink throughput, unit Kpbs. 2. TCP / UDP Transfer Static Table i. TCP / UDP Agreement test, 1: TCP 2: UDP 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 74 页
  • 88. WiMAX network optimization ii. Direction Operational direction of the test, 0: Download 1: From iii. State The current state of business connections, 0: Unknown Status 1: Connect 2: off 3: Transmission. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 75 页
  • 89. WiMAX network optimization 2.2 Optimize Test 2.2.1 Test Content Network optimizing include test and parameter optimizing, test can provide basic data and validate for optimizing. The primary testing item includes coverage and system pointer principle, ect. Test should use the way which was recommend, and it also can change the operation type and test environment by following business and locale’s required. About loading explanation: WiMAX adopt AMC techniques, so come to speak from rate of flow single station’s flow is not the fixed value, but interpose certain slot numerical value is fixed, WiMAX air-interface resource can be unified quantum with SLOT numerical value. If loading, we can make use of fixed position to force to carry out the high order code way to do simulate loading. 2.2.1.1 Cover Test Describe the index covering include: DL RSSI, DL CINR and UL RSSI, UL CINR. Think about DL RSSI and CINR is preamble value, it only be effected by rated power, and UL RSSI and CINR were effected by power control deploy and operation, so generally we can know about the network’s cover condition through DL RSSI and CINR test. Collecting UL Tx, UL and DL throughout and other data at the same time can describe network’s cover condition. Make use of BE business stream to do test. Suggesting do test by carry idler. Make use of moving test as testing method. 2.2.1.2 Throughout Test Testing include single user test and single segment. Working Ping, Iperf, FTP, be in progress counting. Think about make use of BE to do test; adopting method continuing testing way. 2.2.1.3 Cut-over Test Describe the index that cut-over in test include cut-over in success rate, cut-over time ( the time from initiate cut-over to gain IP). Think about UGS’s high preferential step, adopting UGS business stream to do test. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 76 页
  • 90. WiMAX network optimization Suggesting make half carry test. Making use of cyclicity test method. Making moving and fixed position test. 2.2.1.4 Calling Test Describe the index that calling in test include calling in success rate, calling time ( the time from initiate calling to gain IP). Think about UGS’s high preferential step, adopting UGS business stream to do test. Suggesting make half carry test. Making use of cyclicity testing method. Making moving and fixed position test. 2.2.1.5 Operation Test Describe the index that operation in test includes time delay and jitter. Working PING is in progress counting. Think about UGS user in testing. Suggesting do test by carry idler. Making use of continuing test way. Do moving and fixed test. When doing moving test, paying attention with the throughout of whole covered area, and the rate at area’s edge. When doing fixed test, paying attention with different signal intensity, cover rate of MCS should correspondence. 2.2.1.6 Handoff Success rate/handoff time Think about UGS testing. We make use of continuing testing method. Moving test 2.2.1.7 Lose Words Rate Active ( IP ) connecting link is rupture.Active(IP)take off net check function open. Because the lose words rate test generally beginning with cover test, think about making use of BE to do test. Making use of continuing test way. Do moving test. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 77 页
  • 91. WiMAX network optimization In generally, making use of testing by carry idler is OK, if customer order to do loading test, we usually make use of fifty percent, closing loading way to load or other ways to load. 2.2.2 Testing Method 2.2.2.1 DT Testing The detail of testing method should refer to DT testing guides book. 2.2.2.2 CQT Testing The detail of testing method should refer to CQT testing guide book. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 78 页
  • 92. WiMAX network optimization 2.3 RF Optimizing Subject 2.3.1 RF Optimizing Goal RF optimization goal is making the cover signal be optimization, considering the balance of the uplink and downlink broadcast path, the test parameter of cover optimization primary is DL RSSI and DL CINR. Do optimization can through modulate antenna and transmit power. RSSI this parameter is the most important index for test covering, through the transmit power we can work out actual link loss. RSSI is the important reference for regulate rated power. Because of the segment’s RSSI increasing maybe cause jamming with other neighbor segment, logical RSSI should be whole general considered with cover to select.RSSI. CINR this parameter can combine with RSSI, and then we can evaluate DL jamming and yawp. It is the most important reference parameter for jamming optimization. If the CINR value is bigger, the system’s cover will be better. 2.3.2 Antenna Optimization Antenna optimization, it generally following the locale’s terrain and things, through regulating antenna’s direction and down obliquity to reach optimize RF cover goal. The specific method is primary follow the testing cover chart regulating antenn. If necessary, we can change the antenna height or building position, making use of the electricity down obliquity and other ways. 2.3.3 Calibration Power Optimizing Calibration power set up preamble power, Calibration power optimizing ensure the system could working in credible working area; in the same time, under the antenna cover was affirmed situation, the Calibration power’s value, is the first factor which can effect cover. If Calibration power is great, this area will have good cover situation, but it maybe disturb neighbor area, so Calibration power should be reasonable installed, default situation will install power by programming power, and then according to the test situation do regulating. Calibration power’s installing refer to <Calibration Power Guide> 2.3.4 Interference’s Searching and Frequency Scanning In actual network, there may being several kinds of disturbing, so must remove outside jamming first, and then doing system parameter optimizing. The direct method of finding out interference is frequency scanning. The specific method refers to 3.3 frequencies scanning. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 79 页
  • 93. WiMAX network optimization 2.4 Access and Paging In order to optimize net, it is mandatory to know the basic net connection and page procedure, the rough introduction is below. 2.4.1 Basic connection flow 2.4.1.1 Connection flow chart Figure 57 Connection flow chart 2.4.1.2 Small area option and downlink synchronization At the initial phase or after signal lost, the terminal will get the downlink signal channel. If the terminal stores the last operational parameter, then it should try to regain the recorded downlink signal channel firstly. If failed, then it starts to scan the possible downlink signal channel continuously within downlink until it finds an effective downlink signal. As long as physicalal level gets synchronization (), MAC level manages to get the control parameter of downlink signal channel and then the control parameter of uplink signal channel. The downlink physicalal synchronization for WiMAX system depends on Preamble. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 80 页
  • 94. WiMAX network optimization MAC level will search for DL-MAP MAC management information. As long as terminal receives at least one DL-MAP information, it will get MAC synchronization. After downlink synchronization, the terminal waits for UCD information from base station, in order to get the parameter group from uplink signal channel. Main information: DCD and UCD 2.4.1.2.1 OMC parameters chart below Table 12 OMC Physicalal Layer Parameter SN Parameter Meaning Instruction PHY_MODE PHY Layer Mode 802.16 Protocol dedines kinds of PHY layer working mode: SC、OFDM、OFDMA,ZTE-WiMAX system uses OFDMA. DL_FREQUENCY Downlink Frequency Unit: kHz ChannelBW Physicalal Channel Bandwidth Values: 5M, 10M, etc FFT_SIZE Points of Fast Fourier Transform Scalable FFT is used for PHY layer of OFDMA, FFT is adding when PHY channel bandwidth is increasing. PHY channel bandwidth can be 1.25MHz 、5MHz 、10MHz 、20MHz, which corresponding to 128、512、1024、2048 in FFT. CYCLE_PREFIX Cyclic Prefix Time domain waveform of OFDMA symbol is generated by IFFT. Time structure of each symbol consists of two parts: usefull symbol time Tb and Cyclic Prefix(CP)。 FRAME_DUR_CODE Frame Length It represents the length of a frame, which is defined as the interval time between beginnings of preambles. DUPLEX_MODE Duplex Including two methods: Time Division Duplex (TDD) and Frequency Division Duplex (FDD). TTG Emmission Transform Time It represents the transforming interval between downlink subframe and uplink subframe when OFDMA works in TDD mode. The BS change into receiving from emitting. UL_INIT_TX_TIMING Uplink Initial Emmision Deviation It represents how long the uplink initial emission before UL_Allocation_Start_Time. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 81 页
  • 95. WiMAX network optimization 2.4.1.2.2 Physicalal Layer Parameter OMC Configuration Figure 58 Physicalal Layer Parameter OMC Configurations Remark: the conversion between PS and us, PS=4/Fs in OFDMA, for example as 10M bandwidth (sampling frequency=11.2M ), PS=4/Fs=4/11.2M, approximate at 0.357us. 2.4.1.3 Ranging The main purpose of Ranging is for uplink synchronization and uplink power control. As for uplink synchronization, it requires the uplink signal from different distance and different customers’ terminal can reach base station at the same time. The main reasons of uplink nonsynchronization of mobile telecommunication are due to multiple customers’ interference and multi-channel transmission. In addition, Ranging is also divided into period Ranging, BW requesting Ranging, handover Ranging. Main information: Ranging-REQ and Ranging-REQ. 2.4.1.3.1 Ranging parameters Ranging parameter table is as below. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 82 页
  • 96. WiMAX network optimization Table 13 Ranging parameter introduction Parameter Meaning Instruction RNG_CO DES_ST ART The initial number of Ranging In same frequency organized network, if the channel configuration of BS in a cell is same as the channel configuration of BS in another cell (including the sameness of channel and UL_PermBase), the Ranging code transmitted by MS will be received by BS in adjacent cell, these BSs would feedback RNG-RSP to the MS, this causes interference and affect access. In this circumstance, different Ranging code number is necessary to be configured for BSs in adjacent cell. INIT_RN G_CODE S The quantity of initial Ranging code Base on the initial number of Ranging code and the initial quantity of Ranging code, the interval of Ranging code can be obtained as S ~ (S + O) mod 256, where ‘S’ stands for the number of Ranging code (RNG_CODES_START); ‘O’ stands for the quantity of Ranging code (INIT_RNG_CODES). PRDC_R NG_CO DES The quantity of Cycle Ranging code Cycle Ranging code is located behind initial Ranging code. Its interval can be obtained according to the initial number of Ranging, the quantity of initial Ranging code and the quantity of Cycle Ranging code. BW_RE Q_CODE S The quantity of bandwidth request Ranging code The bandwidth request Ranging code is located behind the cycle Ranging code. Its interval can be obtained according to the initial number of Ranging, the quantity of initial Ranging code, the quantity of cycle Ranging code and the quantity of bandwidth request Ranging code. HO_RN G_CODE S The quantity of handoff Ranging code The handoff Ranging code is located behind the bandwidth request Ranging code. Its interval can be obtained according to the initial number of Ranging, the quantity of initial Ranging code, the quantity of cycle Ranging code, the quantity of bandwidth request Ranging code and the quantity of handoff Ranging code.` INIT_RN G_BKO_ START Ther size of initial Ranging backhaul window For the initial Ranging, if MS does not receive RNG-RSP within the time of T3, it means the competition is failed, MS will enlarge the backhaul window doubled and compete again. 2.4.1.3.2 Ranging OMC parameter configuration Ranging parameter configuration is as below. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 83 页
  • 97. WiMAX network optimization Figure 59 Ranging OMC parameter configurations 2.4.1.4 SBC negotiation ability SBC ability contain a few physicalal layer parameters, duplex mode, security ability, such as modulation code ability,CINR measure ablity, power control support,PKM version, authorization policy support. Main message: SBC-REQ and SBC-REP 2.4.1.4.1 SBC parameters SBC parameters table is as below. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 84 页
  • 98. WiMAX network optimization Table 14 SBC parameters introduction SN Parameter Meaning Instruction OFDMA_MS _FFT_SIZES FFT supporting ability 2048 128 512 1024 OFDMA_MS_MO D Supporting ability of uplink modulation 64-QAM BTC CTC (√ default) STC HARQ chase CTC_IR CC_IR LDPC OFDMA_MS_DE MOD Supporting ability of downlink modulation STC CC with optional interleaver HARQ Chase HARQ CTC_IR Reserved 0 HARQ CC IR LDPC Dedicated pilots OFDMA_PERM_ SUPP Permutation supporting ability Optional PUSC Optional FUSC AMC 1x6 AMC 2x3 AMC 3x2 AMC with HARQ map TUSC1 TUSC2 OFDMA_MA P_CAPA OFDMA MAP supporting ability HARQ MAP Extended HARQ IE Sub MAP for first zone Sub MAP for other zones DL region definition PACKING_SUPP Packing supporting ability EXTENSION_CA PA Support extension title or not MAC_HEAD_SH EAD_SUPP Which types of MAC title and extension is supported 2.4.1.4.2 SBC OMC parameters configuration SBC parameters configuration is as below. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 85 页
  • 99. WiMAX network optimization Figure 60 SBC parameters configuration-1 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 86 页
  • 100. WiMAX network optimization Figure 61 SBC parameters configuration-2 2.4.1.5 Coding and authorization Exam the terminals legality, including equipment authorization and customers authorization The options of coding data methods Main message: -REQ and -REP 2.4.1.5.1 OMC parameters configuration Parameters configuration of Coding and authorization is as below. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 87 页
  • 101. WiMAX network optimization Figure 62 Parameters configuration of Coding and authorization 2.4.1.6 REG ability negotiation Registration is process that terminal is allowed to get access to web and the terminal receives the second CID. In order to register in base station, terminals send REG-REQ information to base station and base station responds based on this information. The terminal in REG-REQ information includes IP version parameters indicating that it supports IP version in the second CID. Registration is mainly the negotiation process of MAC level ability, negotiation including: sorting ability, CID&SAID updating, PHS ability, ARQ ability, switching support. 2.4.1.7 Service flow setup Service flow function is to guarantee Qos, a service flow represents a set of Qos parameters. Service flow mechanism offers the support of signal flow control, including setup, delete and modify. Service data is composed of two physicalal connections from MS to AGW transmission channel: MS and BS transport connection, BS and AGW data path. Every service flow corresponds with 32 digits SFID. The chart of service flow setup as below. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 88 页
  • 102. WiMAX network optimization MS BS ASN-GW AAA CS能力协商(空口登记)完成 RR-Request DSA-REQ DSA-RSP RR-Response Data Path Registration Request Data Path Registration Response Data Path Registration Ack Access Accept DSA-Ack 重复RR和DP步骤,完成所有预备业务流通道建立 Figure 63 Chart of service flow setup 2.4.1.8 Obtaining IP After setting up the service flow signal channel, AAA will allocate IP address by DHCP. 2.4.2 Idle Idle model and paging flow 2.4.2.1 The function of idle model MS is allowed to receive DL public service information in cycle in the case that MS doesn’t register to BS. For MS, it is exempt from the requirement of immediate HO and normal execution. The restriction of Ms scanning in certain distance makes MS save power and resource. For web and BS, it provides a simply way to remind MS about the arrival of downlink service and meanwhile reduces the services of air connection and web switch in the case of non-active MS, simply speaking, it helps to save electricity. Terminal acts as the main flow of web and setup new service connection Date is sent to terminal by the new connection. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 89 页
  • 103. WiMAX network optimization 2.4.2.2 Paging chart Figure 64 Paging chart 2.4.2.3 Entering idle flow chart When no data transmit on MS, BS get in idle state triggered by DREG-CMD, or MS lanch through DREG-REQ. BS extract the resource distributed to terminals, and the connections are extracted as well. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 90 页
  • 104. WiMAX network optimization MS BS AGW DREG_REQ IMEntry MS State Change Request IMEntry_MS State Change Rsponse Data Path De-Reg Req Data Path De-Reg Rsp DREG_CMD Data Path De-Reg Ack MS发起的进入IDLE模式 Figure 65 Entering idle flow chart 2.4.2.4 Location update MS need to update the location when paging between groups in idle mode. MSS BS (a) RNG-REQ ASN-GW(Anchor PC/LR) (b) LU Request (c) LU Response (d) RNG_RSP (e) LU Confirm Figure 66 Location update flow chart 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 91 页
  • 105. WiMAX network optimization 2.4.2.5 Paging flow When the net side need to send out data, paging control unit send paging broadcast which paging terminal. MSS BS AGW(Anchor PC) AGW(Anchor DPF/FA) (a) DownLink Data From HA (b) Initate Paging Request (c) Initate Paging Response (d) MS Paging Announce (e) BS Broadcast Page Messages Figure 67 Paging flow chart 2.4.2.6 Exit idel state flow Flow of Terminal re-accesses net, setup new service connection. Data send to terminal using the new connection. MS BS RNG-REQ IMExit MS State Change Request IMExit MS State Change Response Data Path Registration Request Data Path Registration Response 重入网络,可能协商鉴权能力,可能鉴权,可能重登记 Data Path Registration Ack PCID HMAC/CMAC RNG-RSP AGW 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 92 页
  • 106. WiMAX network optimization Figure 68 Exit Idle flow chart 2.4.2.6.1 OMC parameters configuration Figure 69 Pagegroup OMC parameters configuration 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 93 页
  • 107. WiMAX network optimization 2.5 Handover Technology 2.5.1 Handover types Handover includes 3 types: HHO (Hard Handover), FBSS (Fast BS Swtiching), MDHO (Macro Diversity Handover). 2.5.1.1 Hard Handover (HHO) The process in which an MS migrates from the air-interface provided by the Serving BS to a target BS.Under this type, MS only keep communicating with Serving BS. Between Serving BS and Target BS, they can have the same frequency or different, but can’t share the MAC information. 2.5.1.2 Fast BS Switching (FBSS) The process in which an MS migrates from the air-interface provided by the Serving BS to an active BS. Under this type, MS can only communicate with Serving BS, but can keep synchronization and setting up link resource, so it can be switch to another Active BS very quickly, between different Active BS, they must have the same frequency and share some MAC information. 2.5.1.3 Macro Diversity Handover(MDHO) The process in which an MS migrates from the air-interface provided by one or more BSs to the air-interface provided by other one or more BSs. Under this type, MS keep communicating with one or more BSs, every BS is MS’s serving BS. This process is accomplished by BSs transmitting the same MAC/PHY message to MS such that diversity combining can be performed by the mobile station (MS) 2.5.2 HHO workflow At present, our system support HHO, the workflow chart as follows: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 94 页
  • 108. WiMAX network optimization MS SBS TBSn AGW(HO+DP) AGW(Auth enticator) 4 R6 _H O _Re q(MS Info) 5 R6_HO_Req 6 R6_AK_Context_Req 7 R6_AK_Transfer(AK,AKID,AKLifetime,AKSN) 8 R6_Path_Pre_RegReq 9 R6_Path_Pre_RegRsp 10 R6_HO_Response 1 MOB_NBR_ADV 2 Association with neighbor BS 3 MOB_MSHO_REQ (MSID,target BS list) 1 2 M OB_BSH O_RSP (rec omme nded BS=BTSx,n ew CID) 13 Externed_SN_Subheader 14 MOB_HO_IND (HO_IND_TYPE) 11 R6 _H O_R espo ns e 1 5 R6 _ HO_Co n fir m 17 RNG_REQ 18 R N G _ R S P 19 SBC_REQ 20 SBC_ R SP 21 REG_REQ 22 REG_RSP 23 SN_Report 16 R6_HO_Confirm 24)R6_Path_Reg_Req 25)R6_Path_Reg_Rsp 26)R6_HO_Complete 27)R6_HO_Complete 2 8 )R6 _Path _DR e g_Re q 2 9)R6 _ Pat h _DR e g_RS P Figure 70 Workflow chart of HHO 2.5.3 The related parameters configure of HO The three related HO parameters configure pages in OMC: HO, Neighbor, Trigger 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 95 页
  • 109. WiMAX network optimization 2.5.3.1 HO configure page Figure 71 HO page configure 2.5.3.2 HO parameter instruction HO Type Support: choose HO Handoff supported by BS and MSS: choose 0 HO trigger metric support: CINR At present, these three items can be chosed as above. System resource retain time:used to describe the time length of resource retain timer. HO process optimization MS timer: mainly used as the timer when MS is waiting the next MAC message during the new access in optimizated HO. MS handover retransmissions timer: if MS still doesn’t receive HORSP after the time lenth of timer since it has sent HOREQ to BS, it will retransmit HOREQ. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 96 页
  • 110. WiMAX network optimization Handover indication readiness timer: used to allocate a time for MS to have an opportunity to transmitting uplink HOIND forwardly. MS HO connections parameters processing timer: define the max time for MS to deal the connecting information carried by RNGRSP and REG_RSP, need to debug and confirm with all terminials. MS HO TEK processing time: define the max time for MS to delal the related information of TEK, need to debug and confirm with all terminals. Threshold used by the MS to add a neighbor BS: under FBSS/MDHO types, when neighbor BS CINR bigger than this threshold, it can be added to available diversity. Threshold used by the MS to drop a BS: under FBSS/MDHO types, when neighbour BS CINR less than this threshold, it will be deleted from available diversity. The slot length of anchor switch report: under MDHO/FBSS types, ASR is a long measure for time, its unit is frame number. The switch period of anchor switch report: under MDHO/FBSS types, its unit is ASR. Hysteresis margin: when target BS CINR 3db bigger than serving BS, permit MS handover. Time-to-trigger duration: it needs to keep a long time for MS send HO request since BS satisfies above Hysteresis margin, the length of this time is the value of Hysteresis margin, unit is ms. FBSS weight: no need to modify SSHO weight: no need to modify HHO weight: no need to modify Inter-frequency scan threshold: used for BS to trigger scan, when BS detects MS uplink CINR lower than this value, MS begins to Inter-frequency scan. Scan duration: one scan lasts time, unit: frame. Scan interval: the time between two scans, during this time, it communicates normally. Scan report period: configure MS scan report period, it’s configured in trigger page whether it needs scan report period. Scan report metric: decide its report is CINR or RSSI, 1 means CINR. Association type support: BS support association type, 1 means scan without association, at present our suggestion is 1. 2.5.3.3 Neighbor configure page 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 97 页
  • 111. WiMAX network optimization Figure 72 OMC Neighbor configure 2.5.3.4 Neighbor parameters explan Neighbor configure is based on the actual WiMAX plan result. When it’s 1/3 , FA configuration indictor is Same,different frequency network is not same. If connect to GPS, the frequency synchronization should be configured as synchronizing, this is always used in synchronizing handoff. Else it should be configured as asynchronizing. This is always used in asynchronizing handoff. When the serving BS and neighbor neither have the same time source nor time is synchronized, you need to configure no synchronization. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 98 页
  • 112. WiMAX network optimization 2.5.3.5 Trigger configure First, trigger is usally used in different frequency HO, when it’s same frequency, needn’t to configure trigger. Figure 73 OMC Trigger configure 2.5.3.6 Trigger parameter instruction Trigger metric type:CINR or RSSI Trigger function: trigger condition Trigger action: when it satify trigger function, what’s MS action. Trigger value:trigger value’s unit is 0.5db Trigger averaging duration:MS start trigger action after it lasts trigger averaging during. In Figure 73, when the serving BS’s CINR is lower than 10db, MS will send MOB_SCN_REQ. Usally different frequency HO, configure a trigger to trigger MS send HO-REQ when serving BS’s CINR is 3db lower than target BS. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 99 页
  • 113. WiMAX network optimization 2.6 Power Control optimization 2.6.1 PC and AMC principle 2.6.1.1 The purpose of PC The purpose of PC is to decrease the influence of slow fading of wireless channels and slow changes in interference on singnals, conquer quick fading and exquisite changes in interference by complect coding. Preventing competitive power increase and decreasing the overall interference level of system. Everychannel’s transmitting power can bring in interfence to other channels, when system is on the point of stable power, any power increase can bring in competitive power increase to other subscribers, so increase overall interference rapidly. By the control of channel transmitting power, overall transmitting power can be the smallest available value, so decreasing the overall interference level of system, increasing the system capability. Trying to reduce the Tx power in the precondition of meeting communication quality requirements, PC technology is an optimization technology, the purpose is to reduce the TX power in the precondition of meeting communication quality requirements (bandwidth, BER,FER). 2.6.1.2 The principles of PC Abiding by the following 3 principles Powe balance: ensure equal power of the wanted signals at the receive end. For example, ensure equal RSSI for the uplink. SNR balance:ensure equal C/I(carrier/Interference) at the receive end. BER/FER balance:ensure equal BER/FER at the receive end, for example for the uplink, ensure equal BER/FER at BS from MS. 2.6.1.3 Power Control Classification Power Control includes uplink PC and downlink PC, uplink Power Control is the main content. Uplink PC includes 3 types: closed loop, open loop, external loop. Closed loop: comparing with the object value(CINR,RSSI), BS measures the channel quality(CINR,RSSI), then confirm the adaptation. External loop: BS gets uplink BER or PER, then adjusts CINR by comparing with the enactment value to insure communication quality. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 100 页
  • 114. WiMAX network optimization Open loop is mainly carried out by MS. By calculating path loss and modulation coding modules, interference of BS, MS adjusts Tx power properly. The advantage of open loop is higher adjusting frequency, lower delay, no need bandwidth spending, because of no close loop, the adjustment maybe not accurate. Downlink PC: when MS migrates to the edge of cells, path loss increases rapidly, the quality of signal channel turns worse, if increasing the downlink Power, you can improve communication quality. Otherwise when MS is next to BS, the quality of channel is very good, so in the precondition of keeping bandwidth, we can decrease power properly, decrease interference level, also save Tx power for remote subscribers. WiMAX carries out downlink power control by adjusting Booting value. 2.6.1.4 AMC WiMAX adopts AMC technology, according the intension of sinals, automatic adjust modulation and coding modes, so it’s very close between AMC and Power Control. Uplink encodings in common use: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 101 页
  • 115. WiMAX network optimization Table 15 UL FEC Downlink encodings in common use: Table 16 DL FEC 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 102 页
  • 116. WiMAX network optimization 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 103 页
  • 117. WiMAX network optimization 2.6.1.5 PC and AMC arithmetic Uplink AMC and PC methods: First, confirm UIUC, according to current UIUC and CINRrcv, judge whether current CINRrcv is in min entry threshold or mand exit threshold of current UIUC. If so, keep UIUC, otherwise reconfirm UIUC and judge power by congestion. Downlink AMC and PC methods: First confirm boosting and then confirm DIUC according to CINR, the adjusting method of DIUC is similar to UIUC. 2.6.2 Power Control and AMC configure PC parameters are mainly: DL Burst Profile, UL Burst Profile, AMC and PC. 2.6.2.1 DL Burst Profile configure DL Burst Profile configure page in OMC as follows: Figure 74 OMC DL Burst Profile configure 2.6.2.2 DL Burst Profile parameters instruction This page describes all types of FEC threshold when downlink adopts AMC. According to different terminials and service scene, the configure needs to be optimized. At present, recommended DIUC value of GCT card as follows: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 104 页
  • 118. WiMAX network optimization Table 17 DIUC recommended value FEC Code type and modulation type FEC number UIUC Mandatory exit threshold UIUC Minimum e ntry threshold QPSK(CC) 1/2 0 24 30 QPSK(CTC)1/2 13 24 30 16QAM(CTC)1/2 16 30 36 16QAM(CTC)3/4 17 36 44 64QAM(CTC)3/4 20 44 48 DL Burst Profile In Figure 74, DL Burst Profile expresses the configurations of downlink burst modulation and coding, this configure is the MC type used to divide downlink burst to terminals by LDS. At most 12 items, be corresponding to DIUC1~DIUC12. Mand exit threshold and Min entry threshold are the same as uplink, the choice of DIUC is decided by the downlink AMC method when downlink AMC enable. The step of threshold value is 0.5db, and the step of backgroup NPT demonstrate is 1db, so you need to use the threshold value divide 2 and then be corresponding to DL CINR of NPT. When compare the threshold with the DL CINR of NPT, you need to notice: when downlink AMC enable, check the mand exit threshold and min entry threshold of this DIUC, if it’s between these two values, there’s no modulate of downlink MC. To DL Burst Profile, the first item is DIUC1, the followings are DIUC2, DIUC3…, 12 items at most.DIUC0 is used by DL_MAP, it’s configured in DL-MAP Coding indication in figure 74. up to now, 0 means QPSK CC 1/2, the other is 2 shows QPSK CTC 1/2. If it was configured QPSK CC 1/2,DIUC0 is QPSK CC 1/2;if it’s QPSK CTC 1/2,DIUC0 is QPSK CC 1/2. When configure the thresholds in these burst profile, generally we use default values. Up to now, there’s no expert items testing, so they will be chosed after testing. 2.6.2.3 UL Burst Profile configure OMC configure figure as follows: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 105 页
  • 119. WiMAX network optimization Figure 75 OMC UL Burst Profile configure 2.6.2.4 UL Burst Profile parameter instruction This page describes all types of FEC threshold when downlink adopts AMC. According to different terminials and service scene, the configure needs to be optimized. At present, recommended UIUC value as follows: Table 18 UIUC recommended configure FEC Code type and modulation type FEC number UIUC Mandatory exit threshold UIUC Minimum entry threshold PCCI QPSK(CC) 1/2 0 52 60 60 QPSK(CTC)1/2 13 52 60 60 16QAM(CTC)1/2 16 60 68 68 16QAM(CTC)3/4 17 68 76 76 UL Burst Profile In Figure 75 UL Burst Profile is the configure of uplink burst MC, which is mainly used to assign MC of uplink burst by LDS, at most 10 items, from UIUCUIUC9. Mand exit threshold: uplink AMC enable, when UL CINR is lower than the value of Mand exit threshold, system will choose a lower step MC according to uplink AMC method. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 106 页
  • 120. WiMAX network optimization Min entry threshold: uplink AMC enable, when UL CINR is higher than the value of Min enry threshold, system will choose this MC type, if still higher than higher stup MC, system will choose higher MC according to uplink AMC method. Up to now, the configure is CC and CTC, the threshold is stepped by 0.25db, but NPT is stepped by 1db, so you need to use the threshold divide 4 and then be relative to UL CINR of NPT. When compare the threshold with the UL CINR of NPT, you need to notice: when uplink AMC enable, check the mand exit threshold and min entry threshold of this UIUC, if it’s between these two values, there’s no modulate of downlink MC. The third parameter PCCI reference is the reference value of uplink PC, detail solution is based on UL power controls enable. The following two parameters RSSI reference,Ranging data ratio are no useful up to now, but we will deploy correlative job. 2.6.2.5 AMC configure AMC configure as follows: Figure 76 AMC configure 1 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 107 页
  • 121. WiMAX network optimization Figure 77 AMC configure 2 2.6.2.6 AMC frequent parameters instructions 1. DL AMC enable Choose Enable, downlink AMC. Choose Disable, downlink AMC disable, use mandatory Modulation and coding. As following figure: Figure 78 DL AMC enable 2. DL mandatory FEC When DL AMC is disable, parameter DL mandatory FEC is in effect, can choose QPSK(CTC)1/2, and other downlink FEC; When DL AMC is enabling, this parameter is invalid. As follwing figure: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 108 页
  • 122. WiMAX network optimization Figure 79 DL FEC 3. UL AMC enable When it’s Enable,uplink adopts AMC; When it’s disabling, uplink AMC is disabling, using mandatory modulation and coding, as following figure: Figure 80 UL AMC enables 4. UL mandatory FEC When UL AMC is disable, parameter UL mandatory FEC is in effect, can choose QPSK(CTC)1/2 and other uplink FEC; When UL AMC is enable, this parameter is invalid. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 109 页
  • 123. WiMAX network optimization Figure 81 UL FEC 5. Downlink AMC method Figure 82 DL AMC method 6 Uplink AMC method Figure 83 UL AMC methods The AMC method of the upper UIUC/DIUC: MUMD switch 1-SUSD switch 2-MUSD switch 3-Instant switch: adjust uplink/downlink AMC if CINR of every frame allows, in that case, wave CINR brings FEC change, may make system unsteadily, ping delay, even loss. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 110 页
  • 124. WiMAX network optimization Up situation: For uplink judicative arithmetic, adopts fixed winodws to store CINR. After statistic of fixed array is full, adopts different disposals according to different arithmetic: To fixed windows, use a member variable to count, when it’s full, make a statistic, clean array, couner equal 0. Down situation: Downlink judicative arithmetic: adpots slip window to count, if the CINR in slip windows meets terms,it will deal according to different arithmetic. To slip window: CINRrvc of every frame is stored in array, when if’s full, the oldest will be deleted, and store new one, and make statistic. Only when the statistic of CINR meets some threshold ratio, there will be MC modify, save a counter member variable to indicate the oldest CINR. When next frame coming, use it to replace the old one. Special situation: When it meets both up and down situation, for a unitive dealing flow, still adopt first up and then down, we need to up it to a middle value not the final one, only when it’s no way to down, we will up it. So when it meets both up and down situations, the final solution is to fall modulate step. The following figure is the parameters of AMC. Figure 84 AMC parameter .DL_AMC_RiseStatNum The rise Statistic of downlink AMC, the object is smooth DL_AMC_drop StatNum The drop statistic of downlink AMC,the object is smooth .UL_AMC_RiseStatNum The rise statistic of uplink AMC,the object is smooth. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 111 页
  • 125. WiMAX network optimization UL_AMC_drop StatNum The drop statistic of uplink AMC,the object is smooth. DL_AMC_RiseTrigNum The rise trigger number of downlink AMC, the object is smooth. DL_AMC_DropTrigNum The drop trigger number of downlink AMC, the object is smooth. UL_AMC_RiseTrigNum The rise trigger number of uplink AMC, the object is smooth UL_AMC_DropTrigNum The drop trigger number of uplink AMC,the object is smooth. PC_WatchBurstNum The number of burst watched for the adjustment of CINR threshold. Different AMC entry and exit threshold according to different channels, also the channels are changing at any moment. At present, the CINR threshold of AMC is decided according to experience, we add AMC adjustable mechanism to prevent improper threshold of AMC making AMC performance falling. The principle adjusting the threshold of AMC according Burst error ratio. The threshold of AMC is to high when the error ratio is much hign, you need to reduce porperly; the threshold need to be increased when the burst error ratio is too low. This parameter is used to control the period of statistic of burst error ratio. 2.6.2.7 PC configure parameters PC configures parameters as follows: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 112 页
  • 126. WiMAX network optimization Figure 85 PC configure page 1 Figure 86 PC configure page2 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 113 页
  • 127. WiMAX network optimization Figure 87 PC configure page3 Figure 88 PC configure page4 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 114 页
  • 128. WiMAX network optimization Figure 89 PC configure page5 2.6.2.8 PC parameters explanation 1. DL power control enable In the following figure 90, if DL power control enable choose Enable,it means enable downlink PC. Figure 90 DL PC enables When it chooses Disable, it means downlink PC is disable. At this time, DL PC uses the gain which fits the appointed boosting, the appointed boosting is configured to Appoint to DL boosting as the following figure 91. It can be choosed as 0~7,which is corresponding to 0 dB (default),6 dB,-6 dB,9 dB,3 dB,-3 dB,-9 dB,-12 dB. The corresponding gain of boosting is configured in DL gain of plus value in Figure 4-50.when downlink PC enables, the value of boosting is decided by the D-value between the min entry threshold of the highest multiplicity configured in DL Burst Profile plus 2db and the value of DL CINR reported by FFB or REP-RSP. This D-value will be compared to boostiong values of 7, and then confirm the boosting value. Then compare the boosting to the Upper bound of DL 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 115 页
  • 129. WiMAX network optimization boosting and Lower bound of DL boosting in figure 92 , if it’s in the bound you can use it; if it’s higher than Upper bound of DL boosting,then it adpots the boosting value of upper bound(3db in figure 92), if it’s lower than Lower bound of DL boosting, then it adopts the value of lower boosting(-3db in fiugre 92). Figure 91 Boosting Figure 92 PC paramters 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 116 页
  • 130. WiMAX network optimization UL power controls enable The following figure 93, UL power control enable chooses Enable, enable uplink PC, and otherwise disable uplink PC. Figure 93 UL PC enables UL PC is adjusted according to the third paramter PCC reference in UL burst profile, when the measured CINR of data burst aveage is higher than PCCI, then the UL signal quality can meet communication, you can reduce power properly; if UL CINR is lower than the reference value, the UL signal qualtiy can not meet communication, you need to upgrade power. The method of average:in figure 94, average method for UL CINR measurements=0 means Alpha average,1 means slipped windows average; Alpha average:new CINR=Alpha * reported CINR+(1- Alpha) * old average CINR,Alpha is configured in Alpha for UL CINR average in figure 95,ennerally configured 1/16~15/16; windows average is slipped windows average, the size of windows if configured in Window for UL CINR average in figure 95, the scope of upgrade or reduce is decided by warp of CINR, in figure 94big warp chooses big step, small warp choosed small step, correspongding parameters as figure 97, considering the parameter exlanation in 1.2.2 uplink parameter control of “ZTE-WiMAX configure parameter handbook”. By this adjusting, you can make UL CINR is nearby PCCI. So you can modify uplink power and UL CINR by changing PCCI. This is avaiable when UL PC enable, otherwise it’s no use. Generally, PCCI reference is a little higher or equal min entry thrshold. Figure 94 UL CINR average1 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 117 页
  • 131. WiMAX network optimization Figure 95 UL CINR average 2 Figure 96 UL power adjust Figure 97 UL PC enables 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 118 页
  • 132. WiMAX network optimization UL pc mode Differences between close loop PC and open loop PC: Close loop is BS measure the CINR, RSSI of data sent by MS, then compare to the target value, confirm the power adjusting. At present, our system supports adjust according to UL CINR, in future considering RSSI; Open loop is mainly completed by MS. MS confirms Tx power according to the path loss, MC, the interfere of BS. The advantage of this type is high adjusting frequency, small time delay, no extra bandwidth; disadvantage is no close loop, the adjusting maybe not exact. In future our system will be added external PC: BS calculates the uplink BER or PER, by comparing to the threshold, adjust CINR dynamically to ensure the communication quality. Figure 98 UL PC methods PC adjust method The following figure99 the feedback method of unlink Tx power adjust in PC adjust method. • 0: No adjust • 1: Power control IE (default) Power control IE is sent in UL-MAP,which MS is decided by the CID in UL-MAP IE. • 2: Fast power control message FPC message is used to adjust several MSs’ power at one time, which was sent by CID broadcast.FPC also can be chosed to support BS. Otherwise, when there is time and frequency bias in current system,uplink Tx power adjustment message will be sent to MS by RNG-RSP, otherwise use PC adjust method over here. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 119 页
  • 133. WiMAX network optimization Figure 99 UL PC message Drop off enable Generally, set Drop off enable as enable(default),or drop off will not take effect. Figure 100 Drop off Drop off detection is realized by checking uplink burst of MS, when uplink channel is very bad,the PER is very high, the statistic reaches the threshold, BS will release MS forcibly. But in some situation, there is none uplink burst, just only burst springed by T27 at intervals. Due to the long period, it’s a long time to achieve the number of error packages. For example, the period of T27 is 500ms; the statistic of 1000 burst needs 500s. No natural uplink burst situations include: • no uplink bandwidth requirement of MS; • uplink channel of MS is very bad, BS can’t receive MS bandwith request, so BS will not assign bandwidth to MS(except UGS); • MS power off. So we need to import the detection of uplink CINR, when it’s a long time, there is no good CINR, also system judges MS drop off. This method also can judge whether MS drop off when there is no normal uplink burst. The relatived parameters showed in figure101, considering detailed explanation 1.2.5 drop off parateters in “ZTE-WiMAX configure parameter handbook”. Figure 101 Drop off 2 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 120 页
  • 134. WiMAX network optimization If microcode doesn’t report MS’s data burst message, the detection of drop off in PC can not be executed, it happens that BS can’t drop off, but MS dropped off. How to chech whether microcode report MS’s data burst? In serial, input“g_dwULChStatSwitch=1”,and then input“g_dwUlChInfo”, it shows the memory address of this varible, copy it, input “d g_dwUlChInfo memory address, 1000,4”, the content of every 4th 32bits addresses is: 0: BasicCID(0~15),current frame NO.(16~23),RSSI(24~31); 1: CINR measured by baseband (0~7), average CINR (8~15), CRC (16~23), HCS (24~31); 2: time bias measured by baseband (0~31) 3: frequency bias measured by baseband (0~31). Notcie: Maybe the location of every 4 32bits address is not the same, maybe the 0 32bit address is time bias measured by baseband. CINR can easily recognize locations according increasing frame NO. and invariable BasicCID. If the print information is unvariable (especially frame NO.), so you can deduce there is no microcode report. There is no MS bandwidth assigned by LDS, or MS sent no data in this assigned bandwidth. At the same time, input”g_dwULChStatSwitch=1”, also input”g_dwULPowerAdjInfo” to check the PC adjustment, time and frequency bias after disposal of PC module. Input “g_ dwULPowerAdjInfo”to show the memeory address of variable, copy the memory addrss, input “d g_ dwULPowerAdjInfo memory address, 1000, 4”, the detail information of every 4 32bits address: 0: average CINR (0~7), unlink PC scope(8~15), unlink Tx power(16~31);(unlink Tx power is reported by MS through BR and UL Tx power report header,PHY channel report header,UL Tx power report,extended subheader, also attached in SBC-REQ,PMC-REQ,REP-RSP) 1: time bias needed to be adjusted (0~31), when it’s 0, there’s no need to adjust. 2: frequency bias needed to be adjusted (0~31), when it’s 0, there’s no need to adjust. The method of adjustmet for time and frequency bias is average the time and frequency bias reported by baseband, up to now it’s average 30 reported values. When the average time/frequency bias is bigger than the threshold of timing/frequency bias(in figure 102 Timing adjustment threshold/Frequency adjustment threshold),you can adjust through RNG-RSP. 3: current frame NO.(0~15), BasicCID(16~31) Also maybe the location of every 4 32bits address is not the same, maybe the 0 32bit address is time bias measured by baseband. CINR can easily recognize locations according increasing frame NO. and invariable BasicCID. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 121 页
  • 135. WiMAX network optimization Figure 102 PC adjustment UL limit channel num enabled When “UL limit channel num enabled” is enabled in figure 103, that means whether uplink limit channel number is enabled. In transmitting process, if the uplink assiged channel is nore steady, MS will keep Tx power spectral density. For example, when BS change assigned channel number from 1to 2, MS Tx power will be twice to keep Tx power spectral density. But when MS Tx power is max, adding subchannel will decude power spectral density, uplink CINR also reduces, if there’s no timely falling AMC, the result is higher PER. When it’s enable, BS will keep MS current power spectral density, calculate the max subchannel assigned to MS according to the current MS Tx power and the max power. BS will assign subchannels no more than the max number. Up to now it works not well, so the default value is disabling. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 122 页
  • 136. WiMAX network optimization Figure 103 Subchannel limit ZONE boosting enable Zone boosting enable is the of-off of downlink Zone Boosting, protocol regulates preamble subcarrier boosting is 9dB, it’s suitable for FUSC type of all subcarriers, but after importing PUSC, to 1/3 PUSC, the power of PUSC Zone is much less than preamble, which makes BS power-amplitier is stricted by preamble. So later protocol provides Zone Boosting solution, when downlink zone is not all the subchannels, the used subchannels (including data sub-carrier and pilot sub-carrier) will be boosting, the boosting value is all the available subcarrier number/subcarrier used by zone. When Zone Boosting enable, the boosting of Burst won’t exceed 9dB - zone boosting, to 1/3 PUSC, zone boosting is about 4.7db, so the boosting of burst is less than 3db, the parameter of DL Max Boosting(Upper bound of DL boosting)is less than 3dB. Zone Boosting is relative to the subchannels used by zone, all the parameters of subchannels used by zone is decided by the following parameters: USED_SUBCHN_BMP, AMC_DL_SUBCHN_BMP, TUSC1_DL_SUBCHN_BMP, and TUSC2_DL_SUBCHN_BMP. Zone Boosting enable is also relative to reference source, when Zone Boosting enable, the number of data subcarrier of reference source will be boosting 3db no matter how many PUSC subchannels configured. The number of subcarrier used by Segment is configured in DL PUSC used subchannel bitmap in figure 104, 63 equal use all subcarries. Figure 104 Subchannel limit 2 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 123 页
  • 137. WiMAX network optimization Figure 105 DL-MAP The meaning of the other parameters in OMC is described in 1.2- power control configure in “ZTE-WiMAX configure parameter handbook”. The other matters need attention You can see MS BasicCID through command DisplayActvieMS in serial, and then input GetPCInfo(segmentid,basiccid) to see the content of NPT, including uplin CINR,UIUC/DIUC and so on, parameter segmentid is the segmentid accessed by M, generally it’s 0, and basicid is some BasicCID obtained by command DisplayActiveMS. Up to now, when MS accessed, you input g_dwSuppFFB=0 to close FFB forcibly, there is no downlink CINR report, so there is no PC and AMC adjustment. It will report DL CINR by REP-RSP after new MS access. Now, there are some problems of uplink PC, especailly many subscribers access, UL PC enable will lead to quick UL CINR frequency changes even to 0, the detail reason need to confirm. Maybe its reason includes PC types(close or open), often time and frequency bias,the interference of RSSI,NI,MS power and so on.Also some terminals have different disposal to ours, thinking about the infulence of RSSI,NI, all these need to be PC optimizated in future. In order to prevent excessive frequency adjustment, PC have an average disposal of time and frequency bias reported by baseband. Uplink Tx power is mainly adjusted by RNG-RSP, PCIE, FPC, when time and frequency bias also need to be adjusted, uplink Tx power adjustment is noticed by RNG-RSP together with time and frequency adjustment. If there’s no time and frequency bias, the uplink Tx power adjustment is adjusted according the configure in PCIE or FPC. During the access of MS, there’s time-delay disposal to AMC in order to deal admission control, now You can choose delay or not, default is no delay. Higher MC of Delayed AMC PC is calucated by CINR and not reported to LDS, after 2500 frames, it will be reported to LDS, so before this LDS 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 124 页
  • 138. WiMAX network optimization sue the default low UIUC1/DIUC0, otherwise the higher MC will be reported to LDS at once, and higer MC will take effect at once. 2.7 Admission and congestion control 2.7.1 QOS of the air-interface resource of WiMAX 2.7.1.1 Air-interface resource The air-interface resource of WiMAX is calculated unitely as SLOT number. By physicalal structure, one air-interface SLOT is composed of a special time length lasted by several sub-carriers. LDS also use SLOT as operation unit, translate MAC message to PHY layer. If the time length of an air-interface physicalal FRAME is T, the usable number of subcarriers is N, a SLOT lasts t is composed of n subcarriers, so the total SLOT of air-interface is (T/t)*(N/n). Most of these SLOT is used to transport service data, little part is used to control channel (DL_MAP, UL_MAP, UCD, DCD and so on). 2.7.1.2 Flux of subscribers’ service-flow The air-interface bandwidth occupied by subscribers’ service flow is also calculated by SLOT. An important point of WIMAX air-interface is that the service flow of terminals can adopt lots of Modeling and Coding types, the number of SLOTs occupied by high level MC is much less than low level MC type, but higher quality requirements to air-interface signal. Also WIMAX provides Automatic Modeling & Coding, it can automatic MC according to the signal quality of terminals access. Flexible access types make sufficient use of WIMAX air-interface resource, but bring forward higher requirement to air-interface QOS management. 2.7.1.3 Types of service-flow To make sufficient use of air-interface, at the same time adapt to all types service requirements, WiMAX system design several types for service flow. UGS 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 125 页
  • 139. WiMAX network optimization The character of UGS is fixed service flow bandwidth, once access, the air-interface will hold fixed SLOT for the service all the time, no matter whether there’s data to send. The bandwidth can not be occupied by other services, and the time delay of data message is very strict. UGS is the highest priority service, mainly used as VOIP and such high real-time services. VR VR service has no fixed bandwidth guarantee, but a bound of bandwidth. once accessed, the air-interface should hold enough SLOT for the floor level bandwidth. When the air-interface resources is loose, you can add bandwidth dynamically, but it can’t exceed the upper limit; when the air-interface resource is tense, you can reduce SLOT and assign them to other services, but need to keep the floor level of the bandwidth bound. The upper limit of bandwidth bound is named the max last speed, the floor level of bandwidth is named the min saved speed. VR services are classified into NRT-VR, RT-VR and ERT-VR NRT-VR The time delay of data message transport is loose, every frame can adjust the assignment of SLOT automatically. Mainly be used in FTP transport services. RT-VR The time delay of data message transport is strict, every frame can adjust the assignment of SLOT automatically. Mainly be used in on-line audio video stream services. ERT-VR The time delay of data message transport is strict, every frame cann’t adjust the assignment of SLOT.Automatically, but adjust at intervals. The performance of ERT-VR is near to UGS, but the use of bandwidth is more flexible than UGS. The application scope is similar to UGS. Among the three VR services, the priority from high to low is ERT-VR, UGS, RT-VR and NRT-VR. BE-best effort BE has no bandwidth guarantee, will be assigned when there is spare SLOT; at one time has the max persisting speed restrict. From the point of view of resource management, BE can be regarded as NRT-VR whose the minimal bandwidth guarantee is 0. BE service is the lowest priority, mostly used as WEB browse services. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 126 页
  • 140. WiMAX network optimization 2.7.1.4 Admission and congestion control Admission and congestion control is two important part of QOS system, the together object of them is to avoid overload of air-interface, ensure the quality of service flow transport. The function of WIMAX admission control is to restrict the acess ot subscribers’ service flow, prevent BS air-interface overload. The function of WIMAX congestion control is to unchain overload when the BS congestion is caused by reducing quality of signal channel, replacing low phase MC to the accessed terminals. 2.7.2 Admission Control 2.7.2.1 Basic principle If the spare air-interface SLOT is exhausted after the applying service entered, the service will be refused. 2.7.2.2 Realization method Admission control is realized together by SPS, DBS and LDS. SPS: put in service access request to DBS, report the type, direction, bandwidth and so on, after receiving admission judgement, go on executing service flow access, or backout the established service flow. LDS: take charge of the usage statistic of SLOT, including total SLOT, used SLOT and so on, also report them to DBS at intervals. DBS: answer for the final admission judgement, according to the bandwidth requirement and MC type reported by SPS, calacute the required SLOT, compare to the usage report by LDS, judge whether admission or not. 2.7.2.3 The application scene of admission control Original access The subscriber setup a new workflow, admission control judge it by uplink or downlink.. Bandwidth variation for accessed subscribers 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 127 页
  • 141. WiMAX network optimization The subscribers want to add or reduce the bandwidth of an accessed service flow. Thereinto, the apply of adding bandwidth is restricted by admission control, admission control judges it by uplink or downlink service flow. HO of terminals When terminals handover to other BS, all the accessed services in serving BS will be applied to target BS. In this scene, all the service flow of terminals should be admitted to the target BS, the HO can be completed, or any service flow is not admitted, BS will refuse the HO of terminals. 2.7.2.4 Serveral terms considering by admission control 1. MAC overhead SPS requests to DBS for service admission, the filled parameters of bandwidth is the payload of Service flow, not including MAC overhead; when DBS judges by SLOT, it needs to add suitable requirement, and then judge. 2. Reserved air-interface abundant quantity The object of reserved air-interface abundant quantity is to have spare resource when MC types Changed or the bandwidth of service flow alters, not as far as the property of service flow changed, the air-interface is overload. 3. the priority of admission for different scenes The priority of admission is that different scenes have different admission results when the resource of spare SLOT is very tense. Among the three before-mentioned scenes, the priority from high to low is HO, bandwidth variation and original access. The priority is realized by reserving each air-interface resource abundance, higer priority, less reserved abundance. 4. Disposal to different service flow To UGS, judge by the SLOT calculated by fixed bandwidth and MC of terminals. To VR services (ERT-VR, RT-VR, NRT-VR), judged by the SLOT calculated by the minimal reserved bandwidth and MC of terminals. To BE, no reserved bandwidth, so no reserved SLOT, admitted unconditionally. 2.7.2.5 Admission control parameters explanation Table 19 Table of admission control parameter explanation 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 128 页
  • 142. WiMAX network optimization Parameter Meaning Explanation T_NEW the usage ratio of SLOT for original access judgement [0,100] unit is %, It means the discount of SLOT resource adjustment in the original access scene. 100% - T_NEW% is the reserved value. The default configuration of T_NEW is 80(%) T_CHG SLOT usage ratio of stream changing judgment The unit of [0,100] is %. It means the discount of SLOT resource adjustment in the scene of stream bandwidth changing. 100% - T_CHG% is the reserved value. The default configuration of T_CHG is 85(%). T_HO HO adminssion threshold The unit of [0,100] is %. It means the discount of SLOT resource adjustment in the scene of stream initial operating. 100% - T_HO% is the reserved value. The default configuration of T_HO is 90(%). MAC_RATIO MAC overhead ratio The unit is %, It means the ratio between the SLOT amount of MAC overhead and the SLOT for operating stream load, the default value is 5(%). LDS_RPTINTVThe interval of LDS report SLOT usage The unit is FRAME, which is that FRAME counts the average SLOT data as LDS manage and report to DBS. The default configuration is 400(FRAME), which is 2 seconds. It can be configured as integer multiple of 200. Remark: If the reporting cycle is configured too long, it may cause the reduction of the admitting percent of pass, and influence the function of port. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 129 页
  • 143. WiMAX network optimization 2.7.2.6 Admission configure page Figure 106 Admission configure page 2.7.3 Congestion control 2.7.3.1 Basic principle The main reason to congestion is too much data folw, LDS cann’t arrange all the data in limited slots. So the kernel of congestion control is to reduce the occupied quantity of SLOT. It can be realized by restricting access, upgrading the air-interface power, forcible terminals handover, releasing low priority service flow forcibly. 2.7.3.2 Realized mode It’s realized together by subsystem SPS, DBS and LDS. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 130 页
  • 144. WiMAX network optimization LDS: it answers for the Statistic of air-interface slot in time, mainly includes whether produce attemper violation, and the rate of violation, also report to DBS cycly. DBS: it takes charge of two jobs: first, according to the report of SLOT attemper sent by LDS, judge whether the air-interface is in congestion, and the degree of congestion, and then sends the report to SPS; second, when it needs to upgrade power, forcible handover or release forcibly to exit congestion, choose the service flow and terminals according the information, and then send the report to SPS. SPS: SPS is the main part of congestion control, after receiving DBS congestion control report, chooses the method of relieving congestion, and then choose the object to execute, at last relieve congestion to the choosed object. 2.7.3.3 The scene of congestion control According to the procreant situation of congestion, congestions are divided into no congestion, light congestion, middle congestion, high congestion. No congestion No congestion: there is no air-interface slot resoutce overload, normal LDS attemper. Light congestion When the LDS attemper interval for BE is more than the threshold, the air-interface enters light congestion, there’s no influence on UGS and VR. Solutions: It needs to increase power of terminals to exit light congestion. Among all the terminals which accessed the air-interface, choose one or more terminals to upgrade the power, in order to upgrade the quality of signal and increase the MC type, so reduce the mount of air-interface slots this terminal occupied. The principle of terminals who was increased power forcibly: the number of slots occupied all the service is the most, you need to upgrade the power. Middle congestion When LDS stops the attemper of BE, there’s still a mass of attemper violation for NRT-VR. The load of air-interface enters middle congestion. There is no influence on UGS, ERT-VR and ER-VR. Soultions: It needs to adopt the following two methods at the same time to exit middle congestion: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 131 页
  • 145. WiMAX network optimization Restrict access: in the air-interface, it’s not permitted to new service access, terminal handover, apply for more bandwidth. It’s automatically realized by DBS admission control. Compulsive handover: among all the terminals accessed the air-interface, choose one or more to handover to another air-interface, so reduce the amount of service. The principle of choosing terminals: ----no handover to the terminals which has UGS or BE service ----first handover to the terminals which has low MC High congestion When the attemper violation rate reaches the threshold to all the realtime services(including UGS, ERTVR,RTVR), the air-interface enter high congestion. Solutions: It needs to backout service flow forcibly. Among all the services accessed in the air-interface, choose on or more to backout forcibly, so that we can reduce the quantity of service flow quickly. In high congestion, it’s obligatory to break service flow. The principle of backout to service flow: ----no release to BE ----first release to low priority service flow ----the same priority, first release the one took more slots. 2.7.3.4 Congestion control parameter Table 20 Congestion control parameters explanation paramter meanings explanation CongestionCtrlIntv congestion control interval Unit is FRAME, calculate flux of air-interface and judge interval of congestion, default setting is 1000(frames) Entry_L_SchIntv The threshold of entry light congestion for BE service Unit is FRAME, for BE service,when the interval of receiving service message arrives above the threshold, there’s still no free slot to send data, then air-interface entry light congestion. Exit_L_SchIntv The threshold of exit light congestion for BE service Unit is FRAME, for BE service, under light congestion, when the interval of receiving service message arrives lower than the threshold, there’s enough free slot 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 132 页
  • 146. WiMAX network optimization to send data, then the air-interface exit light congestion. Entry_M_Violat The threshold of violation rate to enter middle congestion for NRT-VR [0,100] unit is %, in a congestion control interval, if the quantity of failed frames is more than the threshold when it satifies the deadline BW of NRT-VR,, the air-interface is judged as middle congestion. Exit_M_Violat The threshold of violation rate to exit middle congestion for NRT-VR [0,100] unit is%, if the quantity of failed frames is less than the threshold when it satifies the deadline BW of NRT-VR, the aire-interface is judged as exit middle congestion. Entry_H_Violat The threshold of violation rate to enter high congestion [0,100] unit is %, in a congestion control interval, if the quantity of failed frames is more than the threshold when it satifies the deadline BW, the air-interface is judged as high congestion. Exit_H_Violat The threshold of violation rate to exit middle congestion [0,100] unit is%, if the quantity of failed frames is less than the threshold when it satifies the deadline BW the aire-interface is judged as exit high congestion. 2.7.3.5 Congestion control configure page Figure 107 Congestion control configure 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 133 页
  • 147. WiMAX network optimization Section3 WiMAX Terminal Introduction & Knowledge l Summary of frequent terminal sort summary -------------------------------------------------------------Level1 l Detail configuration instruction of frequent terminal---------------------------------------------------- Level1 3.1 Summary of frequent terminal sort summary 3.1.1 Sort according to the shape and interface Usually sort according to the shape and interface as following: USB card Express card PCMCIA card Outdoor CPE Indoor CPE(Modem) Figure 108 Indoor CPE Figure 109 USB Card 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 134 页
  • 148. WiMAX network optimization Figure 110 Express CPE Figure 111 Outdoor CPE 3.1.2 Sort according to the chip vendor Sort according to the chip vendor as following: GCT Beceem(ZTE Beccem USB Card、ZTE Express Card、Beceem PCMCIA Card) Sequans(USI CPE、USI Express Card) Intel(ZTE Intel USB Card) Fujitsu Runcom 3.2 Detail configuration instruction of frequent terminal 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 135 页
  • 149. WiMAX network optimization 3.2.1 USI CPE terminal 3.2.1.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction When need to modify frequency point or update version for terminal, please land appointed web page to operate; Appoint IP address as 192.168.0.168; then input web address http://192.168.0.10 in IE, and input user name and password as “admin”, it will appear following page: Figure 112 USI CPE IE Configure Page Select and login channel&frequency web page, modify physical layer parameters; 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 136 页
  • 150. WiMAX network optimization Figure 113 USI CPE Physical layer parameters configuration Select and login security web page, set authtication parameters; 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 137 页
  • 151. WiMAX network optimization Figure 114 USI CPE authtication IE configurations Select and login firmware upgrade of tools web page, and start to upgrade and update; 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 138 页
  • 152. WiMAX network optimization Figure 115 USI software upgrade 3.2.1.2 Use command Remote telnet 192.168.0.10, and input user name and password as “admin”, then use related command to Check that RSSI and CINR values at MS. Command: cmd "showssphystatsdl" Should use the CINR reuse 1 value to judge the quality of downlink, 27dB is good; cmd "showssphystats" To display all phy status, included different RFs; cmd "showssphy" To display the phy status in detail. Finally change the IP address as automatic gain mode after all the parameters configuration finished, then the terminal will connect to network normally. 3.2.2 ZTE terminal (base on Beceem chip) 3.2.2.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction 1. Install WCM WCM is a tool of wireless connection and management, Firstly must have installed three software patches before install WCM. They patches as following: dotnetfx-2.0.Exe, WinPcap_4_0_1.Exe, WindowsInstaller-KB893803-x86.Exe。 2. Modify terminal configuration parameters If finished the installation, it will create a map mark of Beceem Config File Editor in desktop, click , and then select File - >Open->Macxvi.Cfg, start to modify some parameters. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 139 页
  • 153. WiMAX network optimization Figure 116 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 1 Figure 117 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 2 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 140 页
  • 154. WiMAX network optimization 2.1 Modify frequency point Center Frequency:inputed frequency point need to convert.For example set Center Frequency as 2545(MHz),so use calculator to compute formula is 2545*4,and then convert into 16 hex result is 27C4,finally input the result in red box. Figure 118 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 3 The other items can fill directly. 2.2 Manually physical synchronization change as automatically physical synchronization(notice: this parameter needs to modify, or the terminal will don’t have signal). After finish the driver installation, the default mode of terminal is manually physical synchronization, need to change into automatically physical synchronization. In the following red box, change the“PhyParameter2”into 0. 0——automatically synchronize (don’t need to click connect for getting signal) 1——manually synchronize (need to click connect for getting signal) 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 141 页
  • 155. WiMAX network optimization Figure 119 ZTE Beeccem chip parameters changed 4 2.3 Shutdown timer value If the terminal is idle for some time, not access, the terminal will enter shutdown state (as shown in Figure a red box). If after entering the shutdown state, connet button (as shown in Figure A purple box) is shaded, then the parameters need to be "ShutDown Time Value" was revised to FFFFFFFF, disable this feature follows the red box shown in Figure B. If the same key connet ash, as long as you connect key points, terminal will begin to synchronize, and then click connect button, they start to access. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 142 页
  • 156. WiMAX network optimization Figure 120 ZTE Beeccem chip parameter A Figure 121 ZTE Beeccem chip parameter B 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 143 页
  • 157. WiMAX network optimization 2.4 The other frequent parameters instructions i.PKMv2 Enable = 0/1 ---0 shows close authentication,1shows open authentication ii.HostDrvrConfig6 = 0x0301 --- 301 shows manually connect,303 shows automatically connect. iii.MIMO Enable 101 ——both enable uplink and downlink MIMO 100—— uplink MIMO enable 1—— downlink MIMO enable 0——both enable uplink and downlink MIMO iv..HARQ 0——HARQ ban 1——transport HARQ enable 101——both enable transport HARQ and management HARQ v. PUSC 0——support PUSC all of subchannels 1——support PUSC part of subchannels(1/3 subchannels) 3.2.2.2 TTIS authentication configuration 1. Open Beceem Config File Editor 2. Open configuration file, change PKMv2 Enable into 1, and save it,then pull out and insert card again. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 144 页
  • 158. WiMAX network optimization Figure 122 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 1 3. Open Beceem Wireless Connection 4. Click Option 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 145 页
  • 159. WiMAX network optimization Figure 123 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 2 Click option, and then appear following dialog box i.Select Authentication page, Enable authentication In the second red box set user name and password:Default Identity——TTLS user name,Default password——TTLS password. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 146 页
  • 160. WiMAX network optimization Figure 124 ZTE Beeccem chip authentication configuration 3 ii.Select EAP page In the first red box EAP methord select EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 In the second red box import certificate, it provided by basetation side, and can save it in the hard disk beforehand. In the third red and green box import MAC address of the terminal, and the purple box import the postfix of AAA configuration user name,such as“@agwzte.com.cn”. Finally click ok. Connect Manually connect and authentication, the need to use tools Beceem Wireless Connection Mgr. WCM installation is complete, will be generated on the desktop icon Beceem Wireless Connection Mgr. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 147 页
  • 161. WiMAX network optimization Specific settings and detailed information please refer to WCM installation directory under the built-in Wireless Connection Manager User Manual.Pdf document. Figure 125 ZTE Beeccem Chip authentication configuration 4 Note: All installation and Beceem tools to choose a place relating to the path, the path is best not to include Chinese, otherwise it will create such anomalies can not be installed. 5 Firmare version upgrade description Firmware version from old to new version, first in the control panel - Add or Remove Programs,there will be the old firware (software name: ZTE_WiMAX_Modem "version number") to delete, and then in accordance with the new version of the firmware. Tools generally do not need to re-install. 3.2.3 GCT terminal 3.2.3.1 Configuration parameters operation instruction When finished the driver program installation, need to open WCM and configure user information, set frequency point parameters. User information set: click setting button and input user information (include user type, password, EAP type, server’s CA Cert and so on); Frequency point set: use “sf” command configures system frequency point; 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 148 页
  • 162. WiMAX network optimization Figure 126 GCT Card Configure page Clinck “Connect”button after finished configuration, the terinal will start to access network. 3.2.3.2 Common command instruction 3.2.3.2.1 Set frequency Usage: sf RF1_ID RF2_ID Channel_ID (for FPGA board) sf Channel_ID [Frequency_kHz] (for GDM7201 EBK) Remarks: The ‘sf’ command sets RF frequency to the value given by ‘FA’. Available value of FA is as shown below. Channel_ID Action 0 2336MHz (KT-Band) 1 2345MHz (KT-Band) 2 2354MHz (KT-Band) 3 2367.5MHz 4 2376.5MHz 5 2385.5MHz 6 2304.5MHz 7 2313.5MHz 3.2.3.2.2 Print packet command Usage: p [um|dm|ucd|dcd|mna|f] Remarks: 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 149 页
  • 163. WiMAX network optimization The ‘p’ command prints out a recently received packet specified by the command parameter. The command parameter may be one of f, um, dm, ucd, dcd and mna. The meaning of each parameter is as shown below. Parameter Name Action f Display FCH um Display UL-MAP dm Display DL-MAP ucd Display UCD dcd Display DCD mna Display MOB_NBR-ADV cm Display Compressed-MAP Example: p um ==> Display recent UL-MAP packet p dm ==> Display recent DL-MAP packet p mna ==> Display recent MOB_NBR-ADV packet 3.2.3.2.3 Dump command Usage: dump option Remarks: The ‘dump’ command shows internal firmware information such as firmware-version, connections status and internal data structures. The first parameter ‘option’ indicates the type of internal information to be dumped out. Available set of ‘option’ parameters is described in the following table. Dump option Action ver Display firmware version information. conn Display internal data structure for connection buf Display internal buffer status. tim Display internal timer information. arq Display ARQ(or Non-ARQ) service flow information nbr Display neighbor information burst Display number of UL/DL bursts for each modulation & coding type. This statistics can be reset by ‘test reset stat’ command. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 150 页
  • 164. WiMAX network optimization queue Display internal queue status crc Display statistics on CRC packet error. cid Display registered CID table ho Display internal handover structure Example: dump ver ==> dump firmware version dump arq ==> dump ARQ information 3.2.3.2.4 Configuration command Usage: cfg [type] [options] Remarks: The ‘cfg’ command changes internal configuration for the category given by the ‘type’ parameter. The ‘options’ parameter indicates option for each category where the categories are described in the following sections. We have two different ways of entering each parameter value – (1) entering each option parameter value in order, (2) entering option name and value in pair as shown in the following example. cfg cqi 1 6 // CQI enable=1, CQI nbits=6 cfg cqi nbits 6 // CQI nbits=6 1. CQI configuration Configuration options: Optio n Action enable 0 ==> CQI disable, 1==> CQI enable nbits Number of bits used for CQI encoding (4 ==> Fast Feedback, 6 ==> Enhanced fast feedback) offset CQI report offset min Minimum CQI value max Maximum CQI value Example: cfg cqi 1 6 0 0 31 // enable=1, nbits=6, offset=0, min=0, max=31 cfg cqi offset 4 // offset=4 cfg cqi min 10 31 // min=10, max=31 2. DBG configuration Usage: cfg dbg [dbg_type] [dbg_mask] [ON/OFF] Cfg dbg dl 0xf 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 151 页
  • 165. WiMAX network optimization Parameters: DBG_ Type DBG_Mask UPPE R bit#0: Basic upper-MAP message bit#1: Set/Get information related message bit#2: UP traffic message bit#3: Down traffic message bit#4: Status message HARQ bit#0: HARQ DL-burst debugging bit#1: HARQ UL-Burst debugging bit#2: HARQ DL-Ack debugging bit#3: HARQ UL-Ack debugging UL bit#0: Display data-grant information bit#1: Display bandwidth request bit#2: Display UL PDU size PKM PKM message DL bit#0: DL burst debugging (DL-MAP IE) bit#1: DL burst loss bit#2: Rx burst queue bit#3: Rx PDU ARQ bit#0: Display tx ARQ information (BSN) bit#1: Display rx ARQ information (BSN) bit#2: Display rx ARQ Feedback information bit#3: Display tx ARQ Feedback information bit#4: Display rx ARQ Feedback with missing blocks bit#5: Display tx ARQ Feedback with missing blocks bit#6: ARQ Rx retry bit#7: ARQ Tx retry PM bit#0: Tx PM information bit#1: RF PM information (ON/OFF timing) bit#2: RF PM information (activation timing) bit#3: System PM MIMO Bit#0: Display ZONE_STC_IE Bit#1: Display MIMO DL-MAP Bit#2: Display MIMO UL-MAP Bit#3: Display MIMO Compressed MAP The other common commands please refer to document of <GCT_Text_DM_Quick_Refrence>. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 152 页
  • 166. WiMAX network optimization Section4 WiMAX Network KPI Introduction & Knowledge l WiMAX network performance KPI introduction --------------------------------------------------------Level3 l KPI statistic tool CNO2 introduction --------------------------------------------------------------------- Level3 4.1 WiMAX network performance KPI introduction 4.1.1 KPI concept KPI (Key Performance Indication): key performance index, through setting, sampling, calculation, analysis for the key parameters of a process input and output ends of the inner organization;it is a targeted quantitative management index for measurement of process performance management. It is a tool that can make the strategic objectives of the enterprise be decomposed into long-term objectives for the operation, and it is also the basis of performance management system for enterprise. KPI is a modern enterprise in the universal importance of performance appraisal methods. KPI application is widely used for products assessment; it has become widely accepted measure of product performance evaluation methods. 4.1.2 WiMAX KPI introduce 4.1.2.1 Coverage KPI 4.1.2.1.1 DL/UL RSSI Name: Received Signal Strength Indication Meaning: measure the received signal strength of RF front-end, including the noise, interference and channel losses, so a high RSSI index does not necessarily mean good quality channel. It is a reference index to measure of the level of network planning and optimization. Measurement method: UL RSSI through by the performance statistical tools for statistics at the base station side; DL RSSI statistics through by CNT tools at the terminal side. Unit: dBm 4.1.2.1.2 DL/UL CINR Name: Carrier-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 153 页
  • 167. WiMAX network optimization Meaning: CINR defines the ratio between a useful carrier frequency signal level and noise level; it is an important index to measure the level of network coverage. Measurement method: UL CINR statistics collect by the base station performance management, DL CINR through by CNT network optimization test tools at the terminal side. Unit: dB 4.1.2.1.2 DL/UL Tx Power Name: Transmit Power Meaning: main inclue system base station transmits power and terminal transmits power; it is also an important index to measure the level of network coverage. Measurement method: UL Tx Power through by CNT network optimization test tools for statistic, and DL Tx Power through by the base station performance management. Unit: dBm 4.1.2.2 System Performance KPI 4.1.2.2.1 Initial Access 1.Initial Access Success Rate: Name: Initial access success rate Meaning: It is an important index to measure the ability of establishing call connection. Formula: the initial access success rate * 100 = the number of success initial access / (the number of success initial access + the number of failure initial access). Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics Unit: % 2. Average Time Latency of Initial Access: Name: Initial access delay 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 154 页
  • 168. WiMAX network optimization Meaning: It is also an important index to measure the ability of establishing call connection. Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics Units: ms Signaling flow and statistical points Figure 127 Initial access flow 4.1.2.2.2 Service Flow Setup 1. Service Flow Setup Success Rate Name: service flow setup success rate Meaning: Initial network access is completed; the network side should launch the setup of preparatory service flow. This index is one of the important indexs for measure the ability of system calls setup. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 155 页
  • 169. WiMAX network optimization Formula: service flow setup success rate = the number of success service flow setup * 100 / (the number of success service flow setup + the number of failure service flow setup) Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics Unit: % 2. Average Time Latency of Service Connection Setup Name: the average delay of service flow setup Meanning: It is also an important index for measure the ability of system calls setup. Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics Units: ms 3. Signaling flow and statistical points Figure 128 Service setup flow 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 156 页
  • 170. WiMAX network optimization 4.1.2.2.3 System Connection Drop Rate 1. Name: system connection drop rate Meaning: it is due to the system caused by abnormal dropped calls during the service transmission phase, and it is an important index to reflect the ability of system call and maintain, it can also be used to measure the operation state and QoS processing capabilities. Including MS / BS / AGW / IDLE abnormaly caused by dropped calls. Formula: system connection drop rate = abnormal release num* 100 / (abnormal release num + normal release num) Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics Unit: % 2. Signaling flow and statistical points Figure 129 System connection drop flow 4.1.2.2.4 Hard Handover 1. Name: Hard handover success rate Meaning: including the same frequency and different frequency handover of inter_BS, handover of intra_BS, it is difference between the inter_BS and intra_BS for handover process. The higher the index, the probability of dropped calls for mobile users to the smaller, and it is an important index to measure the mobile ability of wireless systems. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 157 页
  • 171. WiMAX network optimization Formula: Hard Handover Success Rate = Hard Handover Success num * 100 / (Hard Handover Success num + Hard Handover Fail num) Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics Unit: % 2. Signaling flow and statistical points 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 158 页
  • 172. WiMAX network optimization MS SBS TBSn AGW(HO+DP) AGW(Auth enticator) 4 R6_HO_Req(MSInfo) 5 R6_HO_Req 6 R6_AK_Context_Req 7 R6_AK_Transfer(AK,AKID,AKLifetime,AKSN) 8 R6_Path_Pre_RegReq 9 R6_Path_Pre_RegRsp 10 R6_HO_Response 1 MOB_NDR_ADV 2 Association with neighbor BS 3 MOB_MSHO_REQ (MSID,target BS list) 12 MOB_BSHO_RSP (recommended BS=BTSx,newCID) 13 Externed_SN_Subheader 14 MOB_HO_IND (HO_IND_TYPE) 11 R6_HO_Response 1 5 R6_H O_Confirm 17 RNG_REQ 18 RNG_RSP 19 SBC_REQ 20 SBC_RSP 21 REG_REQ 22 REG_RSP 23 SN_Report 16 R6_HO_Confirm 24)R6_Path_Reg_Req 25)R6_Path_Reg_Rsp 26)R6_HO_Complete 27)R6_HO_Complete 28 )R6_Path_DReg_Req 29 )R6_Path_DReg_RSP Figure 130 Hard handover flow 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 159 页
  • 173. WiMAX network optimization 3. Average Interrupted Time Latency of Hard Handover Name: Average interrupt latency of Hard Handover Meaning: the duration of call interruption time when MS make handover, the index may affect the provision of service continuity capabilities, and it is an important index to measure the mobile ability of wireless systems, the smaller the index value, the user's experience not more obvious when the handover occur. Formula: see flowchart Statistical methods: the base station performance statistics Units: ms 4. Signaling flow and statistical points 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 160 页
  • 174. WiMAX network optimization MS SBS TBSn AGW(HO+DP) AGW(Auth enticator) 4 R6_HO_Req(MSInfo) 5 R6_HO_Req 6 R6_AK_Context_Req 7 R6_AK_Transfer(AK,AKID,AKLifetime,AKSN) 8 R6_Path_Pre_RegReq 9 R6_Path_Pre_RegRsp 10 R6_HO_Response 1 MOB_NDR_ADV 2 Association with neighbor BS 3 MOB_MSHO_REQ (MSID,target BS list) 12 MOB_BSHO_RSP (recommended BS=B TSx,newCID) 13 Externed_SN_Subheader 14 MOB_HO_IND (HO_IND_TYPE) 11 R6_HO_Response 15 R6_HO_Con firm 17 RNG_REQ 18 RNG_RSP 19 SBC_REQ 20 SBC_RSP 21 REG_REQ 22 REG_RSP 23 SN_Report 16 R6_HO_Confirm 24)R6_Path_Reg_Req 25)R6_Path_Reg_Rsp 26)R6_HO_Complete 27)R6_HO_Complete 28)R6_Path_DReg_Req 29)R6_Path_DRe g_RSP Figure 131 Hard handover duration flow 4.1.2.2.5 Delay Name: Delay for UGS Ping Service Meaning: This index through ping packets to measure end-to-end delay of UGS service, the ping packet bytes corresponding with the length of commonly UGS service, package used long. It is an 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 161 页
  • 175. WiMAX network optimization important index to measure the ability of system ensures UGS service. The smaller the value means that the delay of system transfer UGS packe is shorter. Calculation formula: Through the ping command to obtain delay, and then make the average of N times the delays. Statistical methods: In the terminal-side or server-side through the ping command. Units: ms Peer-to-peer KPI: similar indexs include ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS and BE services ping packet delay, and measure respectively the levels of several services delay. The following table is the simulated packet length for all kinds of services type ping packets. Service Type UGS ErtPS rtPS nrtPS BE Packets length (Byte) 200 200 1400 1400 or 1500 1400 or 1500 4.1.2.2.6 Jitter Name: Jitter for UGS Ping Service Meaning: Jitter indicate that from the terminal sent a UGS service packet to the core network has been received (or sent from the core network to the terminal has been received) changes in the value of the delay. This is an important index to measure the ability of system ensures UGS service. The smaller the value means that system transimit more stable for UGS packets. Formula: jitter = Delay (max)-Delay (all_packet_in_stream) Statistical methods: Through ping command to get delay at the terminal side or core network side, and then calculated jitter according to the formula. Units: ms 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 162 页
  • 176. WiMAX network optimization Peer-to-peer KPI: similar indexs include ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS and BE services ping packet jitter, and measure respectively the levels of several services jitter. Service Type UGS ErtPS rtPS nrtPS BE Packets length (Byte) 200 200 1400 1400 or 1500 1400 or 1500 4.1.2.2.7 Packet Loss Name: Packet loss for UGS Service Meaning: This index defines the proportion of lost packets with the total transmission packets of the IP layer. This is an important index to measure the ability of system ensure UGS service. The smaller the value means that the correction ability of system transimission is stronger for UGS service packets. Formula: packet loss = 100 * Number-of-lost-packets/Total-number-of-sent-packets Statistical methods: Use Iperf tool transmit the corresponding with UGS service the same length packets to abttain this index value at terminal side or core network server. Unit: % Peer-to-peer KPI: similar indexs include ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS and BE services packet loss rate, and measure respectively the levels of several services packet loss. 4.1.2.3 KPI recommend value According to reference project test experience, we provide the recommend value for these KPI as follow: Table 21 KPI reference value KPI REFERENCE VALUE DL CINR >10dB DL RSSI >-85dBm Initial Access Success Rate >95% Average Access Duration <5s System connection drop rate <2% 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 163 页
  • 177. WiMAX network optimization Optimized Hard Handover Success Rate intra Sector >90% Optimized Hard Handover Success Rate inter Sector >90% Intra-BBU Hard Handoff Interrupt Average Duration <120ms Inter-BBU Hard Handoff Interrupt Average Duration <120ms Delay for Ping Service <160ms Jitter for UGS iperf Service <80ms Packet Loss <1% PER <1% 4.2 KPI statistic tool CNO2 introduction 4.2.1 Introduction of CNO2 ZXPOS CNO2 (Mobile Communication Network Integrated Expert Office II) is a network optimization & analysis software belonging to ZTE ZXPOS network plan and optimization solution. Based on OMC data (CM、FM、PM、CDT etc.) CNO2 cooperates with other ZXPOS software to give customer a comprehensive and powerful solution for network planning, constructing, running and maintenance. As a powerful optimization & analysis platform, it is accomplished in depth presentation, analysis, drill of the network performance data and network running status. Robust nature and flexible deployment together with user friendly nature ensures proper analysis and as a result the optimization of the network becomes easier and faster. The functions of CNO2 is classified to basic functions provided with ZTE OMC software and advanced functions optional for meeting the needs of customers flexibly. 4.2.2 Benefit of using CNO2 Ø Reduce a great deal of artificial labor in the process of network maintenance everyday and make the customers manpower cost lower. Ø Cut the period from discovering a problem to solving the problem. Ø Let customers better understand and evaluate network performance all-sided and exactly to raise the devotion produces a ratio. 4.2.3 Data Characteristic of CNO2 Ø CM data and PM data of OMC are collected real-timely into CNO2 as secondary data storage each hour for post-statistics and post-analysis. CNO2 PM data collection from OMC has the 40(min) delay relative to OMC PM data collection. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 164 页
  • 178. WiMAX network optimization Ø CNO2 data (CM/PM) are transmitted from CNO2-OMM to CNO2-NMC each hour, which makes many CNO2-OMMs, can be managed centrally by CNO2-NMC. Each CNO2-NMC can manage 20 CNO2-OMMs. Ø CNO2 PM data have hourly granularity and day granularity. The PM hour data and day data storage scales in CNO2-OMM are 40 days and 90 days, and in CNO2-NMC they are 7 days and 180 days. Ø History data (CM/PM) will be maintained automatically in CNO2-NMC and CNO2-OMMs. 4.2.4 Advantage of CNO2 Ø CNO2 is a web based enterprise application. It is constructed by browser/server three tiers structure and makes customs access ease and quick. Customs are dismissed any agony for client software’s installing and updating. Ø CNO2 is module structure designed, safe and reliable, with powerful fault-tolerant & 7*24 hours running capability. Ø CNO2 offers many basic functions and optional advanced functions to meet the needs of customers with different administrative levels. Ø CNO2 offered a powerful WiMAX network performance KPI index system to make customers evaluate network status from many angles multi-layer stereoscopic. Ø Based on the powerful index system and other kinds of running data, CNO2 offered powerful analysis tools such as basic statistics, TopN analysis, Failure Reason analysis, CDT analysis etc. to speed the procedure of discovering a problem and solving the problem. Ø CNO2 can be deployed flexibly in ZTE OMM, LOMC, and POMC or be deployed independently. This flexibility will make the customer have more choices to combine economical their hardware investment. Ø CNO2 have good stability, scalability and expansibility. 4.2.5 Main Operation Statistic steps of CNO2 for WiMAX CNO2 supports WiMAX network performance KPI. It provides ample indexes’ and statistics template by default. 1. Sign in the CNO2 (both username and password is cno2); 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 165 页
  • 179. WiMAX network optimization Figure 132 Land interface 2. Open system management, enter into template management create statistic indexes template; Figure 133 Template management interface 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 166 页
  • 180. WiMAX network optimization Figure 134 Create indexes template 3. Open analysis tools, set statistic time, select the created template ,click ”search” button, start to statistic; Figure 135 Analysis tool interface 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 167 页
  • 181. WiMAX network optimization Figure 136 Choose statistic indexes interface 4. Read and record the statistic result; Figure 137 Statistic result interface The more CNO2 functions and specific operations please refer to document of <ZXPOS CNO2 User Manual>. 本文中的所有信息均为中兴通讯股份有限公司秘密信息,不得向外传播第 168 页